NASA/TP–2014-217518

April 2014

Stanford B. Hooker

National Aeronautics and 

Space Administration 

Goddard Space Flight Center

Greenbelt, Maryland 20771

Mobilization Protocols for Hybrid Sensors for Environmental AOP 

Sampling (HySEAS) Observations
Since its founding, NASA has been dedicated to the 

advancement of aeronautics and space science. The 

NASA scienti¿c and technicaO information ST, program pOa\s a Ne\ part in heOping NASA maintain this 

important roOe. 

The NASA ST, program operates under the auspices 

of the Agenc\ &hief ,nformation 2f¿cer. ,t coOOects, 

organizes, provides for archiving, and disseminates 

NASA¶s ST,. The NASA ST, program provides access 

to the NASA Aeronautics and Space Database and its 

pubOic interface, the NASA TechnicaO 5eport Server, 

thus providing one of the Oargest coOOections of aeronauticaO and space science ST, in the ZorOd. 5esuOts 

are pubOished in both non-NASA channeOs and b\

NASA in the NASA ST, 5eport Series, Zhich incOudes 

the foOOoZing report t\pes 

• T(&+N,&A/ 38%/,&AT,2N. 5eports of 

compOeted research or a maMor signi¿cant phase of 

research that present the resuOts of NASA 3rograms 

and incOude e[tensive data or theoreticaO anaO\sis. 

,ncOudes compiOations of signi¿cant scienti¿c and 

technicaO data and information deemed to be of 

continuing reference vaOue. NASA counterpart of 

peer-revieZed formaO professionaO papers but has 

Oess stringent Oimitations on manuscript Oength and 

e[tent of graphic presentations. 

• T(&+N,&A/ 0(025AND80. Scienti¿c 

and technicaO ¿ndings that are preOiminar\ or of 

speciaOized interest, e.g., TuicN reOease reports, 

ZorNing papers, and bibOiographies that contain 

minimaO annotation. Does not contain e[tensive 

anaO\sis. 

• &2NT5A&T25 5(325T. Scienti¿c and technicaO

¿ndings b\ NASA-sponsored contractors and 

grantees. 

• &2N)(5(N&( 38%/,&AT,2N. &oOOected 

papers from scienti¿c and technicaO conferences, 

s\mposia, seminars, or other meetings sponsored or 

co-sponsored b\ NASA. 

• S3(&,A/ 38%/,&AT,2N. Scienti¿c, technicaO, 

or historicaO information from NASA programs, 

proMects, and missions, often concerned Zith 

subMects having substantiaO pubOic interest. 

• T(&+N,&A/ T5ANS/AT,2N. (ngOish-Oanguage 

transOations of foreign scienti¿c and technicaO

materiaO pertinent to NASA¶s mission. 

SpeciaOized services aOso incOude organizing and 

pubOishing research resuOts, distributing speciaOized 

research announcements and feeds, providing heOp 

desN and personaO search support, and enabOing data 

e[change services. )or more information about the 

NASA ST, program, see the foOOoZing 

• Access the NASA ST, program home page at 

httpZZZ.sti.nasa.gov 

• (-maiO \our Tuestion via the ,nternet to 

heOp#sti.nasa.gov 

• )a[ \our Tuestion to the NASA ST, +eOp DesN at 

443-757-5803 

• 3hone the NASA ST, +eOp DesN at 443-757-580 

• :rite to

NASA ST, +eOp DesN

NASA &enter for AeroSpace ,nformation 

7115 Standard Drive 

+anover, 0D 107-130

NASA ST, 3rogram ... in 3rofiOe 
National Aeronautics and 

Space Administration 

Goddard Space Flight Center

Greenbelt, Maryland 20771

NASA/TP–2014-217518

April 2014

Mobilization Protocols for Hybrid Sensors for Environmental AOP 

Sampling (HySEAS) Observations

Stanford B. Hooker

Goddard Space Flight Center, Greenbelt, Maryland
AvaiOabOe from 

NASA &enter for AeroSpace ,nformation 

7115 Standard Drive 

+anover, 0D 107-130

NationaO TechnicaO ,nformation Service 

585 3ort 5o\aO 5oad 

Spring¿eOd, 9A 11 3rice &ode A17

Level of Review: This material has been technically reviewed by technical management.

Trade names and trademarNs are used in this report for identification onO\. Their usage does not 

constitute an officiaO endorsement, either e[pressed or impOied, b\ the NationaO Aeronautics and 

Space Administration.

Notice for Copyrighted Information

This manuscript is a ZorN of the 8nited States *overnment authored as part of the officiaO duties 

of empOo\ees of the NationaO Aeronautics and Space Administration. No cop\right is cOaimed 

in the 8nited States under TitOe 17, 8.S. &ode. AOO other rights are reserved b\ the 8nited States 

*overnment. An\ pubOisher accepting this manuscript for pubOication acNnoZOedges that the 8nited 

States *overnment retains a none[cOusive, irrevocabOe, ZorOdZide Oicense to prepare derivative 

ZorNs, pubOish or reproduce the pubOished form of this manuscript, or aOOoZ others to do so, for 

8nited States *overnment purposes.
S.B. Hooker

Abstract

The protocols presented here enable the proper mobilization of the latest-generation instruments for measuring

the apparent optical properties (AOPs) of aquatic ecosystems. The protocols are designed for the Hybrid

Sensors for Environmental AOP Sampling (HySEAS) class of instruments, but are applicable to the community

of practice for AOP measurements. The protocols are organized into eleven sections beyond an introductory

overview: a) cables and connectors, b) HySEAS instruments, c) platform preparation, d) instrument installation,

e) cable installation, f) test deployment, g) test recovery, h) maintenance, i) shipping, j) storage, and k) smallboat operations. Each section concentrates on documenting how to prevent the most likely faults, remedy them

should they occur, and accomplishing both with the proper application of a modest set of useful tools. Within

the twelve sections, there are Socratic exercises to stimulate thought, and the answers to these exercises appear

in Appendix A. Frequently asked questions (FAQs) are summarized in a separate section after the answers to the

exercises in Appendix B. For practitioners unfamiliar with the nautical terms used throughout this document

plus others likely encountered at sea, an abbreviated dictionary of nautical terms appears in Appendix C. An

abbreviated dictionary of radiotelephone terms is presented in Appendix D. To ensure familiarity with many

of the tools that are presented, Appendix E provides a description of the tools alongside a thumbnail picture.

Abbreviated deployment checklists and cable diagrams are provided in Appendix F. The document concludes

with an acknowledgments section, a glossary of acronyms, a definition of symbols, and a list of references.

1. INTRODUCTION

A number of international ocean color satellite sensors

were designed and launched in the last two decades to support oceanographic studies and applications including the

Ocean Color and Temperature Scanner (OCTS), the Seaviewing Wide Field-of-view Sensor (SeaWiFS), two Moderate Resolution Imaging Spectroradiometer (MODIS) instruments, the Medium Resolution Imaging Spectrometer

(MERIS), and the recently launched Visible and Infrared

Imaging Radiometer Suite (VIIRS). All of these sensors

have contributed solutions to the general problem of inverting optical measurements obtained principally in the

visible (VIS) part of the spectral domain to derive concentration estimates of biogeochemical parameters, and some

continue to provide coverage of the global biosphere.

The worldwide deployment of commercial off-the-shelf

(COTS) radiometers has been the primary source of validation data for ocean color remote sensing data products,

because they are designed to sample the dynamic range of

water types involved. The SeaWiFS Bio-optical Archive

and Storage System (SeaBASS) continues to provide longterm access to these data for the global community, since

its inception (Hooker et al. 1994). COTS instruments have

also been used for vicarious calibration (Bailey et al. 2008

and Antoine et al. 2008), which is primarily an open-ocean

problem because of the need for spatial and temporal homogeneity during sampling, at a similar level of efficacy to

custom hardware, e.g., the Marine Optical Buoy (MOBY)

activity (Clark et al. 1997).

For the SeaWiFS Project, the first step in the process of controlling uncertainties in calibration and validation data was establishing, through community consensus,

and then publishing, the SeaWiFS Ocean Optics Protocols (Mueller and Austin 1992), hereafter referred to as

the Protocols. The Protocols are a work in progress and

were revised (Mueller and Austin 1995) and subsequently

expanded (Mueller 2000, 2002, and 2003) by having the

scientific community decide the topics be updated. The

Protocols set the requirements for all ground-truth—more

properly sea-truth—observations, and although the Protocols were initially established for the SeaWiFS Project

alone, follow-on ocean color missions advocated adherence

to the Protocols to minimize uncertainties in sea-truth and

remote sensing data products.

The central theme presented here is the incremental

pursuit of more accurate field observations to ensure access to state-of-the-art advances by making the hardware,

software, and information solutions commercially or publicly available. The current challenge in ocean color remote

sensing is to extend the accomplishments achieved in the

open ocean into much shallower coastal habitats (Hooker

et al. 2007), e.g., estuaries and rivers (Antoine et al. 2013).

This requirement is driven by the present focus of satellite

observations, which is inexorably linked to launching new

missions based on novel research topics to derive new scientific results from an expanded spectral domain—i.e., the

ultraviolet (UV) to the near-infrared (NIR).

A principal objective of the procedures presented here

is to prepare for the next-generation of ocean color satellites (NRC 2007 and NASA 2010)—which will emphasize

expanded spectral (UV to NIR) and dynamic (open ocean

to rivers) ranges—with the most capable COTS instruments (hardware and software) in the shortest time possible. The latter is required to ensure that the science teams

1
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

can start collecting the baseline observations needed to begin formulating and testing the myriad details associated

with hypotheses, algorithms, and databases for the new,

spectrally more expansive, next-generation missions. At

the same time, applicability to current-generation missions

must be maintained with sampling in the legacy (VIS) domain. Because of the emphasis on the near-shore environment, which is typified by shallow water depths and an

optically complex vertical structure, there is the added requirement to demonstrate that the new capabilities can be

validated in waters with unprecedented multi-dimensional

heterogeneity (Doxaran 2012, Matsuoka et al. 2012, and

Fichot et al. 2013).

As part of an emphasis on innovation in global observations of the Earth system from space, NASA has a

present- and next-generation requirement to collect highquality in situ data for the vicarious calibration of ocean

color satellite sensors and to validate the algorithms that

use the remote sensing data. For ocean color, the physical

measurement is the spectral radiance emerging from the

ocean, the so-called water-leaving radiance, LW (λ), where

λ denotes wavelength (Hooker and Esaias 1993). “High

quality” refers to measurements with a documented uncertainty to within established metrics for producing climate

data records (CDRs). Derivations of LW (λ) are routinely

obtained by extrapolating near-surface in-water profiles of

the upwelled radiance Lu(z, λ) to null depth, z = 0-.

Contemporaneous satellite and in situ match-up data

(usually collected to within 60–180 min in the open ocean)

are required for calibration and validation activities. The

applicable COTS field instruments and information systems infrastructure needed to derive and archive LW (λ)

data for next-generation baseline analyses include the following:

• The state-of-the-art field instrumentation, e.g., an inwater Compact-Optical Profiling System (C-OPS) or

above-water Biospherical Surface and Celestial Acquisition Network (BioSCAN) with applicable accessories (http://biospherical.com/);

• The Ocean Optics Protocols for acquiring the field

data and producing the agreed upon data products

(http://oceancolor.gsfc.nasa.gov/DOCS/);

• A data processing scheme for producing the data

products, e.g., the Processing of Radiometric Observations of Seawater using Information Technologies (PROSIT) software program (Hooker and Brown

2014); and

• An accessible repository for the original field data

and subsequent processing results, e.g., SeaBASS at

GSFC (http://seabass.gsfc.nasa.gov/).

A conceptual view of calibration and validation organizes

the hardware, protocols, and processing as a triumvirate

surrounding a central database (Fig. 1), so results or improvements obtained in one component can influence the

other applicable component(s) and lower the risk of being

unable to properly maintain uncertainties.

Fig. 1. An example information flow wherein the

Protocols specify how in situ data are acquired with

the C-OPS field instruments and then processed

with PROSIT to create products to be stored with

the data in SeaBASS. PROSIT tools evaluate uncertainties, which might lead to revised Protocols.

In Fig. 1, reduced risk in one component is linked to

subsequent components, which in turn benefit from the reduced risk. In the iterative flow of the process, the evolving

cost of the system is reduced. Each turn through the cycle is leveraged within the community as a reduced risk

in decision making, and expressed in the applicable NASA

programs as an overall cost benefit. The savings come

from not having to acquire more data, because the quality of the data that were acquired were immediately sufficient. In this regard, risk and uncertainty go hand in

hand: data with high uncertainties are inherently risky for

next-generation mission planning.

The purpose of the protocols presented here is to reduce the uncertainties in sea-truth observations needed for

calibrating and validating the next generation of NASA

ocean color satellites by improving the community of practice and linking it directly to commercial-off-the-shelf optical instrument systems and publicly available information

systems. This will allow any scientist in the world to contribute to climate change research at the requisite quality

level by simply following the procedures with sensors that

are available to all.

The majority of the procedures presented here are not

addressed in the Protocols, so the material is seen as an

important addition to developing the high-quality optical

instruments plus the corresponding data acquisition, processing, and analysis protocols needed for next-generation

ocean color calibration and validation. When combined

with the new technologies that have been developed (Morrow et al. 2010a and Hooker et al. 2012), the procedures

2
S.B. Hooker

are expected to ensure the new technology is ready for

the global scientific community to use for legacy and nextgeneration climate change research. The approach adopted

here is to provide—by specific example—the implicit and

explicit tools, both in terms of hardware and procedures,

needed by any scientist to confirm the acquired field data

are at the requisite quality level.

The inspiration for the level of detail that is presented

in each of the following sections was Mr. Horace Mann (4

May 1796 to 2 August 1859), who was an American education reformer and abolitionist. Horace Mann is credited

with saying (as adapted in 1880),

Habit is a cable; we weave a thread of it each day,

and at last we cannot break it.

This perspective was adopted because it creates the notion

that sensible procedures practiced to the point of habit incrementally reinforce the metrics for success. It also creates the imagery that the importance of a strong cable

is discernible—as is its failure. Understanding these two

states is paramount to successful fieldwork. The level of

detail presented here is designed to expose all the procedural “threads,” so they can be woven together over time

into strong protocols.

Protocols are not infallible; they are implemented to

make use of an instrument system, and system subcomponents can fail of their own accord. Consequently, a complete protocol includes procedures for troubleshooting a

fault and restoring an instrument to nominal performance.

The latter requires tools and, more importantly, tried and

proven tools, so inventories of useful tools are also presented. Given the sophisticated designs of modern instruments, the total number of tools required to remedy all

possible faults requires an impractical inventory for costeffective field campaigns, so only the most likely problems

are considered. Furthermore, the emphasis is on mobilizing on a ship, and ships frequently have a large number of

tools aboard.

1.1 Protocols Organization

The protocols presented here are organized into eleven

additional sections: a) cables and connectors, b) HySEAS

instruments, c) platform preparation, d) instrument installation, e) cable installation, f) test deployment, g) test

recovery, h) maintenance, i) shipping, j) storage, and k)

small-boat operations. Each section concentrates on documenting how to prevent the most likely faults, remedy

them should they occur, and accomplishing both with the

proper application of a modest set of useful tools. The

selection of what constitutes a “most likely” fault out of

a large and evolving number worthy of inclusion is based

on experience. Similarly, the selection of “useful tools” is

also based on life experiences involving a large inventory

of contemplated, accepted, and rejected hardware.

Within the twelve sections, there are Socratic exercises

(i.e., questions posed to the reader) to stimulate thought,

and the answers to these exercises appear in Appendix A.

FAQs from students and less experienced practitioners are

summarized in a separate section after the answers to the

exercises in Appendix B. For practitioners unfamiliar with

the nautical terms used throughout this document plus

others likely encountered at sea, an abbreviated dictionary of nautical terms appears in Appendix C. An abbreviated dictionary of radiotelephone terms is presented in

Appendix D. To ensure familiarity with many of the tools

that are presented, Appendix E provides a description of

the tools alongside a thumbnail picture. Abbreviated deployment checklists and cable diagrams are provided in

Appendix F. The document concludes with an acknowledgments section, a glossary of acronyms, a definition of

symbols, and a list of references.

The choices made to create the material presented are

a combination of subjective and objective analyses, which

must necessarily change over time as the technology they

are designed to protect change and as the tools change,

either in availability or in design. Consequently, the protocols are not viewed as static and this document is one

version of many that will ultimately be produced to correctly mobilize HySEAS instruments.

The procedures are applicable to both above- and inwater AOP sampling systems, but the emphasis is on the

at-sea collection of in-water data, because it is the most

complicated and least forgiving—a ship can decide to not

leave port as severe weather approaches, but once at sea,

the scientists and crews are obliged to withstand all the

natural environment provides. Because this means all personnel can be placed in circumstances associated with high

risk to the safety of themselves and their equipment, the

material includes three levels of warning:

Cautionary explanations to avoid a needless degradation in performance appear separately with the socalled dangerous bend graphic, shown to the left;

If extra caution is warranted, because there is

a significant likelihood of compromising performance, the text appears with double dangerous

bends; and

If extreme caution is required, because there

is an inherent safety risk to personnel (and

secondly safety of equipment) that must be

respected, the text appears with triple dangerous bends.

On marine installations, safety of equipment may also contribute to safety of personnel particularly if loss of vital

equipment places the ship in danger.

The cautionary notes are provided to identify procedures or aspects of the total environment—protocols, personnel, and hardware—that can lead to avoidable problems if they are misinterpreted or not adhered to. All

cautions should be read carefully; adherence to the provided instructions will ensure the safety of personnel and

3
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

Fig. 2. The two end members in platform sizes showing a) the ocean-class R/V Hakuho Maru (left), with

the height of a person standing on the bow setting the scale, and b) the small inflatable boat R/V Recon 18

(right). The former displaces almost 4,000 tons with an overall length of 100 m and two 1,085 kW generators

developing 2,910 hp for propulsion, whereas the latter is a FC 470 military 4.7 m Zodiac fitted with a 30 hp

Nissan outboard and custom-equipped for instrument deployments including 12 VDC and 120 VAC power.

equipment. In some cases, mitigation strategies for the

identified problem might be possible, but others are simply restrictions that cannot be easily overcome and should

not be circumvented.

As an aid to the student and first-time practitioner, Socratic learning exercises are provided throughout the ensuing individual sections. The exercises are designed to

reinforce important aspects of the protocols by providing

additional details in the answers (Appendix A) to logical

questions. They are also designed to establish an inquiring

perspective and encourage research, and are identified by

the following sequence:

Exercise

which is followed by the section number associated with

the material being considered.

Although above-water systems can be deployed on land

to make atmospheric or terrestrial observations, the perspective adopted here is for oceanic data collection. This

does not result in any loss in applicability, because the

ship-based perspective shares common features with land

and offshore structures, for example, all require location or

global positioning system (GPS) information. At-sea deployments require additional considerations, however, because of the harshness of the marine environment and the

fact that a ship is in motion. Consequently, the unique

aspects of the oceanographic sampling problem can be ignored if they are not relevant to an alternative structure

that is being used.

Exercise 1.1 What is likely the most significant advantage and disadvantage of deploying an autonomous

radiometric system on a terrestrial structure as opposed

to an offshore structure or research vessel (R/V)?

1.2 Platforms

Five types of at-sea deployments are considered here

based on arbitrary, but sensibly constrained, sizes of a wide

range in possible deployment platforms. This approach

produces five classifications for the platforms:

• Global- and ocean-class ships (55–90 m or more),

• Regional- and local-class research vessels (20–54 m),

• Coastal (small craft) research vessels (7–19 m),

• Small-boat operations (less than 7 m), and

• Shoreline or shallow-water fixed structures, e.g., a

pier, dock, lighthouse, tower, etc.

These five platform options establish three general cabling

needs: long (55–90 m ships), medium (8–20 m research vessels and fixed structures), and short (small-boat and shoreline operations). Mobilization protocols for this large range

in vessel size (Fig. 2), are virtually the same as given below.

Exercise 1.2 What types of in-water platforms are not

mentioned in the five platform classifications that might

benefit from mobilization protocols?

1.3 Deployment Options

There are four generalized deployment options for inwater AOP sensors: a) free-fall profilers, b) winch and

crane frames, c) buoys (moored or drifting), and d) autonomous vehicles (e.g., gliders). Of these, the emphasis

here is on free-fall systems, because next-generation sampling requires shallow-water systems deployed from small

vessels, which is most effectively accomplished with a freefall profiler, e.g., a C-OPS instrument.

Exercise 1.3 What are additional advantages of a freefall profiler like C-OPS over the following deployment

alternatives: a) winch and crane frame, b) buoy, and c)

glider?

The C-OPS instrumentation (Morrow et al. 2010b),

which is a state-of-the-art replacement for the Submersible

Biospherical Optical Profiling System (SuBOPS) legacy

4
S.B. Hooker

instrument (Hooker et al. 2010a), illustrates a COTS inwater system that can be used across the full dynamic

range of next-generation observational requirements, i.e.,

from the open ocean to rivers and from the UV to NIR.

The two types of deployment options for above-water

instruments—whether on a structure, ship, or airborne

vehicle—are either manually or automatically pointed. A

manual system is emphasized here, because above-water

systems mounted on ships are usually manually pointed.

The BioSCAN instrument is the state-of-the-art replacement of the Biospherical Surface Ocean Reflectance

System (BioSORS) legacy instrument (Hooker et al. 2010b)

and is selected for describing the mobilization procedures

for an above-water system, because it is state of the art

and sufficiently similar to C-OPS in its basic components

that a unified approach to the protocols is facilitated.

The principle deployment option discussed below is the

at-sea mobilization of a C-OPS in-water instrument and an

above-water BioSCAN instrument. These two instrument

systems are both part of the BSI architecture for HySEAS

instrumentation (Sect. 3). Although this focuses the material presented here on two types of sampling systems, the

majority of the protocols presented are applicable to other

similar instruments, deployment options, or platforms and,

therefore, easily adapted to other mobilization scenarios.

1.4 Instrument Components

In terms of the categories of components, the C-OPS

and BioSCAN instruments are purposely similar, and are

comprised of the following five subsystems:

1. A data acquisition computer;

2. A deck box to provide power, control the instruments, receive records, transmit data, and receive

commands from the data acquisition computer;

3. A solar reference, with or without the Biospherical

GPS (BioGPS) or Biospherical Shadowband Accessory for Diffuse Irradiance (BioSHADE);

4. Either an in-water free-falling backplane with a handheld sea cable or an above-water manually pointed

frame, both with two optical sensors; and

5. The cabling that connects the first four components.

Consequently, the distinction between the two systems is

with the fourth subsystem, and the two options both typically use two radiometers. In the case of the in-water

profiler, an irradiance and radiance sensor pair are used;

whereas for the above-water frame, two radiance radiometers are deployed.

For the purposes of keeping track of the inventory of

parts involved, the sea cable for the C-OPS instrument

is considered part of the backplane subsystem, because it

is specially made with a prescribed buoyancy and custom

wire-gauge specifications. It is coiled into a cable bucket

to keep it organized and safe from ship operations. The

bucket shields the cable from side impacts and can be

moved to a sheltered location if necessary.

It is not advisable to use a different sea cable than

the one provided by the manufacturer, because

the backplane free-fall characteristics can be negatively altered, which can lead to degraded in-water data products.

The cabling that is used for all other connections can be

obtained from a variety of sources (e.g., directly from SubConn) as long as the wire gauge and connector specifications are correct. The subsequent sections discuss the protocols associated with the successful mobilization of each

aspect of cables and connectors.

Exercise 1.4 What types of deployment might logically

require a different type of cable for the surface reference

than the one provided?

2. CABLES AND CONNECTORS

For the discussion presented here, the principal purpose of an electrical cable and connector assembly is to

provide a safe and reliable connection for power and data

telemetry between two components. The choice of connector type and cable, i.e., the number of conductors and their

specification plus the outer jacketing enclosing all wires, is

an important aspect of maintaining the capabilities of a

sampling system over the short and long term.

For cable assemblies that provide more functionality

than power and telemetry alone, e.g., that are used to deploy and recover an instrument like C-OPS, there are the

following additional requirements: a) one or more strength

members to accommodate the anticipated tensile forces

created when the instrument is pulled back to the surface

or deployment platform and recovered, and b) material

specifications to set the overall buoyancy of the cable.

Exercise 2.0 What is a principal concern for an electrical cable that is designed to be used to deploy and

recover an instrument system?

Fieldwork is frequently stressful, and most mistakes occur when personnel are distracted (e.g., by an unanticipated problem, sleep deprived from travel or work, lack of

familiarity with the workplace, etc.). A sampling system

that is designed with components and procedures to facilitate correct installation regardless of the circumstances has

a significant advantage over one that can be easily misconstrued and assembled incorrectly—especially for the new

practitioner.

As noted earlier, a principle behind the protocols presented here is that safety, both for the personnel and the

equipment, is a primary concern. In some cases, there are

competing requirements for safety, and the adopted procedure might seem arbitrary, but that is not the case. In

fact, a comprehensive point of view has been applied to all

of the protocols presented here and tested over many years

of fieldwork spanning thousands of hours in the field and

thousands of successful data acquisition events.

5
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

The perspective adopted here is that all cable

connects and disconnects should be done with

the power off, because fieldwork—most notably an oceanographic expedition—involves the high probability of working with wet components, as well as wet hands or feet,

which can result in unintended and potentially hazardous

electrical pathways that might go unnoticed.

It might seem possible that the direct current (DC) levels associated with modern instrument connections cannot

produce hazardous electric shocks to personnel and only

alternating current (AC) sources are of concern. Personnel might also believe the only concern for DC current is

if power is accidentally applied to the wrong pin or socket

on an instrument—which could damage the instrumentation. If the integrity of the cables and connectors have

been compromised or if their integrity is unknown, this is

ill advised and dangerous in all circumstances.

If a cable or connector appears worn or physically damaged—e.g., the outer insulation has

been cut or the body containing the pins or sockets has

been crushed—it should not be used and should be replaced with a fully functional spare.

If cable damage is topical and restricted in extent to the

consequences of normal use, e.g., fraying of the outer jacket

over a small area (Fig. 3), with no evidence that the insulation integrity has been compromised, the frayed jacket

should be wrapped with a brightly colored vinyl electrical

tape to call attention to the area being protected. At some

point, normal use gives way to worn out and a cable must

be replaced. By inspecting and rectifying normal wear, a

cable lasts longer and it will be visually apparent (from

the accumulation of brightly colored over wraps) when a

cable needs to be evaluated for replacement.

Frayed

Section

Over Wrapped

Section

Fig. 3. An example of a small cable section where

the outer jacket is frayed and needs over wrapping

with brightly colored vinyl electrical tape as was

done below, but does not need to be removed from

service and replaced, because the underlying insulating jacket has not been compromised.

2.1 Electrical Grounding

In an electrical circuit, ground refers to the following:

a) the reference point from which other voltages are measured; b) a common return path for electric current; or c) a

direct physical connection to the Earth. For mobilization

applications, the latter two are the most applicable and

involve equipment grounding and earth grounding. Equipment grounding ensures the operating equipment within a

structure has an unbroken connection to the Earth. Earth

grounding is the intentional and physical connection from

a circuit conductor, usually the neutral (or return), to an

electrode placed in the earth or a ship’s hull. When this

connection is absent, the circuit has a floating ground.

Equipment and grounding systems must be kept separate except for a physical connection between the two systems, usually at the point of power distribution. The purpose of the ground connection is to provide a safe path for

the dissipation of differences in unintended voltage potentials. The voltage potentials can arise from the normal operation of equipment (e.g., electromagnetic and radio frequency interference), fault conditions (e.g., wiring mishaps

that accidentally cross wires), or natural phenomena (e.g.,

static discharges and lightning strikes). The safe dissipation of unintentional voltage potential protects the people

and equipment in contact with the voltage potentials.

For measurement purposes, the Earth serves (essentially) as a zero potential reference against which other

potentials can be measured. Consequently, an electrical

ground system should have an appropriate current-carrying

capability to serve as an adequate zero-voltage reference

level. In electronic circuit theory, a ground is usually idealized as an infinite source or sink for charge, which can

absorb an unlimited amount of current without changing

its potential. As such, a ground is a path of least resistance

and ideally should have a resistance of 0 Ω.

Because of variability in the material structure at the

point of contact with the Earth, the resistance to ground

is usually not zero. A single standard resistance threshold for ground resistance that is recognized by all relevant

authorities does not exist. The National Fire Protection

Association (NFPA) provides some guidance on this issue

within the National Electrical Code (NEC) whereby if a

single rod, pipe, or plate electrode has a ground resistance

of 25 Ω or less, a supplemental electrode shall not be required (NEC 2011).

A ground resistance of 25 Ω or less ensures the

ground is significantly less than the resistance

of the human body, which is on the order of 1–1,000 kΩ.

In facilities or applications involving sensitive equipment (e.g., the telecommunications industry), ground resistance is typically set at 5 Ω or less.

The goal in ground resistance is to achieve—and to

maintain over time—the lowest ground resistance value

possible that makes sense economically and physically. On

6
S.B. Hooker

a ship, where ground currents represent an opportunity for

galvanic corrosion, and where degradation between conducting surfaces is inevitable, this is not always an easy

objective to satisfy.

If something is grounded, a conducting connection—

whether intentional or accidental—exists between an electrical circuit or equipment and the Earth, or another conducting body that serves in place of the Earth.

An important aspect of electrical safety is to

ensure a human body does not become “another conducting body.”

Damaged cables and connectors represent an opportunity for current to leak between the electrically energized

(or live) conductors to a lower voltage potential, usually

the ground. The leak to ground is a ground fault, and

the majority of marine system faults are ground faults.

A ground fault occurs when the insulation between live

conductors and the ground no longer maintains an effective resistance between the live conductor and ground, e.g.,

because the cable was damaged.

For a grounded system, a ground fault is removed by an

automatic opening of the circuit to break the current flow.

Because ground has a very low resistance, a large current

can immediately flow during a ground fault, which should

exceed the current specification of the circuit breaker (e.g.,

a fuse). The ground fault typically results from a live conductor touching equipment metal cases. Personnel safety

can be jeopardized when a live conductor comes into contact with parts that an operator can touch, e.g., the equipment or the cabling.

For marine installations the ground is usually the ship’s

hull and all electrical equipment metallic enclosures and

cases are conductively connected to the hull. By bonding the equipment to the hull, a direct path is provided

between the equipment and the Earth ground. A person

standing on the hull is then protected against electrical

shock, because the person is at the same voltage level as

the Earth ground. Furthermore, the path enables the fault

current to flow, thereby allowing any protection or detection devices to operate.

Exercise 2.1 What is the definition of an ungrounded

electrical system, and what are the advantages and disadvantages of such a system?

2.2 Electric Shocks

The design of electrical circuits and equipment includes

high attention to and preventing an electrical shock and

trapping fault conditions that can cause a shock. The occurrence and severity of an electric shock is a function of

many variables† including, but not limited to, the follow-

† Because of the individual circumstances of an electric shock

there are no absolute parameters regarding occurrence and

severity, so what is presented here is a cautious consensus

based on numerous sources, e.g., Ferris et al. (2005), Parker

(2009), and NEC (2011).

ing: the integrity of cables and connectors; the voltage

level, type, and frequency (AC or DC); the person’s gender (man or woman) and their body mass; and individual

resistance factors (e.g., wet or dry conditions). The latter

is particularly important during oceanographic fieldwork,

because wet skin (from sweat or water) has a reduced resistance compared to dry skin‡. Additionally, work surfaces

are often wet, providing a reduced resistance from a human body to ground. These factors combine to lower the

effective resistance a body presents to an exposed voltage

source, allowing greater currents to flow through the body

than would normally be expected.

An electric shock will occur when any source of electricity makes contact with a (human) body part such that

sufficient current passes through the skin, muscles, or hair.

A properly maintained cable of the type used with HySEAS instruments is not a typical hazard. The most likely

reason for a hazard to occur is if the integrity of the cable

is compromised and it goes unnoticed or unrepaired.

As a general guideline, for a man exposed to DC current, the quantitative effects are as follows:

1 mA A slight tingling sensation;

5 mA The perception threshold, i.e., the accepted maximum harmless current;

10 mA A shock with minimal loss of muscular control;

60 mA A painful shock with a majority loss of muscular

control;

75 mA The “let-go threshold” (i.e., the current threshold above which a person is unable to release an

electrically energized source because of involuntary muscle contractions); and

90 mA A painful and severe shock with difficulty breathing and almost total loss of muscular control.

The quantitative effects of DC current thresholds for a

woman are about 70% of a man.

Because wet skin is more conductive than dry skin, a

common sense approach to safety when working with electrical equipment is to ensure dry contact with any source

of electricity.

When handling cable that is wet, it is advisable to wear gloves that keep exposed skin dry,

which might require two layers of protection—one for adequate gripping of the cable worn over one that keeps the

hands and arms dry.

‡ Dry skin has a resistance of about 500–1,000 kΩ, but wet skin

has a resistance of approximately 1 kΩ. The resistance of cut

or punctured skin can be less than 1 kΩ, because blood contains electrolytes that facilitate the conduction of electricity.

If the point of contact is a metal ring worn on a wet hand, the

resistance can be on the order of 100 Ω, so removing metal

objects while working mitigates the likelihood of a shock.

7
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

Exercise 2.2 What other common resistance factor besides water, especially seawater, is important to be aware

of when working around electrical components?

2.3 Pins and Sockets

A HySEAS instrument cable has two ends, and each

end has a connector with a locking sleeve (or equivalent).

The connector can have either male pins (MP) or female

sockets (FS). The choice as to which type is used is based

on safety considerations for personnel and the instrumentation.

Best engineering practices dictate that a male

connector must not provide power, because if

the cable is dropped against a metal surface (e.g., the deck

of a ship) or handled by personnel with power applied, the

exposed male pins can short harming the equipment, and

potentially the person doing the work.

Damage to the electronics involved includes the deck

box (power source), instrument(s), and even the acquisition computer. The vulnerability of the computer is not

an exaggeration, because it is not unusual for communications circuits to not use opto-isolators, which means there

is usually a direct path between the deck box and the computer, if the serial connection is in place.

In comparison, a female connector can provide power,

because if the cable is dropped against a metal surface

with power applied, the unexposed female sockets are significantly less likely to short (one mechanism for shorting

is if the connector is dropped into salt water). This is the

same convention used in household wiring: the outlet on

the wall, which has power applied to it, is comprised of

female sockets, and the device to be powered has a cable

with male pins.

There are additional safety concerns at the point in

time when the male pins first engage the female sockets,

which might have power applied, that must be considered.

For some connector specifications, it is possible

to energize the male pins while they are still

exposed and if the person doing the work is not careful, the

energized pins can be touched, which can result in shorting

and electrocution. Connectors that do not shield the male

pins during connection are strictly not recommended.

The above-mentioned vulnerability is a principle reason

why the European continental standard for wall outlets

uses a recessed housing for the female sockets and why

British wall outlets have an on-off switch. When mating

connectors, it is important to always make sure power is

off and the pins are not touched.

Based on the safety rule of applying power to female

sockets, an instrument will always have a bulkhead connector with male pins to receive power and the deck box

providing the power for the instruments will always have

bulkhead connectors with female sockets.

Exercise 2.3 How can the cable pins and sockets be

used to establish the run direction, and why is that an

advantage?

Some connectors use a mixture of pins and sockets, so

the one or more male pins act like a centering device to

prevent incorrect connector orientation during installation.

Mixed pin-socket connectors are not recommended,

because cable run direction is not readily discerned.

To maximize the likelihood of error-free mobilizations

over the long term, single-gender connectors are recommended.

In some cases, an instrument might receive and send

power to another device. As long as the protocol of receiving power on male pins and providing it on female sockets is

followed, improper connections will not be possible. In situations where more than one device can be powered, color

coding and labeling should be used to minimize incorrect

connections. In addition, commonality in pin assignments

(e.g., positive voltage is always provided on socket number 1 and ground is always socket number 2) should be

adopted to ensure a misconnection does not result in an

improper and possibly harmful application of power to the

wrong mating pin number.

If different voltage levels are provided on common pins,

damage can occur if the connectors and cabling are identical. Given the cost of cable, it is appealing to have one

type of cable, so protective circuitry is the best solution

here. Similarly, it is appealing to have one type of connector, particularly if it provides the best functionality for the

requirements of cabling the instruments to be deployed.

2.4 Wet Pluggable

An important function of the connector is to prevent

the ingress of water and dirt, which can lead to corrosion

of the connector pins and sockets. There are a variety of

designs that accomplish this, however, the use of a single design that is equally capable for above- and in-water

applications is inherently the most attractive, because it

simplifies the inventory of components.

To further simplify the use of cables, the C-OPS and

BioSCAN optical instruments and accessories are designed

for straight-through connections, i.e., pin one connects to

socket one, pin two to socket two, etc. The benefit of this

approach is the ability to mix and match cables, so the

inventory of spares can be kept to a sensible number.

Exercise 2.4 What is a perceived “disadvantage” of all

cables having the same pin assignment?

Within this framework of making connections as easy

and trouble free as possible, the so-called wet pluggable

connectors from SubConn Inc.† (Esbjerg, Denmark) are

† MacArtney Inc. – Northeast is one of the American sales offices for SubConn connectors and cable assemblies. Their

contact information is 575 Washington Street, Pembroke,

MA 02359, +1-781-829-4440, www.macartney.com.

8
S.B. Hooker

specified with HySEAS instruments. These connectors are

designed to be plugged together underwater, so when the

connectors are mated, water is removed by internal O-rings

in the female sockets, and a clean dry fitting is achieved.

Connectors with one or more external O-rings to

achieve a water-tight connection are not recommended, because the O-rings can be easily compromised

or lost—particularly if the O-ring is the face seal for the

connector.

Two types of SubConn connectors are discussed here,

and both are based on gold-plated brass pins and sockets

within a neoprene rubber body: a) the circular series, and

b) the micro series. The use of a rubber body is an important design feature, because it can absorb pressure and

punishment without catastrophically failing, i.e., cracking.

The rubber body also permits hot splicing of the connector (if the cable is made with an appropriate jacket and

can withstand the temperatures involved), which produces

durable cable splices with excellent water ingress protection under high pressure (i.e., water depth).

Connectors with a fiberglass body for the pins and

sockets are not recommended, because the fiberglass body can readily crack if the connector is dropped

against a hard surface (e.g., a metal deck or accidentally

compressed (e.g., struck or crushed).

The perspective adopted here is that a connector choice

that automatically requires spares to be included in field

deployments to overcome avoidable vulnerabilities (e.g.,

the likelihood of losing an O-ring) is inferior and should

not be used.

The SubConn circular series was introduced in 1978

and today is the leading industrial standard in all marinerelated markets. The circular series is available in three

body sizes from 2–16 contacts rated at 600 V from 5–15 A.

When correctly maintained, the connectors are rated to

in excess of 500 underwater matings while still retaining

the minimum 200 MΩ insulation resistance.The complete

range of in-line and bulkhead connectors with associated

locking sleeves and dummy plugs are available with special

materials, cable length, and configurations.

The SubConn micro connector is a new development

based on the well-proven standard circular series. The

product was produced in response to an industry need for

a compact, easily assembled and reliable connector for use

on equipment, e.g., oceanographic sensors. In addition to

the recognized underwater applications, the connectors are

particularly suited to use in areas where water is used for

cleaning purposes or severe vibrations may be experienced

during service. The micro series is available in the same

configurations as the standard circular series, i.e., in-line

plugs and receptacles plus bulkheads and dummy plugs

with either pins or sockets.

The SubConn micro series six-contact connector is the

only connector used with the BioSCAN and C-OPS instrumentation. The connector has a contact resistance of

less than 0.01 Ω, a temperature rating of −4 to 60◦C (25–

140◦F), a connector rating of 300 V at 3 A, and a depth

rating of 700 bar (10,000 psi). The pins and sockets are

gold plated for durability and high conductance.

The designations for the micro (MC) series six-contact

connectors are as follows (restricted to only the components described in this document and shown in Fig. 4): a)

MCIL designates the in-line connector; MCBH designates

the bulkhead connector; MCBHRA designates a bulkhead

connector right-angle; MCDC designates a dummy connector; and MCDLS designates a delrin locking sleeve.

Fig. 4. The SubConn micro series of connectors in

use with HySEAS instruments with the trade names

shown between the female (left) and male (right)

versions (http://www.subconn.com).

2.5 Locking Sleeves

The purpose of a locking sleeve is to tightly and mechanically join the two halves of a connector, so the connection is not easily broken by accident. A common and reliable way of achieving this tight joining is to have the two

locking sleeves fasten or thread together. Threaded coupling requires one part to have exterior material removed

to expose ridges, and the other to have interior material

removed to expose grooves. The former is the male part

and the latter is the female part.

Because of the definitions associated with threaded fasteners, locking sleeves also have a gender associated with

them, and in most circumstances—but not all (Sect. 3.1)—

the gender of the locking sleeve matches the gender of the

connector. Consequently, an MP connector will typically

have a locking sleeve with male ridges (MR), and an FS

connector will have a locking sleeve with female grooves

(FG).

Connectors with molded non-locking sleeves that

can trap air in them when the connectors are mated

are not recommended, because when subsequently pressurized (e.g., submerged), the release of the air can lead to

water ingress and subsequent pin corrosion or shorting.

9
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

Another reason why molded non-locking sleeves are not

recommended is because the ultimate use of a cable is not

always in keeping with its original specification, and the

lack of a mechanical joining of the two connectors means

the connection is much more easily broken by accident.

SubConn locking sleeves contain a stainless steel ring

fitted into a retaining groove at the unthreaded end of the

delrin plastic shell. Hereafter, a “locking sleeve” is defined

as a plastic shell fitted with a steel ring. The steel ring

prevents the locking sleeve from sliding past the molded

connector, although an unmated locking sleeve is free to

slide down the cable. The steel ring is transversely split

into three connected layers (like a ring to hold keys) and

can be removed by prying one end of the ring out of the

groove. A simple prying tool is a miniature flat-bladed

screwdriver or metal pick. Once one end is pried away from

the shell, a second small screwdriver should be inserted into

the gap. Driving the second screwdriver around the inside

shell releases the split ring from the groove. Once released,

it can be popped out over the locking sleeve shell using the

miniature flat-bladed screwdriver or worked out by hand.

With the ring released, the locking sleeve shell can be

slid over the molded connector and replaced. The new

shell is slid over the molded connector and the split ring

is worked into the mating groove. A reliable way to insert

the split ring is to push it into the end hole at an angle

until a little less than half the split ring is in the hole.

The revealed part of the split ring is then rotated into the

mating groove until an audible “click” is heard. A miniature flat-headed screwdriver or metal pick can be used to

confirm all of the split ring is fitted into the groove.

The ability to change a SubConn locking sleeve in the

field means an entire locking sleeve can also be replaced

in the field (assuming an available spare). As discussed

below, there are circumstances wherein this might be advantageous. Because alternative locking sleeves do not necessarily provide this flexibility, only SubConn connectors

are discussed here.

Exercise 2.5 What types of circumstances might require a locking sleeve to be replaced?

2.6 Notation

The MR and FG nomenclature for locking sleeves is

used here to reduce errors, because if the locking sleeves

are specified as MT and FT (where “T” indicates “thread,”

which is a common approach), an accidental switching of

“M” for “F” (or vice versa), produces a legitimate combination of FT and MT and the error is hard to detect. If

this mistake is made for the MR and FG nomenclature,

however, an accidental reversal of “M” for “F” (or vice

versa), produces a nonsensical combination (i.e., FR and

MG), which is easy to detect.

The protocols presented here use a compact notation

for referencing a connector and locking sleeve combination,

wherein the connector designation (MP or FS) precedes

the locking sleeve designation (MR or FG) and the two

are separated by the solidus or division (“/”) character.

For example, MP/FG denotes a connector with male pins

and a female groove locking sleeve.

Exercise 2.6 What is the advantage of a cable with an

MP/MR connector on one end and an FS/FG connector

on the other end?

2.7 Dummy Plugs

A dummy† plug is a partially functional copy of a cable connection that is used as a substitute for a normal

connector, but does not have an attached cable. In other

words, a dummy plug has the pins or sockets to mate with

a cable connector, but no attached cable to permit the

transmittance of power or telemetry.

The principle purpose of a dummy plug is to mate with

a connector to protect the pins or sockets that would otherwise be exposed without the dummy plug. Although male

pins are easily cleaned if fouled, female sockets can trap

dirt that is difficult to dislodge, so it is particularly important to attach male dummy plugs to female connectors.

Dummy plugs should always be used with the appropriate locking sleeve to ensure a watertight seal,

especially if the connection being protected will be immersed in water.

Although a compatible locking sleeve by itself provides

a shield for a bulkhead connector that will not easily fall off, the use of a locking sleeve without the mating

dummy plug does not protect the connector pins or sockets

from corrosion or fouling.

Exercise 2.7 For a cable with an MP/FG connector on

one end and an FS/FG connector on the other end—

which have locking sleeves that do not mate—what is a

reliable way to protect the connectors while stowed, if

dummy plugs with the appropriate locking sleeves are

not available?

2.8 Cable Types

There are typically four types of field cables, which

are based on their intended functions, and some may be

interchanged depending on the length of the vessel or size

of the deployment platform:

1. Interface cables, which are designed to directly connect an instrument to a deck box;

2. Deployment or extension cables, which are designed

to span a long distance (e.g., a sea cable) and must

have an adapter cable or interface cable attached to

them to connect to a deck box with mated locking

sleeves;

† In English, any non-functional substitute for an object is

referred to as a “dummy”, e.g., in a clothing store, a manikin

is a clothes dummy.

10
S.B. Hooker

3. Interconnect cables, which are special Y-cables designed to interconnect two sensors; and

4. Adapter cables, which are designed to convert the

connector or locking sleeve from one specification to

another.

The configurations discussed here for these four cable types

are for the SubConn series of micro connectors and locking

sleeves.

All SubConn micro connectors have a bulkhead connector with a built-in MR locking sleeve, which means

the only locking sleeve that can be used on the cable that

will connect to a micro bulkhead connector is an FG locking sleeve.

Exercise 2.8 What vulnerability is created when an

extension cable is connected to a deck box?

Interface cables have a medium (15–25 m) length and

are typically attached to either the solar reference instrument or the end of the main deployment cable (i.e., sea cable for a free-fall profiler). Interface cables take the brunt

of the abuse aboard the deployment platform, so they are

sacrificial, and are the less expensive to replace over time

than deployment cables. The cable gender and locking

sleeve arrangement for an interface cable is FS/FG at the

instrument and MP/FG at the opposite (deck box) end.

Primary deployment cables are longest in length (up to

350 m) and are used as either above-water extension cables

or as in-water sea cables. Extension cables are designed to

be joined together to form an even longer cable, if necessary, whereas a sea cable cannot be joined together for

the in-water part (because the cable might separate at the

joint if pulled on strongly, which is possible) and must be

at the desired in-water length to begin with. A sea cable is nonetheless considered an extension cable, because

its connector and locking sleeve arrangement is the same

as an extension cable to allow a sacrificial interface cable

to be connected to it. The cable gender and locking sleeve

arrangement for an extension cable is FS/FG at the instrument end and MP/MR at the opposite (ultimately, deck

box) end.

Interconnect cables are short (about 1 m) and are used

to interconnect two sensors to a cable from the deck box.

The cable has three connectors arranged in a “Y” configuration and is also called a Y-cable. One end is the

MP/MR connector that ultimately connects to the deck

box, and the other two ends each have a FS/FG connector

to connect to two instruments. This configuration means

an interconnect cable is a special kind of extension cable

and, thus, will always require at least one more cable to

connect it to a deck box.

Adapter cables are typically 1 m (or less) in length. The

main purpose of an adapter cable is to convert the gender

of a cable or locking sleeve. For the instruments presented

in these protocols, the cable gender and locking sleeve combinations are FS/FG (at the instrument connection end)

and MP/FG (at the deck box end), which is the same as

an interface cable. The use of an adapter cable allows all

other cables to be mixed and/or matched without the need

to change locking sleeves.

There is also the concept of so-called laboratory or system cables, which allow the instruments to be powered

up in a laboratory (e.g., a calibration facility) as a selfcontained system. A laboratory or system cable is in fact

an interface or adapter cable of a length suitable for working in a smaller space (e.g., usually 5–10 m). Because they

are used indoors, it might seem attractive to specify a less

durable and costly outer jacket for laboratory cables.

Laboratory cables are useful to have in the field to

confirm a fault condition that is occurring with an

instrument is not due to the cabling being used, so it is

not advisable to purchase them without a durable outer

jacket.

A summary of the four cable types discussed here and

their corresponding connectors and lengths are as follows:

1. An interface cable has a medium length (usually 15–

25 m) with one MP/FG and one FS/FG connector;

2. A deployment or extension cable has a long length

(usually 25–50 m for an above-water system and 125–

350 m for an in-water system) with one MP/MR and

one FS/FG connector;

3. An interconnect or Y-cable has a short length (approximately 1 m) with one MP/MR connector and

two FS/FG connectors;

4. An adapter cable has a short length (usually 1 m or

less) with one MP/FG and one FS/FG connector;

and

5. A laboratory cable has a medium length (usually 5–

10 m) with one MP/FG and one FS/FG connector,

and is further distinguished by not being routinely

used in the field except to determine if a fault condition is due to a malfunctioning field cable.

Note that the lengths are simply recommendations and

should be changed to match the scientific sampling objectives if necessary.

Considering all cable types except an interconnect cable, which is a Y-cable with a specialized purpose, all four

remaining cable types have point-to-point purposes that

can be changed. For example, an extension cable can be

changed to an interface cable, by simply switching the MR

locking sleeve used with the MP connector to a FG locking

sleeve.

For an extension or sea cable, which have MP/MR

and FS/FG connectors, the cable connectors can be protected when the cable is being stowed by simply connecting the two ends of the cable and tightening the locking

sleeves. This is particularly easy to achieve with the sea cable, because the cable is coiled into the cable bucket with

the MP/MR connector lying outside the bucket and the

FS/FG end lying on top of the cable coil (Sect. 6.2.3).

11
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

2.9 Connection and Disconnection

Before attempting to mate two connectors, particularly

if the cabling is unfamiliar, but anticipated to be of use to

the mobilization activity, some cautions are appropriate.

Inspect both cables and confirm the locking sleeves

and connectors are all manufactured by SubConn.

Do not mix connectors and locking sleeves from

different manufacturers, and do not attempt to

mate them, because pin and socket tolerances, as well as

sealing geometries, are sufficiently different that this can

lead to damage and connector failure.

SubConn locking sleeves have a steel ring to

prevent the molded part of the connector from

pulling through the locking sleeve, whereas some alternatives are all plastic and the molded connector and cable

can be pulled through the locking sleeves.

The problem identified with plastic locking sleeves can

be aggravated by differential temperature coefficients of

the connector and the mismatched locking sleeves. For

example, for a cable pulled up from the colder depth of

the water column to warmer surface waters, the interior

connector can have shrunk more than the outer locking

sleeve, and the cable and connector can be pulled through

the locking sleeve. If unintended tension is then applied,

the connection can part.

Exercise 2.9 What is another disadvantage of an allplastic locking sleeves?

2.9.1 First Use

Many connectors require a sparing application of an

appropriate lubricant before the connector is first mated.

The lubricant ensures the male pins engage the female

sockets without stressing the sockets and splaying them.

SubConn connectors, including dummy plugs,

must not be mated dry, because this can lead

to a failure in the rubber lamination of the connection pins

and subsequent connector failure.

To grease the connectors for the first time, apply a sparing amount of grease on the finger and wipe evenly across

the female sockets. Over time, the connectors should be

inspected for reapplication of the lubricant.

The use of too much lubrication should be avoided,

because it can negatively effect connection integrity

and cause the male pins to piston out of the female sockets.

In normal circumstances for connections not made underwater, the expulsion of excess grease can be heard as it

is squeezed out of the connectors when they are mated. If

this occurs, or if excess grease is visible around the periphery of where the connectors mate, wipe the excess away

with a disposable paper towel, and carefully repeat the

mating and wiping process until a smooth and even connection is achieved.

Exercise 2.9.1 What is another reason to not use excessive grease when lubricating a connector?

2.9.2 Connection Protocol

A proven connection protocol for SubConn cables that

have already been brought into service (Sect. 2.9.1), is as

follows:

1. Remove any dummy plugs by unscrewing the locking sleeves following the disconnection protocol (Sect.

2.9.3), and stow them appropriately (Sect. 6.1).

2. Inspect the connectors and confirm they are clean. If

present, dirt or debris in the female sockets should be

removed with freshwater; failure to do so could result

in the splaying of the female sockets and damage to

the internal O-ring seals.

3. Inspect the connectors for proper lubrication†. If necessary, apply a sparing amount of grease on the finger and wipe evenly across the female sockets, which

should result in the deposition of a small mount of

grease in each socket hole. If upon inspection any

socket holes do not contain grease, a small amount

should be applied.

4. Orient the connectors for proper pin-to-socket alignment (i.e., pin one aligns to socket one, pin two to

socket two, etc.); for a symmetrical number of pins

and sockets, a centering pin is usually provided as

part of the male connector to facilitate proper alignment, but for the six-conductor connectors used with

HySEAS instrument, the pins are arranged in an

asymmetric pattern (Fig. 4).

5. Mate the connectors by gripping the rubber body

containing the pins or sockets, avoid sharp bends in

the cabling which can interfere with a smooth alignment of the connectors and needlessly strain the conductors, and then push the male pins into the female sockets. Visually verify the connectors have

bottomed out or are at their full-extent position.

6. Mate the two locking sleeves and tighten them.

Two common mistakes by first-time or novice practitioners

are a) not verifying that the connectors are lubricated, and

b) applying excessive grease to lubricate new connector

pins and sockets.

Failure to adhere to a connection and disconnection protocol can result in the completely avoidable loss of connection integrity in the short term, and

premature connector or cable failure in the long term.

† SubConn recommends Dow Corning Molykote 44 medium

grease, although Dow Corning 111 grease has been shown to

be extremely effective over more than a decade of use in the

field. Both products are silicone oil compositions.

12
S.B. Hooker

Exercise 2.9.2 What is an “appropriate” procedure to

stow dummy plugs?

2.9.3 Disconnection Protocol

A proven disconnection protocol for SubConn cables

that have already been brought into service (Sect. 2.9.1),

is as follows:

1. To disconnect mated connectors, loosen the locking

sleeves, grip the rubber body containing the pins or

sockets, and pull straight apart. Do not pull at an

angle and do not pull on the cable or the dummy plug

short extension. Pulling at an angle or pulling on the

cable can unduly strain the integrity of the physical

bond between the wire leads and the sockets or pins.

2. If the disconnect will persist for a long time, connect the appropriate dummy plug with locking sleeve

to each exposed connector, and tighten each locking

sleeve.

Exercise 2.9.3 What is an appropriate way to protect

exposed pins or sockets for an extended period of time

if no dummy plugs are available?

2.10 Shielding

If a mated SubConn connector will be exposed to longterm heat or sunshine, the mated connectors and locking sleeves should be over wrapped with vinyl electrical

tape (or a suitable substitute) as a shield and to slow the

baking of the cable and locking sleeve. Long-term baking of the connectors and cable results in a drying effect,

wherein the oils that are present are lost and carbon black

is leeched from the rubber. This results in discoloration,

cracking, and deterioration of mechanical properties. Although a slow process, exposed components ultimately fail,

frequently due to an ingress of water.

Another source of radiation which might require shielding depending on the design of the equipment being deployed, and particularly on ships which can have powerful radio transmitters, is electromagnetic radiation†. A

shielded cable has the insulated conductors enclosed by a

common conductive layer composed of braided strands of

metal (e.g., copper or aluminum) or a layer of a conducting

polymer. Usually, this shield is covered by the outer jacket

layer(s) of the cable.

The shield functions as a Faraday cage to reduce the

interference caused by external electromagnetic radiation

sources and minimizes noise that is capacitively coupled to

other electrical sources.

To be effective, the cable shield must be applied

across cable splices—that is, the shield must be

continuous across connections.

† The optical instruments used with C-OPS and BioSCAN are

completely shielded and do not require additional shielding

for electromagnetic radiation.

Exercise 2.10 What happens to the integrity of the

shield when shielded and unshielded cables are mixed

together in a single cable run.

3. HySEAS INSTRUMENTS

The HySEAS architecture is based on sensors built with

so-called microradiometers (Booth et al. 2010). A microradiometer consists of a photodetector (usually silicon),

preamplifier with controllable gain, high resolution (24 bit)

analog-to-digital converter (ADC), microprocessor, and an

addressable digital port. In other words, it is a fully functional networkable sensor, all of which resides on one small,

thin, printed circuit assembly (PCA) that is sleeved inside

a metal cylinder for mechanical support and electromagnetic radiation shielding. With the addition of the frontend optics (collector, window, and filter stack), the basic

form factor resembles a shortened pencil.

Exercise 3.0 How does the fact that a microradiometer

PCA contains circuits so small it must be machine made

affect quality?

The microradiometer design was developed in response

to a need for smaller, faster, and potentially less expensive

radiometers, which could be easily scaled to either more or

fewer channels and more easily deployed in coastal waters.

Because each microradiometer channel has an individual

ADC, no multiplexer is required, and no cabling is needed,

thereby eliminating a source of electronic leakage and improving reliability. The photodiode current is converted

to voltage with an electrometer amplifier with three gain

settings, and the resulting voltage is directly fed to the

ADC. The entire assembly, including the photodetector, is

located on a single circuit board measuring 0.35 × 3.0 in2

(0.9 × 7.6 cm2).

Each microradiometer is also equipped with a temperature sensor located close to the photodetector. Clusters of

microradiometers (usually 13 or 19) can be matched with

front-end optics to form small, fast, less expensive, multiwavelength radiometers for a variety of measurements.

Each cluster is managed by an aggregator that allows the

array of individual radiometers, plus any ancillary sensors,

to function as a solitary device. Clusters of microradiometers are used to build a variety of sensor classes (Morrow

et al. 2010c), but the relevant class here is the Expandable

Technologies for Radiometric Applications (XTRA) class,

which is used to build C-OPS and BioSCAN instruments.

Microradiometers allow XTRA sensors to have a small

form factor, large dynamic range (10 decades), and high

spectral resolution, which permits two or more design elements to work together in a hybrid configuration to improve the quality of the acquired data and the resulting data products. The hybrid features of C-OPS and

BioSCAN instruments are described below (Sects. 3.1–3.3).

Although C-OPS and BioSCAN support a diversity of

configurations, both systems usually measure the spectral

13
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

global irradiance as a function of time (t) during data acquisition, Ed(0+, λ, t), where z = 0+ denotes just above

the sea surface. Both systems use two additional sensors

to make simultaneous measurements of the in-water water

column (C-OPS) or the above-water sea surface and one or

more celestial targets (BioSCAN). For C-OPS, the downward irradiance, Ed, is measured along with either the upward irradiance, Eu, or Lu. For BioSCAN, the (indirect)

sky radiance, Li, is measured with the total radiance at

the sea surface, LT . Each measurement system uses three

radiometers.

Within a C-OPS or BioSCAN instrument system, the

spectral measurements from all sensors are made simultaneously (to within 8 ms) and at the same nominal wavelengths (typically to within 1 nm). Time is used used to

match the observations to one another. The subsequent

sections explain the instruments in more detail, and how

to select their deployment locations.

3.1 Solar Reference Measurements

High-quality BioSCAN and C-OPS measurements require solar reference observations, which are recorded simultaneously with the two respective above- and in-water

radiometers. As long as the solar observations are constant or slowly changing, they are used to correct the other

measurements for changes in the solar illumination. Even

if atmospheric conditions are stable, changes in the solar

zenith angle usually necessitate this correction.

Solar reference observations, Ed(0+, λ, t), are required

for the following:

To confirm the solar illumination is stable, i.e., it is

constant or slowly evolving (principally by the relatively slow change in the solar zenith angle), during

data acquisition;

To capture the extent of short-term transients (e.g.,

a small cloud passing in front of the solar disk), so

these events can be removed from all observations;

and

To correct the other light observations for changes in

the solar illumination.

If the BioSHADE accessory is used, additional information

regarding the atmosphere can be derived (depending on

how the measurements are made and how frequently they

are obtained).

Exercise 3.1 How else might the solar reference be used

as a “reference”?

A minimum configuration for a solar reference is a single Ed(0+, λ, t) sensor mounted on mast with unobstructed

hemispheric viewing of the sky, which has been shown to be

superior to floating alternatives (Hooker and Maritorena

2000). In some cases, the same mast is used for more

than one solar reference, e.g., for reference intercomparisons. A solar reference can also include the BioGPS and

BioSHADE accessories, which is the typical configuration

considered here for HySEAS instrumentation, as shown in

Fig. 5.

Fig. 5. A semi-transparent drawing of the C-OPS

and BioSCAN solar reference with cables omitted

for clarity and details of the irradiance sensor deferred to Sect. 3.3: a) BioSHADE controller; b)

shadow band; c) BioGPS; d) irradiance sensor; e)

bulkhead connector (receive power); f) bulkhead

connector (supply power, 1 of 2); and g) 1 in 316 SS

pipe with coupler. There are three bulkhead connectors on the BioSHADE controller end cap.

Although not explicitly shown in Fig. 5, a solar reference typically has two-axis vertical tilt sensors. The pitch

and roll sensors are used to confirm the vertical tilting of

the assembly during data acquisition, which is inevitable

on a boat, is not biased. In other words, they are used

to confirm that both axes of motion pass through their

respective 0◦ points, which are established during mast installation by plumbing† the mast.

The BioGPS provides the geolocation of the acquired

data, as well as Coordinated Universal Time (UTC‡) at

1 Hz, which is the worldwide timebase used to regulate

clocks. UTC is one of several closely related successors to

Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). For most general purposes,

for example, logging the start and end time of campaign

events like the beginning and ending of data acquisition

times, UTC is synonymous with GMT.

† Plumbing a mast establishes the vertical direction of the mast

that is perpendicular to a level reference, which in most cases

is the localized sea surface.

‡ The definition of the UTC acronym arose from a desire by the

International Telecommunication Union (ITU) and the International Astronomical Union (IAU) to use the same abbreviation in all languages. English speakers originally proposed

Coordinated Universal Time (CUT), while French speakers

proposed Temps Universel Coordonn ́e (TUC). UTC was selected as a compromise, because it contains the necessary

letters and conforms to letter patterns for the variants of

Universal Time (UT0, UT1, UT2, etc.).

14
S.B. Hooker

The instruments used with BioSCAN and C-OPS are

very similar. The most significant differences are the former radiance sensors have a smaller full view angle (FVA)

and the latter requires unique design characteristics to

function underwater (e.g., the composition of the cosine

collector). The following specifications apply to the three

19-channel instruments plus BioSHADE and BioGPS accessories typically used with C-OPS, with clarifying applicable values for BioSCAN indicated in brackets (a specification that is not applicable to BioSCAN is denoted N/A):

Housing Anodized aluminum 2.75 in (7.0 cm) diameter.

Depth Typically 125 m [N/A].

Spectrum Selectable from 305–875 nm [250–1,650 nm].

Sampling 12–15 Hz.

Data 115,200 baud (full or half duplex).

Power 0.60 A typical at the deck box, and more than

6.0 A during battery charging.

FVA 14.0◦ in water [2.5◦].

Cosine ±3% 0–60◦, ±5% 60–70◦, and ±10% 70–80◦.

Descent 5–60 cm s−1 to within 5◦ two-axis tilts [N/A].

Ancillary Water temperature [N/A],

Pressure transducer [N/A], and

Two-axis vertical tilt.

Thermal −15 to 50◦C.

Individual wavelengths can be changed by the manufacturer, which is a straightforward exercise for instruments

built with microradiometers.

3.2 BioSCAN Above-Water Measurements

The above-water technique that BioSCAN was designed

for is an extension of the so-called Modified Fresnel Reflectance Glint Correction method (Mueller and Austin

1995) that includes a more accurate representation of the

sea surface reflectance and bidirectional effects (Hooker et

al. 2004) and is called the Q02 method. The Q02 approach

is based on measuring the spectral global irradiance (from

the sky and Sun) plus Li(0+, λ) and LT (0+, λ). The latter

is composed of the radiance leaving the sea surface from

below (LW ), the direct sunlight reflecting off the surface

(the sun glint), and the indirect skylight reflecting off the

surface (the sky glint).

Consequently, the typical above-water configuration for

a BioSCAN frame is two separate above-water radiometers

measuring LT , and Li, as shown in Fig. 6. For BioSCAN,

the z = 0+ nomenclature is understood, and is usually

omitted. All three sensors are synchronized by the deck

box to make their respective measurements (nearly) simultaneously. Because the BioSCAN frame mounts the optical

instruments at the desired viewing angle, usually θ = 40◦

up from nadir for LT and θ = 40◦ down from zenith for

Li, BiosSCAN radiometers typically do not have two-axis

vertical tilt sensors; these data are provided by the Ed(0+)

radiometer, which has tilt sensors. In addition, because the

angular geometry is fixed, it is not typically represented in

the symbology, because it is an understood constant.

Fig. 6. The BioSCAN frame with the optical instruments mounted and the solar compass in the

foreground.

The other variable that is important to an above-water

method is the solar azimuth angle, φ, which necessarily

changes as a function of the time of day and is usually specified with respect to an arbitrary reference, e.g., due north.

To avoid the sun glint in the sun plane, the BioSCAN radiometers must be pointed away from the Sun (usually

90◦). An angle 90◦ counterclockwise (CCW) away from

the Sun (viewed from above) is denoted φ-, and an angle 90◦ clockwise (CW) away from the Sun (viewed from

above) is denoted φ+. The signs on this rotation nomenclature are arbitrary, but follow published conventions. The

basic protocol that the BioSCAN frame facilitates involves

the following: locating the sun plane, rotating the frame

perpendicular to the sun plane to minimize sun glint contamination in the LT measurement, and collecting observations under stable illumination conditions.

Exercise 3.2 Why does rotating the BioSCAN radiometers perpendicular to the sun plane not eliminate sun

glint contamination in the LT measurement?

3.3 C-OPS In-Water Measurements

The typical in-water configuration for a C-OPS instrument is a combination of upward- and downward-viewing

sensor pairs. For example, an Ed(z, λ) sensor plus either

a Lu(z, λ) or Eu(z, λ), sensor. A pressure transducer and

seawater temperature probe is typically included in the Lu

sensor end cap. In addition, the Ed sensor usually contains

a two-axis tilt sensor to determination the vertical tilt of

the profiler as it descends through the water column. The

solar reference and the two in-water sensors are synchronized by the deck box to make their respective measurements (nearly) simultaneously. Figure 7 shows the typical

configuration for an Lu and Ed sensor pair.

15
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

a

b

b b

b c

d

e f

g

h

h

g

d

e

i

i

k k

j

j

j

j

f

l

m m

n

o

p

q

r

s

t

Fig. 7. A transparent drawing of the C-OPS inwater instrument components (the roll axis is the

long axis and the pitch axis is the short axis into

or out of the page) with cables and harnesses omitted for clarity: a) irradiance cosine collector; b)

side-impact bumper or fender; c) irradiance lens;

d) cluster of 19 microradiometers; e) aggregator

boards; f) sensor v-block; g) pitch fixed-point nut;

h) pitch rotation nut; i) dummy plug; j) harness

attachment; k) knurled screw; l) hydrobaric buoyancy chamber revealing a black air bladder; m) air

holes; n) foam flotation disks; o) perforated backplane; p) weight disks; q) spar fitting point; r) water temperature probe; s) pressure transducer port;

and t) nitrogen purge fitting (one per instrument).

The C-OPS features in Fig. 7 that enhance data quality,

directly or indirectly, are as follows:

• The bumpers protect the radiometers from side impacts during deployment and recovery;

• The plano-convex lens inside the irradiance sensor

diffuses the light from the cosine collector uniformly

across the array of microradiometer apertures below

the lens;

• The aggregator and support electronics boards allow

the microradiometers to be controlled as a single device with a high sampling rate (12–15 Hz);

• The sensor v-blocks are attached to the backplane at

a fixed point and a rotation point;

• The pitch rotation nut allows an offset bias of the

sensor to be set to counter cable tension or an ambient current that can pitch the instrument away from

the desired vertical tilt of less than 5◦;

• The knurled screws hold the lid on the hydrobaric

buoyancy chamber, which can contain a mix of up to

three air-filled bladders and rigid foam inserts;

• The air-filled bladders slowly compress and allow the

instrument to loiter near the sea surface;

• The air holes allow the hydrobaric buoyancy chamber

to flood (two of four shown);

• The foam flotation disks can be moved from side to

side to trim the roll axis to maintain a desired vertical tilt of less than 5◦ (the slotted edge is visible as

the dark band below the letter “n” for clarity, but is

normally oriented downwards and then held tightly

by the nuts to the left and right of the disks);

• The holes in the backplane allow for securing the cabling and the mounting of other devices;

• The adjustable weight disks, which are slotted and

firmly affixed using nuts to the left and right, establish the negative buoyancy and can be moved from

side to side to trim the roll axis; and

• The fitting point for a flexible or rigid downwardpointing spar, which if used, can provide protection

against a bottom impact.

The use of a flexible or rigid downward-pointing spar can

also be used to apply additional weight, which can further

increase the righting response of the backplane, because it

will apply a downward stabilizing force.

Exercise 3.3 Why is knowing the vertical orientation

of the profiler during descent important?

Because of its surface loitering, slower descent, and

faster acquisition capabilities, C-OPS sampling captures

the high-frequency perturbations from wave-focusing effects. This means C-OPS observations minimize the aliasing normally encountered with legacy devices for this phenomenon that can significantly degrade the ability to establish the extrapolation interval in near-surface waters,

particularly if the water is very clear. The high vertical

resolution also means the presence of thin intrusive layers

(perhaps of freshwater origin from rivers or melting ice) are

properly sampled for the first time in a free-fall system.

3.4 Deck Box

The deck box used with BioSCAN or C-OPS is housed

within a Pelican Products, Inc. (Torrance, California) type

1300 case. When the lid is closed and the latches secured,

the deck box is waterproof, and can be washed down with

freshwater. From the exterior, the deck box has two six-pin

micro FS/MR bulkhead connectors; one provides power

and telemetry for the solar reference and the other provides the same functionality for the instruments on the

BioSCAN frame or the C-OPS backplane.

The interior of the deck box contains a master aggregator circuit board with support electronics, plus a sealed

12 VDC battery and charging circuitry. The master aggregator sets the sampling rates and coordinates the polling

of all the attached aggregators with their microradiometer assemblies. The deck box support electronics provide

microprocessor-controlled power for all the sensors and

is designed to avoid instrument damage due to improper

power-up sequences over varying cable lengths. The Recommended Standard 485 (RS-485) signals (or RS-422 for

some instruments) from the two six-pin power-telemetry

connectors are combined in the deck box and converted to

RS-232 communications for computer logging.

The deck box control panel provides an on-off switch,

12 VDC power receptacle for the AC adapter, two safety

16
S.B. Hooker

fuses, an RS-232 bulkhead and universal serial bus (USB)

2.0 connector for computer logging, indicator LEDs, and a

digital display (Fig. 8). The on-off switch is of the latching

type and must be unlatched by pulling up on the switch

before changing the switch setting.

Fig. 8. The front panel of a BioSCAN or C-OPS

deck box showing the power switch (slightly below

and left of the green display) latched in the off position.

The two fuses, F1 and F2, on the deck box front panel

protect each of the power-telemetry ports, respectively,

wherein port 1 is the BioSCAN frame or the C-OPS backplane, and port 2 is the solar reference. Both fuse types

are 800 mA slow blow 5×20 mm. The RS-232 connection is

a D-subminiature (D-sub) connector with an E-size (ninesocket) shell (DE-9S) and a pin assignment for communications with a personal computer (PC).

The LEDs provide the following indications:

If the AC adapter is plugged in, the Charger Power

LED is illuminated.

If the AC adapter has been plugged in long enough,

the Charge Complete LED is illuminated.

If power is provided to the 12 VDC input, it must be

10.0–14.5 VDC, and the Power LED is illuminated.

If the DC input voltage nominally exceeds 14.5 VDC

(the exact voltage could depend upon current draw

and component tolerances), the Input Overvoltage!

LED is illuminated.

If the deck box receives RS-232 serial communications, the From PC LED is illuminated and blinks

rapidly.

If the deck box sends RS-232 serial communications,

the To PC LED is illuminated and blinks rapidly.

The digital display provides sequence and status information regarding the powering up of all system components (Sect. 7.2.1). The display messages establish what

action is taking place (e.g., Activating Port 1), the response to the action (e.g., Drawing 190.4mA), and other

pertinent information (e.g., Stabilizing ...). Although

designed to be powered by an AC adapter that provides

12 VDC power, the deck box can also be powered from a

standalone 12 VDC battery. In this configuration, a special cable is used to connect the external battery to the

12 VDC input on the deck box control panel.

The recommended battery type for externally powering

a deck box is an absorbent glass mat (AGM) 12 VDC battery. AGM batteries are discussed in more detail in Sect.

12.4 (as part of small-boat operations).

Exercise 3.4 Are there negative consequences if the

C-OPS underwater cable is accidentally connected to the

reference bulkhead rather than the underwater (profiler)

bulkhead on the deck box?

3.5 Acquisition Computer

The data acquisition environment is organized around

the computer used to acquire the optical data, usually a

laptop to save space in the confined areas typically found

on ships. The following additional components provide a

complete acquisition capability: a) a marine very high frequency (VHF) radiotelephone (R/T), plus a second one

for the person conducting deck operations; b) a written

log book; c) the optical system deck box; and d) an uninterruptible power supply (UPS).

The purpose of the UPS is to provide protection against

a loss of power, or power dropping below the allowed minimum or exceeding the allowed maximum. On a ship, these

are usually short-term events, so an extensive battery pack

for the UPS is not normally necessary. In addition, both

the deck box and the laptop computer have internal batteries, so the opportunity to work with no ship power is extensive, even if the UPS has a small capacity. For this reason,

a UPS with a 500–700 VA capacity is recommended.

Fig. 9. An example acquisition computer environment aboard the TR/V Oshoro Maru showing

the following: laptop computer (center foreground),

marine radio (left of computer), written log (right

of computer), C-OPS deck box (background left),

and a small UPS (background right).

Exercise 3.5 If so much of a modern acquisition system

is computerized and can easily accommodate automated

record keeping, why retain a written log?

17
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

4. PLATFORM PREPARATION

It is an established axiom that approximately 90% of

all system performance problems and failures in the field

are related to cables and connectors. It is a false economy to choose inexpensive cables and connectors, if that

selection compromises reliability. This is particularly true

for remote deployments, either in terms of the destination

(e.g., the Arctic) or the platform (e.g., a ship), because

in such cases a very limited set of resources for problem

solving are available. Furthermore, the cost of shipping

to remote locations is frequently a significant percentage

of the value of some components, so a fewer number of

high-quality components are more beneficial than a larger

number of low-quality alternatives.

Years of experience have revealed a number of cable

and connector strategies that work together to guarantee

that an instrument system will be configured correctly for

deployment in almost any situation. This section describes

an optimum approach for ensuring cables are correctly

identified and connected, that the installation of the cables is appropriately safe and respectful (i.e., ship-shape),

and that that the risk of cable failure, perhaps resulting in

a campaign ending prematurely, is sensibly minimized.

Near-shore, shallow water, or blue-water oceanographic

profiling systems, as well as above-water AOP systems, will

all benefit from the use of the following cabling protocol.

The strategy involves procuring a number of different cables that are assigned to different tasks. In the short term,

the approach may seem more than what is minimally necessary, but the incremental cost of a handful of important

intermediate connections is easily offset by the cost of a

system failure during an important campaign, especially

when groups are dependent on sharing coincident data,

which is typical for most deployments.

Exercise 4.0 Which is more vulnerable to failure, the

cable or the connector?

4.1 Installation Preparation

Properly installing a solar reference along with an inwater free-falling backplane or above-water sampling frame

involves the following: a) firmly attaching mounting fixtures to hold the solar reference and sampling frame, b)

routing the power-telemetry cables between the instruments and the deck box, and c) installing the serial communication cable between the data acquisition computer

and the deck box. The order in accomplishing these tasks

can be important, especially if little time is available for

mobilization and if the present platform has never been

used before.

Exercise 4.1 What is a common mitigation factor that

must be considered when assigning priorities for mobilization work?

Regardless of the prioritized order of the installation,

tools are required before starting any work. Because the

work plan can be separated into well-specified major tasks

(e.g., mounting the sensors, installing the cable, etc.) it

is most efficient if the tools for each are prepared ahead

of time and put into separate color-coded or labeled bags.

The separation of function and inventory also produces

manageable lists of what is needed in each bag, which

makes it easier to check that all necessary items are in

each. Soft bags are preferred, because they pack more efficiently and do not require very much padding to fill voids.

The recommended tool bags are as follows:

Hardware tool bag for instrument installation (Sect.

5.1);

Computer and deck box installation (Sect. 5.5);

Tape and cable ties tool bag for cable installation

(Sect. 6.1);

Connectors tool bag for sensor and cable installation

(Sect. 6.1); and

Deployment tool bag (Sect. 7.0); and

Maintenance tool bag (Sect. 9.1).

The above-cited task sections include inventories of the

recommended tools and supplies for each bag.

4.2 Prioritizing the Tasks

The order in which cable installation tasks are executed

can be important. Consequently, it is sensible to assume

the worst and proceed accordingly, because it might turn

out that way for an unanticipated problem. The underlying principles, which are based on the concept that a “task”

is the proper execution of a mobilization activity plus the

successful application of corrective measures if the activity

encounters problems, are as follows:

• If a task can only be done while the ship is docked,

do it first.

• If a task cannot be done safely at sea, do it next.

• If a task is likely to require input from the crew, do

it next.

• If a task is complicated (i.e., time consuming) and

there is a chance it might have to be repeated if a

subsequent task is not successful or not adaptable to

an unanticipated problem, do the identified subsequent task next.

• If a task is complicated and the subsequent tasks it

depends on are all adaptable to change, do it next.

• If a task is easy and quick to accomplish, do it last.

This hierarchy is not foolproof for all problem sets. It has

been demonstrated repeatedly to significantly improve the

chance of a successful mobilization for a wide array of common and not-so-common mobilization problems, because it

manages time and risk, which are interlinked.

18
S.B. Hooker

For the aforementioned hierarchy to be useful, it is necessary to first assemble all the relevant information. This

will involve individualized investigations, because each deployment is a separate set of challenges. Information gathering means accessing the possible areas that are attractive

locations for the equipment, and in some cases, permission

will be needed to access some of those sites.

It is always a good idea to meet with the responsible

crew members, when preparing to install any instrument on a deployment platform, because some of the most

important information is only available from the crew and

permission might be needed for aspects of the installation.

On large and small platforms, installation discussions

can involve a number of people, because of the different

types of installed equipment that might be affected (Fig.

10). For example, on an ocean-class vessel, the first officer,

chief engineer, radio officer, bosun, and chief (scientific)

technician will likely be involved. On smaller vessels, the

captain or mate are usually all that are involved.

Fig. 10. Cable and instrument installation discussions on board the Lucinda Jetty Coastal Observatory (LJCO) off the coast of Lucinda, Australia.

Even after all the needed information is assembled,

there are still hidden vulnerabilities associated with understanding and analyzing the information. Consider, for

example, the following scenario:

A deployment is scheduled for an ocean-class ship

in a foreign port with a primarily tourist economy

and little access to advanced technology. Shortly before mobilization, a last-minute change in the science

objectives necessitates the use of an old instrument

that was not part of the original mobilization plan,

but the change occurs in time for the old equipment

to be included in the shipment to the foreign port.

Shortly after arriving at the dock, an inventory of the

sensors and cabling reveals a missing adapter cable

for the deployment of one of the old eight-pin sensors,

which cannot be used with the new six-conductor cabling for the other sensors being deployed, because

in addition to a difference in the number of pins, the

conductor assignments in the new cabling architecture are different than that used with the old sensor.

The manufacturer of the sensor is notified by satellite

telephone, and the missing cable is sent by overnight

express delivery, but the remote location and the

short mobilization time—one or more days of which

are scheduled to occur at sea—means the cable arrives in the afternoon of the last full day in port.

At this point in time all the instruments are sited and

mounted, all the cabling is run, all the other sensors

are tested with the installed cabling and confirmed to

work properly, and the only cable that is not installed

is the missing short adapter cable.

Exercise 4.2 What should happen next given the priority matrix?

Here is what actually happened:

1. The new cable was inspected and noted to have a

non-standard assembly. It was apparent that the

hand-made conductor splices were not staggered, i.e.,

all the splices were made at the same location along

the length of the cable, which meant each splice laid

against all the other splices to create a large “ball”

of connections in the middle of the cable.

2. Because of the non-standard appearance of the new

cable, signal integrity was checked using the pin-tosocket specifications provided with the cable. Pin one

was confirmed to be connected to the correct socket,

pin two was confirmed to be connected to the correct

socket, and so on, until all pins were confirmed.

3. After the successful pin-out test, the cable was installed and power was applied to the last instrument.

4. The deck box immediately faulted (blown fuse)—and

literally smoked—so power was turned off.

5. An inspection of the deck box revealed several burned

circuits, as did an internal inspection of the sensor.

6. A postmortem investigation of the adapter cable revealed one of the data-telemetry conductors shorted

to the power conductor, because a sharp solder edge

in one was pressed up against the other and punctured the protective heat shrink tubing.

7. The ship sailed shortly after the postmortem. Over

the next two and a half days, the burned circuits were

repaired with spare electronics available on board

(spare inductors were unavailable, so some repairs

were completed with resistors).

19
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

In the end, one full station of data was lost, which is painful

for any cruise, but not catastrophic for an ocean-crossing

expedition. As a result of this experience, the mobilization

protocol was changed as follows:

• Pin-out testing was changed to include the verification of no conductor-to-conductor shorting, in addition to proper pin-to-socket assignments; and

• All new cables are tested for proper pin-out assignments (plus verification that none of the conductors

are shorted, per the new pin-out testing procedure)

before they are placed into service.

This lesson is presented, because it explains why protocols evolve over time and gives some insight into the logic

behind recommended procedures that might otherwise appear redundant or unnecessary.

4.3 Siting the Instruments

Siting the instruments begins with surveilling the preferred mounting locations and cable runs. Part of the process involves being prepared to explain to the appropriate crew member what is intended and how much time

is needed to mount the instruments. When having discussions with the crew, it is important to emphasize that

all safety equipment, operational fixtures, and painted surfaces will be respected, and that no trip hazards in passageways or stairways will be created. The crew will usually

want to know the size and weight of instruments that will

be deployed on the superstructure, including any cabling.

High-latitude cruise discussions may also take into account

the weight added by layers of ice and other safety issues.

Exercise 4.3 What is a common and simple way to

attach a reference sensor mount to a ship?

The crew is responsible for the safety of the platform

and all aboard, so compromise regarding a desired mounting location is frequently necessary. This means it is advantageous to have more than one location and more than

one mounting option. The deployment options should include the preferred location for the acquisition computer

and deck box. If an in-water system is being deployed, it is

advantageous for the computer operator to quickly be on

deck to help with any deployment issues that might arise,

so proximity to the deck is important. In all cases, it is advantageous for the computer operator to be able to quickly

determine stable solar illumination before and during data

acquisition, if this cannot be done by the person(s) on deck.

Instruments must be strategically placed to return data

of the highest quality (Fig. 1), but many of the best locations may not be available because of safety concerns, existing equipment, or a lack of accessibility while at sea. For

the in-water C-OPS instrument, this requirement is easily

satisfied, because the backplane is floated away from the

platform. This work is usually done on the stern where

there is a maximum amount of space and visibility of the

ocean. In addition, there is good comprehension as to

whether or not the power and telemetry cable is free and

clear of any submerged ship components, like the propeller.

In the case of BioSCAN, the bow is a preferred location, because this where the ship comes to a point. Consequently, the downward-viewing (LT ) sensor can be pointed

to either side of the ship’s centerline without any part of

the ship entering the FVA. In general, the BioSCAN frame

must be higher than the nearest part of the ship’s structure

(Hooker and Zibordi 2005), which is also easily satisfied at

the bow, because it is an area of open expanse.

The disadvantage of the bow is the deck is usually

sloped, so it can shed water effectively. It is also where anchoring equipment and docking fixtures are located, which

can cause awkward mounting possibilities, because they

cannot be interfered with.

Because the bow is where heavy seas usually first

encounter the vessel, it is important to ensure sensors mounted on the bow can be removed quickly, if severe

weather is forecast; this provides safety for the equipment,

and also protects the ship by reducing the loading on whatever bow structures are involved that could break free.

Small boats usually have minimal bow railing that is

designed only to prevent a person from falling overboard,

and not to secure a heavy piece of equipment, especially

in a rough sea state. Consequently, whatever is used to

establish a mounting fixture on the bow of a smaller vessel

will likely require strength members for the railing and

other spanners to distribute the load away from the railing.

Medium-sized vessels frequently have a sturdy railing

around the bow that can accommodate a simple pipe structure to hold the sampling frame and still permit a person to

safely stand on the deck and operate it. They also do not

have significant anchoring and docking equipment, which

facilitates a more straightforward installation.

Large ships, however, usually have bows with awkward

geometries and access as a result of more massive anchoring

and docking equipment and the need to deflect water away

from the ship in heavy seas. Consequently, an open-pipe

platform is often mounted on top of the bow to provide a

safe area for the frame operator. The platform is usually

built with pipe and fittings to form railing around three

sides. The pipe railing can be used to affix a pipe to hold

the sampling frame in the same fashion that is used to

mount a solar reference.

In addition to the accessibility requirement (such as for

cleaning the apertures and capping them to measure dark

offsets), other factors to consider when evaluating alternative sites are soot from the engine room stacks, perturbations of the light field caused by reflections and shadows

from the superstructure of the ship, etc. The height of the

solar reference diffuser should be higher than any source

of shading or reflections, so there is an unobstructed view

of the sky. In general, the solar reference should be the

highest piece of equipment on the deployment platform, if

possible. A summary of the deployment principles for a

large ship is presented in Fig. 11.

20
S.B. Hooker

Fig. 11. A schematic representation of the platform perturbations associated with a ship and preferred deployment locations for AOP measurements.

Hooker (2010) presented a quantitative analysis of the

impact of reference position on the R/V Roger Revelle (an

ocean-class ship), and made a strong case for using a retractable mast as a viable option to other ship locations.

The importance of taking the time to plumb the solar reference cannot be over emphasized. Although the vessel

will pitch and roll, if the reference is properly mounted,

the motions will move through the zero points for both

axes and the angular distribution of the data will be as

bias-free during the deployment as possible.

4.4 Siting the Cable Runs

Once the locations of the instruments and the deck box

with attendant computer have been determined, the next

step is to determine safe routes to install (or run) the cable. Planning (or siting) the cable runs before installing

the cable is more time efficient than having to remove a

cable and start over, because of an unanticipated routing

problem. If not already done so, introductions to the deck

crew should be made. Each ship is a unique installation,

and what was acceptable on the last ship is not necessarily

acceptable on the next.

It is proper etiquette to discuss installation plans with

the crew and to subsequently follow their directions,

regardless of past experience or knowledge base.

If the best routing to follow when installing cable is

elusive, ask an appropriate crew member for advice. Mobilization is frequently done under a compressed time schedule, so it is best not to waste time by having to repeat a

task—do it right the first time.

Be aware of, and prevent any vulnerabilities posed

by, doors or hatches that can be opened and subsequently strike or pinch the cable.

Routes that shelter the cable from weather and sunlight, as well as provide protection from ship’s operations

and personnel traffic, are preferred. Similarly, locations

where the cable is naturally protected by the structures of

the ship itself are considered advantageous.

Be aware that the cable must not interfere with

the operation of safety equipment (e.g., a life

ring, lifeboat davit, fire extinguisher, alarm, public address

equipment, ladders, etc.) or an operational fixture (e.g.,

jacob’s ladder, windlass, fairlead, cleat, etc.).

The cable route must also provide attachment or purchase points where the cable can be secured, so it does not

move from its intended location. The superstructure of a

ship typically has many purchase points, whereas the bow

and stern, which are principally open areas, do not.

Cable should not lay across the deck of a walkway,

passageway, or gangway, because it potentially creates a tripping hazard; the cable should cross overhead,

which might require the use of one or more standoff poles

to support the cable.

Be aware of any potential to interfere with any other

ship’s equipment not mentioned above—even if it appears to be used infrequently.

Exercise 4.4 What is a likely reason for avoiding ship’s

equipment that appears to be used infrequently?

5. INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION

For the protocols presented here, the prioritization of

tasks is assumed to result in the installation of the instruments before the cable is physically installed. For the

circumstances wherein the opposite might occur, notes are

provided in the subsequent sections to facilitate this case.

Ships have strong railing to protect personnel on almost all

decks (as do many offshore structures), so the installation

protocols are based on using either 1 in (2.54 cm) 316 stainless steel (SS) pipe with national pipe thread (NPT†) as

the principal structural element for the BioSCAN frame or

solar reference when ship perturbations are not a concern.

If ship obstructions, reflections, or shadows are likely

to occur during data acquisition, a Biospherical Mast for

Advanced Solar Technologies (BioMAST) can provide significant mitigation. The BioMAST units are available as

aluminum or powder-coated steel and have excellent corrosion resistance.

The solar reference described in these protocols includes

the BioSHADE and BioGPS accessories, which are all three

mounted to a 1 in 316 SS pipe nipple, so the 1 in pipe

architecture is integral to the reference subsystem. The

BioMAST mount includes a 1 in pipe coupler at the top,

so it is compatible with the reference subsystem approach.

The specification to use 316 SS pipe or a BioMAST

is for superior corrosion resistance and stability. It also

ensures the mounting equipment will last through multiple

deployments in the harsh marine environment.

Although alternative pipe specifications are suitable

for short deployments, over the long term, the inevitable corrosion of other metals means the pipe becomes

an undesirable source of particles.

† NPT is a U.S. standard for threaded pipe and fittings wherein

the thread is tapered at a rate of 1/16 per inch (6.25% slope),

which will pull tight over a small number of turns.

21
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

Exercise 5.0 Why is it important that the pipe used for

sensor mounts not be corrosive and, thus, not a source

of particles?

5.1 Instrument Installation Tools

The presentation of the tools needed for the protocols

is based on organizing them for specific tasks and keeping

them in separate tool bags, which can be picked up and

used for the associated task. By having separate tool bags,

multiple personnel can work on multiple tasks without a

conflict in tool availability, while keeping the amount of

equipment that needs to be shipped to a minimum. The

latter is particularly helpful when deploying on smaller vessels wherein storage space is at a premium.

Exercise 5.1 What is a theoretical disadvantage with

multiple tool bags—rather than just one big tool box—

that might actually provide a practical advantage?

The tools needed for instrument installation using 1 in

316 SS pipe or a BioMAST are part of the hardware tool

bag, as follows:

1 ea Large tool bag (color coded or labeled);

1 ea Anti-sieze (or anti-galling) joint compound formulated for stainless steel, e.g., FASTORQ AG (FASTORQ, New Caney, Texas);

1 pk Disposable paper towels;

1 pr Aluminum pipe wrenches (10 in and 12 in);

1 ea Large slip-joint pliers;

4 ea 316 SS worm-drive hose clamps with 1/2 in bands

in internal diameters of 1 1/16–2 in and 2 1/16–3 in;

4 ea Scaffolding clamp for 1 in pipe;

2 ea 316 SS smooth-band worm-drive hose clamps with

1/2 in bands in internal diameters of 2 3/4–3 3/4 in

and 3 1/4–4 1/4 in;

1 ea Nut drivers in 5/16 and 9/32 in (7 mm) sizes;

1 ea Cordless 1/4 in hex-drive impact driver (e.g., Bosch

model PS40, Gerlingen, Germany), with quick release screwdriver bits plus 5/16 and 9/32 (7 mm)

hexagonal bits;

1 ea Conformable (to −18◦C), all weather, heavy duty,

abrasion resistant, fast buildup, black vinyl electrical tape, e.g., Scotch Super 88† (3M, St. Paul,

Minnesota);

1 ea Three-axis level, e.g., QuadriLevel (Metrica S.p.A,

Milan, Italy); and

1 pk Assorted solid rubber strips in different thickness

up to 1/4 in (6 mm) for shimming material.

† Scotch Super 88 8.5 mil vinyl electrical tape has proved to

be a durable and reliable product through more than 15 yr

of fieldwork and is available in 3/4, 1, 1 1/2, and 2 in widths.

The assorted rubber strips are used as shims on railing,

which frequently has different upper and lower diameters,

so a vertical strength member can be made plumb.

5.2 The Solar Reference

The reference subsystem, with both the BioSHADE

and BioGPS accessories, is shipped in a specially-designed

container that allows the light sensor and two accessories

to be mounted on a 1 in 316 SS pipe during transport. The

irradiance sensor, BioGPS, and BioSHADE assembly are

mounted to v-blocks using smooth-band, worm-drive hose

clamps with additional insulation. The subsystem is not

shipped with the cables connected, which must be accomplished as part of initiating the cable run (Sect. 6.2.1).

Exercise 5.2 What is the advantage of a smooth-band,

worm-drive hose clamp, and how can it be improved?

If a 1 in 316 SS pipe or a BioMAST is used to hold the

solar reference plus BioSHADE and BioGPS accessories,

installation of the reference and accessories is significantly

simplified, because the 1 in pipe is compatible with the

reference and accessories mount and BioMAST has a 1 in

pipe coupler at the top of the highest section.

5.2.1 Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings

As stated above (Sect. 5), 1 in 316 SS NPT pipe is recommended for the structural components of a reference

mast, because its corrosion resistance provides needed sanitation to help keep the optical apertures clean. The 1 in

diameter is chosen for its mechanical properties, and the

use of commercially available pipe ensures the pipe and

any needed fittings are available at a reasonable cost (recognizing that anything made from 316 SS is more expensive

than alternatives, like 304 SS).

Exercise 5.2.1 What is the difference between 304 SS

and 316 SS?

When two surfaces are connected together, the fundamental properties of the materials determine how the

surfaces wear, particularly if the surfaces are metals in

motion without benefit of conventional lubrication, e.g.,

when fitting a pipe to a coupler. Although machined surfaces appear smooth to the eye, at smaller scale the finished

surfaces associated with conventional bearing applications

are actually rough and irregular.

If two seemingly smooth metal surfaces are brought

into contact, high points—or asperities—are the points of

contact and not the nominal areas of the surfaces. Under

static loading, the asperities deform until the contact area

increases to support the load. If relative motion is introduced, e.g., when screwing together a pipe and coupler,

adhesive wear or galling may occur in one or both surfaces. Adhesive wear results from the shearing of interface

22
S.B. Hooker

oxides (protective to the base metals) followed by asperity

(metal-to-metal) contact.

Under low stress, slight bonds form at the asperity contacts and subsequent motion produces plastic deformation

with a loss of malleability resulting in fracture. Under

sufficient loading, welding occurs under pressure, with the

weaker of the two metals fracturing and yielding. These

wear and fracture fragments can transfer back and forth

between the surfaces, causing further damage.

As the loading and pressure increases, the fracturing

and yielding associated with adhesive wear gives way to

galling. The stronger bonds form over a greater contact

area with gross surface damage and the asperities seize or

freeze-up, such that further motion becomes impossible.

Galling occurs as the formation of a weld junction that is stronger than either of the base

metals and represents a catastrophic failure.

In the case of a pipe and a coupler, this means the

coupler cannot be further tightened or loosened—the pipe

and the coupler are welded together.

Galling is a potential problem in all types of stainless

steel threaded assemblies. Consequently, stainless steel

pipe requires an anti-seize (or anti-galling) joint compound

formulated for stainless steel fittings (e.g, FASTORQ AG).

5.2.2 Pipe Assembly Protocols

When connecting two pieces of pipe, a fitting must be

used to join the pipe (e.g., a coupler, elbow, or tee). In

most cases, a coupler is used. If two references are mounted

on the same base pipe, compatible back-to-back mounts

can be used or a tee fitting, which allows two risers to be

constructed, can be used.

1. A small amount of anti-seizing stainless steel joint

compound (e.g., FASTORQ AG) is applied on the

MR pipe threads and on the inside of the FG fitting.

2. The fitting is screwed onto the pipe by hand until

snug, and then tightened using pipe wrenches.

3. When tightening a fitting with pipe wrenches, one

wrench is positioned on the pipe and the other is

placed in opposition on the coupler.

4. Use maximum grip and turning force, while ensuring

an approximately 1/2 in gap is maintained between

the shank of the hook jaw and the pipe itself, thereby

allowing the pressure of the two gripping points (the

heel jaw and the teeth of the hook jaw) to provide

the gripping action of the wrench (allowing the back

of the hook jaw to contact the pipe greatly reduces

the gripping action of the wrench and can cause the

wrench to slip or result in the failure of the hook jaw).

Do not use a so-called “cheater,” which

is a piece of pipe slipped over a wrench

handle to increase leverage, because it may result in

the bending and breaking of the wrench handle, or it

can slip off during use, all of which can cause injury.

If greater leverage is needed use a larger wrench.

5. The coupler is tightened against the retarding force

applied by the wrench on the pipe which holds the

assembly steady, thereby preventing the transfer of

turning torque to the rest of the assembly, which

might damage other components.

Do not over tighten the fitting, because this

can lead to galling and a subsequent inability

to disassemble the mast.

6. Any excess joint compound that is extruded from the

fitting is wiped away with a disposable towel.

Exercise 5.2.2 What are the suggested pipe wrench

sizes as a function of pipe diameter?

5.2.3 Pipe Mast Installation Protocols

The reference mast is comprised of a 4 ft (1.2 m) base

pipe, a 2–4 ft (0.7–1.2 m) riser, plus the solar reference assembly with BioSHADE and BioGPS accessories attached

to a short piece of 1 in 316 SS pipe. The riser length is

set by the height of the person who will cap and clean the

reference diffuser, however, the sum of the base pipe and

riser should be at least 6 ft (1.8 m) long. The first level

of the railing can be used as a step (when safe to do so),

and the mast can be held with one hand while the other

hand is used for capping or cleaning. The height of the

solar reference diffuser should be higher than any source

of shading or reflections and ideally the highest piece of

equipment on the deployment platform (Fig. 11).

Exercise 5.2.3 What are some of the advantages of a

modular mast made from commercial pipe and fittings?

For the purposes of pipe installation protocols, three

axes are considered: the vertical (upward and downward)

axis, and the two horizontal axes perpendicular to the vertical. When a pipe is properly oriented with respect to the

vertical it is plumb, and the two horizontal axes are level.

Consequently, a three-axis bubble or spirit† level can be

used to verify if a pipe is plumb. The basic mounting

procedures are to mount and plumb the base pipe to the

railing, attach the riser to the base pipe, and then attach

the solar reference assembly to the riser. All pipe connections are accomplished using the procedures provided in

Sect. 5.2.2. Although it is possible to first assemble the

entire mast and then mount and plumb it to the railing, a

fully assembled mast is top heavy and awkward to control.

It is safer to assemble the mast in pieces.

† The word “spirit” is a synonym for “ethanol,” which is used

as the liquid in a bubble level because of its low freezing

point, −114◦C. Ethanol also has a low viscosity and surface

tension, so the glass surface of the incompletely filled vial

provides minimal interference with the motion of the bubble,

thereby allowing the bubble to travel the tube quickly and

settle accurately. A colorant (e.g., yellow fluorescein dye) is

usually added to make it easier to see the bubble.

23
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

The first step in mounting and assembling the mast

is to attach a coupler to the bottom of the base pipe,

as long as it will fit and not interfere with subsequently

plumbing the pipe when it is laid up against the railing.

If there is no room for the coupler where the pipe sits on

the deck, the exposed threads should be protected with

another mechanism, e.g., a thread-protecting cap or heavy

plastic wrapped with vinyl tape. The second step is to

attach a coupler to the top end of the base pipe.

After the couplers have been attached to the base pipe,

the base pipe is mounted against the railing using two scaffolding clamps or four stainless steel hose clamps. If the

latter are used, two should be used at each connection

point with one laid crosswise with respect to the other

to form an ‘X-shaped fastening around the base pipe and

horizontal railing. Each hose clamp should be tightened,

but initially kept loose to position the components close

to their anticipated final orientation. Because one hose

clamp overlies the other, make sure access to both screw

heads is maintained and the top clamp does not prevent

the bottom clamp from tightening.

Before fully tightening the clamps, it is usually necessary to shim the connection points with pieces of hard

rubber in order to plumb the base pipe, i.e., to make it

vertical. A three-axis level simplifies the plumbing process. Because the shims are inserted between the pipe and

the railing, it is frequently beneficial to tape the shims to

the pipe using vinyl electrical tape to keep the shims from

falling out of the expanse between the pipe and railing.

A proper fitting of the shims frequently involves loosening

the hose clamps to insert and tape the shims in place.

Because of the repetitive nature of the work required to

plumb the base pipe, a cordless hex-drive impact driver will

speed up the tightening and loosening of the hose clamps.

Once the base pipe is close to vertical, it is usually advantageous to hand tighten the riser into the top base pipe

coupler, so the three-axis level can be used unobstructed.

Once the base pipe is plumbed, the riser should be tightened to the upper base pipe coupler using pipe wrenches.

One of the last steps in the procedure is to screw the reference subassembly onto the riser, which might have a simpler configuration than a subsystem involving BioSHADE

and BioGPS. This requires holding the entire subassembly

with coupler already attached over the riser, squaring the

coupler to the riser pipe, and then rotating the subassembly to fasten the coupler to the riser pipe. The important

part of the procedure is to keep the coupler and pipe properly squared to one another, so the riser pipe ridges engage

the coupler grooves. There is usually sufficient moment

arm with the assembly to tighten the connection without

the need of pipe wrenches.

Once the mast has been erected and all components

screwed together (Fig. 12), the flexibility of the mast with

respect to anticipated wave conditions must be evaluated.

If the mast exhibits motion to relatively small side forces,

guy lines should be attached to limit the range of side

motions.

Fig. 12. Pipe masts on the R/V Gulf Challenger

showing the following: a) the C-OPS reference plus

BioSHADE and BioGPS accessories, with guy lines

for stabilization and slack cable coils to facilitate

sensor handling (left); and b) the older (and larger)

SuBOPS reference mounted to a v-block on a flat

plate (right), wherein the slack coil is perpendicular

to the image and not easily discerned.

5.2.4 BioMAST Installation Protocols

For ships that do not have, or permit access to, high locations wherein a pipe mast will elevate the solar reference

above perturbation sources, a BioMAST can provide sufficient vertical extent to significantly minimize or eliminate

data degradation. The mast need not be mounted high on

the ship if the elevated position sites the reference higher

than the most substantial perturbation sources. The latter is a potentially difficult requirement on a large vessel,

because of the height of the superstructure, and in some

cases large masts are the only solution (Hooker 2010).

Exercise 5.2.4 What is a likely disadvantage of a telescoping mast versus a pipe mast in winter conditions?

With respect to a pipe mast, a BioMAST represents

larger cross-sectional area and mass, which means it is subject to greater wind loading, ice loading, and ship motion.

The additional loads need to be considered when installing

the mast. The simplest mounting arrangement for a small

BioMAST (e.g., the model EM15) is to mount it against

a railing or existing shorter mast. The EM15 has a back

plate with a bolt pattern that allows the mast to be clamshelled against railing using the matching metal plates and

bolts provided with the EM15 mast.

Threaded rod can be bent around the form of whatever

BioMAST is being secured to, or hose clamps can be passed

through the bolt holes and attached around adjacent structural elements. An example of using bent threaded rods

around an existing mast is shown in Fig. 13. When working with a BioMAST, which has a natural tendency to tip

24
S.B. Hooker

over, safety lines or long cable ties (also called tie wraps)

are useful during the installation process to restrain the

range of motion to what is needed to install the mast.

Fig. 13. An example installation of a BioMAST on

the R/V Hakuho Maru showing a) front (left) and

side (right) line-drawing views of the EM15 mast;

b) the back plate with bolt patterns on the left and

right sides; c) the hot air input port for thawing

ice during winter conditions; d) the mast in the

retracted position; and e) the mast fully extended.

Regardless of the mounting approach, BioMAST must

be plumbed and this frequently requires the use of hard

rubber shims. As in the case of the pipe mast (Sect. 5.2.3),

if the shim is easily dislodged, vinyl electrical tape should

be used to hold it in place until the compressional forces

associated with the mounting process secure the shims.

5.3 Mounting the BioSCAN Frame

The BiosSCAN frame is transported in a shipping case

that does not allow the radiometers to be mounted on the

frame. Consequently, mounting the BioSCAN frame includes attaching the optical instruments, interconnecting

them with a Y-cable, and attaching the power-telemetry

cable that goes to the deck box.

The BioSCAN frame has a 1 1/4 in 316 SS pipe flange fitting on the underside. A larger pipe diameter is used than

for the solar reference, because the BioSCAN frame with

sensors attached is heavier than the solar reference with

BioGPS and BioSHADE accessories. The simplest mounting arrangement is to plumb a 4 ft (1.2 m) piece of 1 1/4 in

316 SS pipe at the desired location on the ship, which is

usually the bow (Sect. 4.3), following the same procedures

used for the solar reference mast (Sects. 5.2.2–5.2.3).

Once the 4 ft (1.2 m) piece of 1 1/4 in pipe is mounted

plumb, the BioSCAN frame screws onto the pipe. The

frame should not be overtightened, because it is advantageous to be be able to remove the radiometers (and perhaps

the frame) quickly, if severe weather is forecast. After the

frame is secured, the two horizontal axes should be checked

for level and adjustments made to the pipe if it is not. An

example easily built aluminum railing system for a bow

platform to hold BioSCAN is presented in Fig. 14.

Fig. 14. A portable (all aluminum) open-rail platform for mounting the BioSCAN on the R/V Pelican while providing a secure area for the operator.

Exercise 5.3 What is another reason to not over tighten

the fitting that mates the BioSCAN frame flange to the

vertical 1 1/4 in 316 SS support pipe?

5.4 The C-OPS Backplane

The C-OPS profiler is transported in a specially designed shipping case that allows the radiometers to be

mounted on the backplane and connected to the Y-cable.

Consequently, it is usually not necessary to do any instrument installation tasks on the backplane. Nonetheless, the

installation of the sensors are described, in case they have

been, or need to be, removed and reinstalled.

Using Fig. 7 to set the orientation, the C-OPS optical instruments mount against v-blocks using two 316 SS

smooth-band hose clamps. The radiometers are first slid

through the open bands in their correct orientation. The

instruments are then held loosely in place by tightening

the two smooth-band hose clamps that hold them to the

v-blocks (using a 9/32 in nut driver) so they can be moved

up and down, but not fall out.

The v-blocks are set to their zero offset position, by

loosening the fixed-point and rotation nuts on each v-block,

and then sliding the v-block until it is positioned in the

middle of the rotation arc. The orientation of each sensor

is set by the end of the sensor that can be aligned to the

top of the hydrobaric buoyancy chamber as follows:

Ed The Ed sensor is properly aligned when the gap

between the cosine-collector end cap and the instrument housing is aligned with the top of the

red foam, i.e., the top of the optical end cap extends 0.28 in above the top of the red flotation (or

0.61 in for the dark cap);

25
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

Lu The Lu sensor is properly aligned when the cap

on the aperture is flush with the bottom of the vblock, i.e., the top flat of the bulkhead connector

is 0.32 in below the top of the red foam; and

Eu The Eu sensor is properly aligned when the flat

on the top of the bulkhead connector is flush with

the top of the float.

These orientations are used to compute the offsets of all

sensor apertures with respect to the pressure transducer.

Exercise 5.4 What is the consequence of not correctly

specifying the offsets of the light sensor apertures with

respect to the pressure transducer?

5.5 The Deck Box and Computer

On many ships, a sacrificial piece of plywood is attached to counter tops to permit the use of screw eyes plus

line or bungee cord to hold equipment in place. When used

for computers or other devices with a lid (e.g., a deck box),

the line or cord frequently interferes with the closing of the

lid or top.

An alternative and equally reliable system for mounting

a computer and deck box that does not fail in heavy seas

is industrial-grade hook-and-loop (Velcro) fasteners that

have an adhesive on one side. The advantage of this system

is it does not mar the surface it is applied to, it can be

peeled off at the end of the campaign, and it does not

interfere with the operation of lids and latches.

The inventory for securing the deck box and computer

is as follows:

1 ea Tool bag (color coded or labeled);

1 ea Oval head stainless steel diagonal cutters (e.g.,

model 906, General, New York, New York);

1 ea Stainless steel scissors;

1 ea Premium duct tape, 1.88 in wide 45 yd roll, e.g.,

Industrial Grade Duck Tape (ShurTech Brands,

Avon, Ohio);

1 ea Adhesive-sided industrial hook and loop fastener

tape in 3 ft (0.9 m) length, e.g., Quake Tape (QSafety, Glendora, California);

1 pk Single-use isopropyl alcohol cleansing pads, e.g.,

Chempad (Chemtronics, Kennesaw, Georgia);

1 pk High-visibility (e.g., neon pink, red, yellow, or orange) 6 in (15.2 cm) small cable ties (e.g., ACT

Fastening Solutions, Gardner, Massachusetts).

The duct tape is used for short-term applications wherein

a small amount of holding power is anticipated to satisfactorily secure the deck box or computer. Day campaigns

in protected inland waters frequently do not require something more substantial than duct tape to hold equipment

in place. The residual adhesive left behind when the tape

is peeled off can be removed with an alcohol cleansing pad.

The computer should be mounted close to the deck box,

if possible, so the digital display on the deck box can be

easily seen. The display provides status messages that are

useful to verify nominal operations or to understand fault

conditions.

Exercise 5.5 What is one of the potentially hazardous

accidental misuses of industrial hook-and-loop fasteners

that can lead to damaged equipment?

6. CABLE INSTALLATION

Once the locations of the instruments and cable runs

have been determined, and the instruments mounted, the

next step is physically installing (or running) the cables

between the instruments and the deck box. The direction

chosen to commence the work is important, because it can

determine where excess cable (defined here as an amount

beyond one or two coils held within the hand) is stowed.

It is usually preferable that excess cable is stowed where

it can cause the least interference to ship operations. At

the same time, a certain amount of slack cable is beneficial

at both endpoints to provide strain relief and to permit

changes (anticipated or not) in the configuration or operation of the instruments.

From a general perspective, cable is usually run from

the instrument to the deck box on large vessels, and the

opposite direction for small ships. The reasoning has to

do with available space. On a small vessel, the laboratory spaces are necessarily small and there is usually not

much room for coiling up an excess amount of cable, either in the laboratory area or immediately outside where

foot traffic is high and passageways are narrow. The most

convenient place for excess cable on a small ship is where

the instrument is mounted.

The length of cable between two points is referred to

as the cable run. For the purposes of describing the task

of installing cable, a cable run is divided into three parts:

Initiation, starts the run and is usually associated

with connecting the cable to the instrument (deck

box) on a large (small) vessel;

Extension, connects the start of the run to the end of

the run and is usually associated with safely affixing

the cable to the ship and through cable passes; and

Termination, ends the run and is usually associated

with connecting the cable to the deck box (instrument) on a large (small) vessel.

Installing all three parts of a cable run requires the same

tools. The extension task typically requires the most analysis and effort, because this is where most of the cable is affixed to the ship. Each time cable is attached to, or strung

between, ship fixtures, care must be exercised to ensure

the cabling does not interfere with ship operations or create safety concerns. What is considered acceptable varies

as a function of the ship and its operations. The protocols

presented here are based on deployments involving many

different domestic and international field campaigns and

all the platform types presented in Sect. 1.2.

26
S.B. Hooker

Exercise 6.0 When planning a cable run should the

amount of cable that is strung inside the vessel be minimized or maximized?

6.1 Cable Installation Tools

It does not require many tools to install cable. A recommended inventory involves two tool bags, one for tape

and cable ties, and one for connectors (i.e., locking sleeves,

dummy plugs, etc.). The inventory for the tape and cable

ties bag is as follows:

1 ea Tool bag (color coded or labeled);

1 ea Oval head stainless steel diagonal cutters (e.g.,

model 906, General, New York, New York);

1 ea Conformable (to −18◦C or less), all weather, highstretch, fade-resistant, colored vinyl electrical tape

(e.g., Scotch 35 in yellow, red, orange, violet, blue,

brown, green, white, gray, and black);

1 ea High-visibility (e.g., neon colors, pink, red, yellow, or orange) standard cable ties in lengths of 7,

11, and 14 1/2 in (17.8, 27.9, and 36.8 cm, respectively);

1 ea Cable tie tensioning device or gun (e.g., Greenlee

Communications, formerly Paladin Tools, model

1828.1); and

1 ea Heavy duty clear box sealing tape (e.g., Scotch

3750).

The black vinyl tape is used for applications that are considered permanent beyond the present field campaign or

where a black color is beneficial. The white vinyl tape is

typically reserved as a tracer color, wherein a wide swath

of white tape is applied and then a narrower swath of a

different color is applied.

Exercise 6.1 What are the advantages of using highvisibility (e.g., neon) cable ties?

The connectors tool bag serves two purposes: a) storage

for tools needed to work with connectors, and b) storage

for spare dummy plugs and locking sleeves, including those

removed during the mobilization process. The inventory

for the connectors bag is as follows:

1 ea Tool bag (color coded or labeled);

1 ea Dow Corning 111 grease (preferably dispensed into

a smaller container, because a 5.3 oz tube greatly

exceeds what is needed for many field campaigns);

1 pk Disposable paper towels;

1 ea Oval head stainless steel diagonal cutters (e.g.,

model 906, General, New York, New York);

25 ft (7.6 m) 1/4 in (6 mm) nylon braided line;

1 ea Miniature (i.e., 1/16 in) flat-bladed screwdriver;

1 ea Metal (dental) pick for releasing the split ring from

a SubConn locking sleeve; and

2 ea SubConn female 6-pin dummy plug connected to

a SubConn male 6-socket dummy plug with mated

locking sleeves.

The 1/4 in line is for securing equipment that must be released and secured on a routine basis, as well as for guys

and standoffs. For example, if each day the sea cable is

disconnected from the extension cable leading to the deck

box, a short length of the 1/4 in line is used to secure the extension cable (Fig. 15) and the cable bucket (after dummy

plugs are attached to the loose cable ends).

Fig. 15. An example of a cable extension that

is disconnected and secured each day, so the cable

bucket and C-OPS profiler can be stowed for safety.

6.2 Initiating a Cable Run

If not accomplished in a prior mobilization, color coding the cables and connectors with vinyl electrical tape,

including the deck box and instruments, helps prevent improper connections. Color coding will also ensure proper

identification of the instruments when the connection is

made to the deck box, and is particularly useful if someone unfamiliar with the equipment is assisting, perhaps

due to the person familiar with the equipment responding

to a different problem or a change in personnel scheduling.

Exercise 6.2 When applying color coded tape to a cable, where should it be applied?

The solar reference, C-OPS backplane, and BioSCAN

frame can all have multiple sensors and there is one principal connection for each subsystem of instruments. The

connection that provides the principal power connection

is color coded, so it is obvious where the power connection from the deck box is made. For the reference this

is an instrument bulkhead, but for the BioSCAN frame

27
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

a b c

Cable tie

secures

the slack

Color coded

cable

Loose cable ties

allow some motion

Tight cable ties

prevent wobbling

Large bending

radius relieves

strain

Fig. 16. Examples of initiating a cable run: a) a close up of slack cable on a solar reference, which is formed

into loops and affixed to the instrument mast with a (pink) cable tie to provide strain relief, and color coding

used with a reference; b) ; and c) the loose and tight cable ties on the C-OPS backplane, with the former

allowing a range of motion and the latter providing strain relief while preventing strumming which can lead

to wobbling of the backplane during descent.

and C-OPS backplane the main connection is a Y-cable

MP/MR connector.

A standard color convention is to label the solar reference red, orange, or yellow, the sea cable is usually blue or

green, and the BioSCAN Y-cable is violet or brown. These

color choices are arbitrary and are selected as mnemonics:

the reference views the sun, which is yellow, orange, or red;

the C-OPS instrument profiles the blue or green ocean; and

the BioSCAN uses the remaining colors.

As noted above, white is reserved as a tracer, which can

be helpful when many systems are deployed on the same

platform. If only one system is deployed, color coding need

not be sophisticated; it need only be consistent.

When running cable from an instrument subsystem to

the deck box, the cable connector that plugs into the instrument supplies power with an FS/FG connector, and

the cable connector that plugs into the deck box receives

power with an MP/FG connector. Both terminus ends of

the cable have FG locking sleeves, so an interface cable or

its assembled equivalent is needed.

6.2.1 The Solar Reference

The main connection for a solar reference with BioGPS

and BioSHADE accessories is to the BioSHADE at the

MP/MR bulkhead using an FS/FG connector. The other

two connections on the BioSHADE end cap are FS/MR

bulkheads that supply the power and telemetry for the

BioGPS and the irradiance instrument. The latter two are

connected to the BioSHADE using short interface cables.

Whenever connecting a solar reference with a

BioSHADE present, the cable must be dedicated to only this purpose and the BioSHADE may only

supply power and telemetry to the BioGPS and irradiance

instrument from the two FS/MR bulkheads. Catastrophic

instrument damage may occur if a) the BioSHADE and

any other instruments or accessories are powered together

from the deck box on a Y-cable, or b) instruments or accessories in excess of the BioGPS and irradiance instrument

are connected to the BioSHADE FS/MR bulkheads.

An overview picture of a solar reference with all three

components is presented in Fig. 12a, and details of the

cable installation in terms of color coding and strain relief

are presented in Fig. 16a.

Exercise 6.2.1 How does a coil of slack cable attached

to a fixture (e.g., a pipe mast, as shown in Fig. 16a),

provide strain relief?

6.2.2 The BioSCAN Frame

For a BioSCAN frame, the main connection is to the

Y-cable MP/MR connector using a FS/FG connector. The

other end of the Y-cable has two FS/FG connectors to interconnect the two radiance instruments at their MP/MR

bulkheads. Because the BioSCAN frame is designed to rotate, it is important to leave sufficient slack between the

two fixture points that span the main connection, so the

frame can be turned more than 180◦ in both rotational

directions. Additional details of proper cable strain relief

for a BioSCAN frame are presented in Fig. 16b.

Exercise 6.2.2 What is the principle vulnerability of

using a Y-cable to power two instruments?

6.2.3 The C-OPS Profiler

For a C-OPS profiler, the main connection is to the Ycable on the back plane at the MP/MR connector. The

other end of the Y-cable has two FS/FG connectors that

interconnect the two radiometers at their MP/MR bulkheads.

The C-OPS profiler is transported in a specially designed shipping case that allows the optical instruments

28
S.B. Hooker

to be mounted on the backplane and connected to the Ycable. Consequently, it is usually not necessary to do any

cabling tasks on the backplane, except to connect the sea

cable to the Y-cable and secure the requisite components.

An example of the cabling secured to the backplane is presented in Fig. 16c.

The C-OPS in-water instrumentation requires a sea cable with MP/MR on the deck box end and FS/FG on the

backplane end. The sea cable is stored in a plastic bucket

sized for the length of the cable. Holes in the bottom allow

water to drain away. Handles allow the bucket to be moved

into position on the deck for the deployment of the profiler, and then moved back to a safe location for stowage

between stations.

A sea cable is coiled into the cable bucket using a figureeight method. Approximately 1 m of slack cable at the

MP/MR (deck box) end is placed outside the bucket, and

then CW coils of cable are put into the bucket until all

the cable is safely coiled into the bucket with the FS/FG

instrument end lying on top.

Each coil put into the bucket will either lie naturally

in the bucket on top of the previous coil or will want to be

coiled in the opposite (CCW) direction. The CCW coils

are reoriented by flipping them under the present coil. If

taken out of the bucket together, the top coil of an overand-under pair can be flipped over to create a figure-eight

with the partner coil.

Do not force the cable to lie as sequential coils in

the same circular orientation, because this will add

tension to the cable and increase the likelihood of cable

snarls when the cable is removed from the bucket during

profiling.

Exercise 6.2.3 How can the cable initiation in Fig. 16c

be improved?

6.3 Extending a Cable Run

If the distance between an instrument subsystem and

the deck box cannot be spanned with a single interface

cable (FS/FG on one end an MP/FG on the other), one or

more extension cables are needed. Extension cables have

FS/FG on one end and MP/MR on the other, and are used

first on a large ship (i.e., connected to the instrument and

then run towards the deck box). The run is completed by

adding an adapter or interface cable at the MP/MR end.

Exercise 6.3 If the only two cables that will span a

cable run are two interface cables, how can they be reconfigured to connect properly?

6.3.1 C-OPS Extension Cables

The sea cable for a C-OPS by definition creates a multiple cable run, because the sea cable is configured as an

extension cable. This is done so a sacrificial (less expensive) interface or adapter cable is added to the MP/MR

(deck box) end of a sea cable. In addition, a Y-cable is

used on the backplane to connect the radiometers to the

sea cable. A Y-cable allows the sensors to be connected

using a minimum number of bulkhead connectors.

The extension of the deck box MP/MR end of a sea

cable requires one or more cables. On a small boat, an

interface or adapter cable is used, and on a large ship,

one or more extension cables might be needed to get close

to the deck box, and then an interface or adapter cable

is used to make the deck box connection. The sea cable

is the most valuable of the cables, so it is advisable to

maximize how much of it is available in the cable bucket.

The cable is safest in the bucket and this also ensures the

maximum amount of cable can be deployed into the water

for profiling.

Exercise 6.3.1 What is another advantage for having

a sea cable that can be disconnected close to the cable

bucket?

6.3.2 BioSCAN Extension Cables

Like the C-OPS backplane, the BioSCAN instrument

system uses a Y-cable on the frame to connect the two

radiometers to the cable from the deck box. This means

deployment of the BioSCAN frame subsystem will always

involve two or more cables. For a large ship, the cable

from the deck box is frequently an extension cable, and for

small boats it is usually an interface cable.

Exercise 6.3.2 If the BioSCAN (two radiometers) is

mounted on the bow of a ship along with a surface reference (1 radiometer) without BioGPS and BioSHADE

accessories, how can all three devices be powered and

the data acquired with one power-telemetry cable going

back to the deck box?

6.3.3 Extension Cable Practices

Running an extension cable from a solar reference, the

C-OPS sea cable, or the BioSCAN frame to the deck box

involves a number of considerations aboard ship. Not all

possible considerations are presented, but a sufficient diversity are provided to establish a framework for determining what to do when unexpected challenges are encountered.

The primary objective when extending a cable run is to

affix the cable securely to the ship, all the while minimizing the risk that the cable can be damaged by ship’s operations and preventing any interference with the operation

of ship’s equipment—especially safety equipment. Minimizing the opportunity for damage means being aware of

the tasks the crew performs, as well as the ship’s response

to inclement weather.

The cautions and awareness required for properly siting a cable run (Sect. 4.4) are also applicable to extending

the cable run (Fig. 17). Some practical aspects of the installation procedures are as follows:

29
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

Tie-wrap through

keyhole opening

secures cable

a b c

d e f

Tie-wrap on top of funnel

secures cable

Color-coded connection

in open for easy access

Cable is secured behind the life

ring to prevent interference

Tie-wraps secure

cable behind the

railing to protect

the cable

Cable run behind stairs

prevents hazard

Cable is secured

to bracket allowing

speaker to move

Fig. 17. Examples of extending a cable run on the R/V Hakuho Maru: a) cable is secured to the top of

a funnel, well clear of the discharge point, and a connection (properly color coded) is made in the open for

easy access; b) cable is secured to a keyhole in the bulwark; c) cable is secured behind a life ring to prevent

interference with the use of safety equipment; d) cable transitions from an overhead passage to a lower point

using a speaker bracket (note the reminder to not attach cable to the ship’s electrical wire); e) cable is run

behind stairs to prevent a trip hazard and protect the cable; and f) use of railing to span between the bow

and stern, wherein the cabling is cable tied behind the railing to protect it.

1. Secure the cable with high-visibility cable ties with a

color that is distinctive from black, white, or neutral,

which are frequently the colors used by the crew.

2. Set the cable manually by pulling the tape section

through the head (in the correct direction) or a cable

tie tensioning device may be used to apply a cable

tie with a specific amount of tension.

3. Cut the protruding tape section of the cable tie flush

with the head.

Do not leave a protruding tape section,

because it can have a sharp edge which

might cause injury, especially to hands softened from

repeated exposure to water (some cable tie guns cut

the tape off when the proper tension is achieved).

4. Secure the cable only to passive mechanical fixtures,

if possible.

Do not attach cable to the ship’s cabling or any

other cable, because the other cable could fail under the added load, especially during severe weather

(plus if the other cable needs to be removed, perhaps

as the result of a fault condition, both cables will

become unsecured).

Do not attach cable to moving parts, because

this adds mechanical and vibrational wear; if

this is unavoidable, add chafe protection and stiffening members to restrict motion response where appropriate.

5. If cable troughs are available, attach the cable to the

framing members of the cable trough.

6. Where possible, protect cable by securing it so as

to not expose it to likely deck operations or traffic

patterns.

Do not attach cable to anything that might

heat up as a result of normal operations, because this might melt the insulation materials of the

cable; if this is unavoidable, add heat shielding and

cable protection where appropriate.

7. If two cables must be joined to complete a run, tape

the locking sleeves together to protect them from so30
S.B. Hooker

lar insolation and to signal caution to anyone who

might consider disconnecting them.

In those rare cases wherein it is advisable to lay

cable across a deck or to run it where windage

can cause it to move and chafe, the cable should have an

overwrap of a sacrificial material (e.g., canvas or rubber)

applied as protection. In the case of a cable laying on a

deck, the overwrap should include additional material to

keep the assembly flush to the deck and bright coloration

to provide an alert for the presence of a tripping hazard.

Exercise 6.3.3 What is a common feature of ship decks

that can provide a convenient and secure location to run

cable on top of a deck?

6.4 Terminating a Cable Run

Terminating a cable run involves the final connection

to the last component, which is the deck box on a large

ship and an instrument or Y-cable (interconnected to instruments) on a small boat. For a cable run involving

an extension cable, an interface or adapter cable must be

added. If there is an excess of slack cable at the end of

the run, the majority of it should be coiled up and secured

outside the data acquisition area for a large ship and at

the instrumentation for a small boat. A small amount of

slack cable is needed near the connection to the deck box

to provide strain relief plus positioning and repositioning

options.

Before connecting the cables to the deck box, verify

the cables are being connected to the correct ports on the

side of the deck box. For C-OPS, this means the sea cable

is connected to the bulkhead connector labeled “Port 1

Underwater” and the solar reference cable is connected to

the “Port 2 Surface” bulkhead connector. For BioSCAN

the BioSCAN frame instruments are connected to “Port

1 Frame” and the solar reference is connected to “Port 2

Reference.”

Finally, inspect the overall installation and confirm the

color coding verifies the connections are correct and the

cable runs are squared-away. For example, police the installation areas and look for any tools, cable ties, and debris (e.g., cut cable ties). It is important to pick up and

properly dispose of any plastic trash (Sect. 12.5). For any

uncertainties in the installation in regards to ship equipment, consult a crew member.

Exercise 6.4 What is a sensible precaution before connecting any cables to a deck box?

7. TEST DEPLOYMENT

If being used for the first time, or if being deployed in

a significantly different water mass or on a different platform, C-OPS and BioSCAN need to be tested for proper

trim before commencing data acquisition. “Trim” here

refers to the optical apertures being pointed to within 1–

2◦ of their designed pointing angles—on average and with

no discernible bias—while being subjected to the motion

of the platform involved, e.g., the descent of the C-OPS

backplane, the motion of the ship, etc. If the platform

involved is not in motion, e.g., if an offshore structure is

being used, the non-moving components should be pointed

to within 0.1◦ of their designed pointing angles.

One objective of the test deployment is to verify

the apertures in motion are traversing their designed angles without a discernible bias, thereby safeguarding the quality of the observations obtained.

In other words, it is completely acceptable that the

apertures move, but the sampling should be equally obtained on both hemispherical sides of the designed pointing

angle. Designation of the two hemispherical sides as positive and negative is arbitrary. As long as the designation

takes place in software and is understood as up and down,

left and right, or in and out with respect to the designed

pointing angle, the practitioner can make compensatory

adjustments until there is no discernible bias.

The other objectives of the test deployment are as follows:

a) Verify the functionality of all electrical components,

including the operation of each R/T handset;

b) Confirm the procedures used to initiate and terminate a cast;

c) Agree on the actions to be taken in the event of likely

deployment problems;

d) Acquire familiarity with handling and operating the

instrumentation; and

e) Practice the communications protocols between the

on-deck instrument operator and the in-lab computer

operator acquiring the data.

The latter three are especially important for new practitioners. If both C-OPS and BioSCAN are tested together,

their data products can be intercompared to provide additional functionality testing (Hooker et al. 2002).

The tools needed for sensor deployment are as follows:

1 ea Large tool bag (color coded or labeled);

3 ea Rechargeable, floating, and submersible VHF R/T

handsets (one is a spare);

1 ea 5/32 in hexagonal ball-point driver to loosen and

tighten the BioSCAN azimuthal band collet;

2 ea Line-handling gloves that keep the arms and hands

dry while deploying the C-OPS backplane or working around wet components; and

1 ea UV-blocking and sun-shielding eye ware (that can

be worn over prescription glasses) with an eye protection factor (EPF) of 9–10;

1 ea Sun screen with a sun protection factor (SPF) of

30+; and

31
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

1 ea Collapsible hat with an ultraviolet protection factor (UPF) protection of 50+.

The latter three items are for safe viewing of the solar disk

to verify cloud-free data acquisition opportunities and safe

exposure to sunlight while working in exposed conditions.

There is no cure for sunburn, so being “sun

wary” is always prudent, especially for practitioners with a fair complexion. If sunburn exposure results

in fever, chills, upset stomach, and confusion, a doctor

should be consulted.

Exercise 7.0 What is the difference between SPF and

UPF?

7.1 R/T Communications

A VHF radio is, by definition, a marine radio and

operates on standard, international frequencies (between

156.000 and 162.025 MHz) known as channels. Technically,

a VHF radio can only be used on the water (including

rivers and lakes).

Once on shore, a VHF radio should not be used (except to test operability), according to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules.

Transmission power for R/T communications ranges

from about 1–25W. The maximum line-of-sight range is

up to 60 nmi (111 km) between antennas on tall ships and

hills, and 5 nmi (9 km) between small boats at sea level.

Frequency modulation is used, with vertical polarization,

which means the antennas have to be vertically oriented for

good reception. R/T handsets are, therefore, well suited

for most field campaigns wherein the assembled team is

almost always all localized around the same platform.

An R/T is the easiest, most convenient method of relaying communications at sea; all that is necessary is that

the sender pick up a handset, select the agreed upon channel for communications, and speak into the microphone or

mic. An R/T network or net would quickly become unusable, however, if everyone on the net failed to follow the

same rules and procedures. Much of what is accomplished

over an R/T net involves proper techniques and training,

coupled with common sense and experience.

It is impossible to cover all situations that may arise

when using R/T voice communications. The perspective

adopted here is that the R/T handset will be used almost

exclusively by the on-deck operator of the instrumentation

and the in-lab operator of the data acquisition computer.

It is also assumed that the bridge will be monitoring this

traffic in case the ship has to maneuver or respond to what

is happening with the instrumentation and personnel.

R/T protocols are based on so-called voice procedures,

which include a variety of techniques used to clarify, simplify, and standardize spoken communications over twoway radios. These protocols are in use by the military, civil

aviation, first-responder (e.g., police and fire) dispatching

systems, and citizens’ band (CB) radio, to name a few.

The objectives of R/T protocols are to maximize clarity

and reduce misunderstanding.

Some aspects of voice procedures are understood across

many applications, but significant variations exist. The

military of North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO)

countries use similar procedures in order to make cooperation easier, and pseudo-military organizations often base

their procedures on NATO radio protocols. The most basic aspects of the protocols are usually referred to as R/T

discipline, which is a set of procedures that all R/T communicators are expected to adhere to.

Exercise 7.1 What would be a likely disadvantage of

using cellular telephony for two-way communications, if

it were available?

7.1.1 R/T Handset

R/T communications is a method of conversing on halfduplex† communication lines using a button to switch between audio reception and voice transmission modes. An

R/T handset is also called a transceiver, because it can

both transmit and receive radio communications, albeit

not simultaneously. The push-to-talk or press-to-transmit

(PTT) button on the handset keys the microphone and allows the speaker to transmit voice over the selected VHF

channel (or frequency). Anyone on the net that is tuned to

the selected channel will hear the transmission if they are

within signal range and if the signal quality is sufficiently

above the noise threshold (discussed below).

For example, large ships will be supervised by a traffic

controller near commercial ports, and will use an assigned

radio frequency to hear and respond to instructions. They

can also hear each other’s transmissions, which allows them

to take turns speaking. The conversations are coordinated

using procedures and words that allows each party to understand who is the addressee and addresser, what is occurring that might be situationally important, and when

the conversations are finished. This allows everyone involved to be aware of each other’s actions and intentions,

without the distraction of background noise from the ones

who are not speaking.

Exercise 7.1.1 What happens when two R/T operators

transmit at the same time?

An example R/T handset is depicted in Fig. 18 and

has the following features: a) a connector for an external

speaker and microphone; b) a PTT button; c) a button to

† A duplex communication system has two connected parties

or devices that can communicate by transmitting and receiving signals with one another. A half-duplex system provides

transmission and reception, but only one at a time, i.e., a

party must wait for the other party to stop transmitting before initiating a transmission. A full-duplex system allows

both parties to simultaneously transmit and receive.

32
S.B. Hooker

immediately switch to the channel 16 and 9 distress frequencies; d) volume and squelch control; e) a frequency

scan function; f) a built-in microphone; g) a connector for

an antenna; h) a display for active functions; i) up and

down buttons for setting channels, volume, and squelch; j)

a button to switch to and select weather channels; k) selection of high or low power transmission (if one or more operators are inside the ship, high power is frequently needed);

l) a power on/off button; and m) a built-in speaker.

Fig. 18. An example R/T handset (model iM36,

Icom Inc., Osaka, Japan) with antenna not attached

and some important features labeled.

Other features that are useful in a marine VHF handset

are as follows:

• A clip, so the handset can be attached to the outside

of a buoyant work vest;

Make sure the handset has a floating and submersible rating, so if the handset is dropped

overboard it is very likely that it can be retrieved as

functional.

• A lanyard, so the handset can be secured to the user

while allowing a reasonable range of motion; and

• Voice activation for the operator working on the deck,

wherein both hands are frequently in use.

When an R/T handset is powered on and no one on

the net is transmitting, all that is heard is noise. The

noise originates from atmospheric conditions, leakage from

neighboring channels, and local interference sources. The

squelch control is a circuit function that filters out the

noise, so only the desired and sufficiently strong input signal is heard. The squelch is usually set with a knob (or

push buttons, as in Fig. 18) to establish the threshold at

which signals will open (un-mute) the audio channel, so

they can be heard over the speaker. Backing off the control will turn on the audio, and the operator will hear white

noise (also called squelch noise) if there is no signal present.

The usual operation is to set the squelch threshold until

the channel just shuts off, so only a small signal above

the threshold is needed to provide audio output over the

speaker. If a weak signal is distracting, the operator can

adjust the squelch to open only when stronger signals are

received. If the squelch is held open, continuous noise will

be heard until someone on the net starts speaking.

The point to remember when using squelch is that an

incoming signal has to overcome the ambient noise for the

squelch control to let the transmission through. If an incoming transmission is quiet or faint, the squelch control

cannot distinguish between the signal and the background

noise, so the transmission will not be heard. If the squelch

is set too high, some messages will not be received.

7.1.2 Guiding Principles

The guiding principle for working quickly and efficiently

over an R/T net, is to use standard procedures. The techniques presented here are the most common and when mastered, will allow the practitioner to be capable over a large

range of communications needs, including emergency situations. Indeed, one of the reasons this material is presented

and emphasized is to increase the safety associated with

working in the field.

When using a radio, say what what needs to be communicated without unnecessary repeats, because extraneous words lead to avoidable confusion.

Keep in mind that the objective is to deliver the message the first time, so this becomes second nature. The

more serious or complex the situation, the more important adherence to the procedures presented here becomes.

Practicing proper radio procedures makes emergency radio

procedures automatic and reduces confusion.

The capability to work quickly and efficiently

during an emergency requires the effortless use

of approved radio communication procedures as if they

were second nature—which is only possible with practice—

so it is important to use every R/T communication as an

opportunity to practice.

The guiding principles of good R/T communication are

as follows:

Hold the handset securely, applying firm pressure on

the PTT button to prevent unintentional release and

consequent signal dropout, while orienting it to prevent the possibility of having feedback added to other

background noises;

Maintain the correct distance between lips and handset, for which a distance of about 2 in (5 cm) is correct for most handsets (if the distance is too great,

speech becomes inaudible and background noises interfere, and if the distance is too small, blaring and

blasting result);

Remember the hand-to-voice coordination needed to

begin a transmission (pressing the PTT button before speaking) and to end it (releasing the PTT button after speaking);

33
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

Answer a call promptly and succinctly, while remembering excessive preliminary exchanges waste time;

Listen and think before transmitting, while remembering that unanticipated break-in causes confusion

and often blocks a transmission in progress to the

extent that neither transmission gets through;

Use plain language and common terminology procedure words—more properly prowords—as defined in

Sect. 7.1.4 and Appendix D, while remembering not

to replace prowords with plain language equivalents;

Avoid the use of slang or technical jargon, unless it

is operationally necessary, and

Do not use indecent, obscene, or profane language;

Use correct voice procedures (Sect. 7.1.6);

Speak clearly and slowly, while remembering that

both slurred syllables and clipped speech are hard to

understand (a common error among novices is failure

to emphasize vowels sufficiently);

Speak in a moderately strong voice to override background noises and to prevent dropouts, while remembering to maintain a normal speaking rhythm by

grouping words in a natural manner and sending the

message phrase-for-phrase instead of word-for-word;

Use a voice technique that enhances communication,

e.g., use standard pronunciation, maintain adequate

pauses, speak directly into the microphone, and avoid

extremes of pitch (high pitch cuts through interference, but is unpleasant if too high, whereas a lower

pitch is more pleasant, but difficult to understand

through background noises if too low); and

Keep all transmissions brief, simply phrased, and to

the point—do not send unnecessary transmissions.

Exercise 7.1.2 In addition to machinery noise, what is

a common sources of noise on an outside deck that can

degrade R/T clarity, and how can it be mitigated?

7.1.3 R/T Transmission Components

R/T transmissions should be as short and concise as

possible without sacrificing clarity. It is important that

all personnel using voice communications be instructed in

the proper use of the handset and R/T equipment. They

should also be aware that there is no expectation of privacy

for R/T communications.

Before an R/T handset is used, the communications

channel must be agreed to. There are more than 80 U.S.

VHF channels (including alternates), plus 7 weather channels. Many channels have preassigned functions and should

not be used for general communications, and some of them

are for reception only (e.g., the weather channels).

Channel 16 (156.800 MHz) is the international

distress, safety, and calling channel, which shall

only be used for emergencies, and channel 9 (156.450 MHz)

can also be used in some locations as a secondary call and

distress channel.

Many R/T handsets have a separate function button

to go to channel 16 and toggle between channels 16 and 9

(as shown in Fig. 18).

Channel 13 (156.650 MHz) shall only be used

to contact another ship when there is danger

of collision.

Ships that are required to carry a radio (i.e., vessels

that are 20 m in length or longer) must monitor channels

13 and 16; the U.S. Coast Guard (USCG) and most coastal

base stations maintain a listening watch on channel 16.

Boaters (i.e., field teams) should normally use channels listed as being appropriate for non-commercial communications. These include channels 68 (156.425 MHz), 69

(156.475 MHz), 71 (156.575 MHz) and 72 (156.625 MHz),

with the latter for intership (i.e., ship-to-ship) communications only.

In radio communications, a call sign is a unique designation for a transmitting station, and is used to identify

the stations on a net. Full call signs need only be used

at the initiation of a conversation, because the use of full

call signs on every transmission is unnecessary and wastes

time. Whenever there is a risk of confusion, however, full

call signs should be used. For the examples presented here,

the full call signs are “Dry Lab” and “Aft Deck,” which

are shortened to “Lab” and ”Deck” after the net is first

established.

Messages are constructed using call signs, prowords,

and plain words. The latter form the majority of the message content that is communicated, whereas the prowords

clarify intent and action, i.e., they reduce the possibility of

confusion that is inherent in the diversity of word choices

that are possible in plain language.

When transmitting to initiate a conversation, the addresser shall adhere to the following sequence of call signs

and prowords (there are no plain words to be misinterpreted):

1. Press the PTT button;

2. Say addressee’s call sign twice;

3. Say “This Is” once;

4. Say addresser’s call sign once;

5. Say “Over”; and

6. Release the PTT button.

The “This Is” prowords clarify who is the addresser, and

the proword “Over” ends the conversation segment and

alerts the addressee that a response is expected and should

be transmitted.

For the call signs identified above, the initiating transmission (or traffic) would be, “Dry Lab, Dry Lab; This

34
S.B. Hooker

Is Aft Deck; Over.” The initiating response from the addressee would be, “Aft Deck, Aft Deck; This Is Dry Lab;

Over.” With the initiation completed, the call signs would

be shortened to “Deck” and “Lab” during the continuation of the conversation. If there was a “Chem Lab” on

the net that might participate in the conversation, “Dry

Lab” would either not be shortened to avoid confusion with

the other “Lab” call sign, or “Dry” and “Chem” could be

the shortened call signs.

Continuation of the conversation involves the same format, except shortened call signs are used (where possible),

the “This Is” prowords are omitted, and message text (if

any) is inserted after the addresser’s call sign. For example,

“Lab, Deck; station in two minutes; Over.” The addressee

would then respond, “Deck, Lab; Affirmative; Over. In

this example, “Affirmative” is a proword indicating reception and understanding of the message

The addresser is responsible for ending the conversation, by sending a message in which no reply is expected,

which is signaled to the addressee by using the proword

“Out” instead of “Over.” For example, in the continuation of the conversation above, “Lab, Deck; Out.” ends

the conversation.

Exercise 7.1.3 What is a common mistake for new R/T

practitioners that leads to incomplete messages?

7.1.4 R/T Discipline

The foundation of R/T discipline is to understand the

prowords that all R/T communications rely on. A relatively small number of prowords must be learned to allow

basic functionality on an R/T net, which are as follows

(a more complete listing of useful prowords is provided in

Appendix D).

Affirmative Yes, confirm, permission granted, or correct.

With a poor quality connection, the words

“Affirmative” and “Negative” can be mistaken for one another, so “Yes” and “Confirm” are also used. Sometimes a double click

sent over the radio by keying the mic twice to

produce an audible “- -” sequence (like Morse

code) is used when the addressee is unable to

talk due to heavy workload or stress.

Confirm Affirmative.

Negative With a poor quality connection, the words

“Affirmative” and “Negative” can be mistaken for one another, so “No” is also used.

No Negative.

Out This ends my transmission and no answer is

required or expected.

Over This ends my transmission and a response

is required, so go ahead and transmit. Contrary to popular belief, “Over” and “Out”

are never used at the same time, because

their meanings are mutually exclusive. (Historically, “Over and Out” was used to mean

“Over to you, and when you are done, I am

Out.” The same meaning can be communicated with just “Out,” as in “Lab, Deck;

station in two minutes; Out.”

Radio Check How do you Read me, i.e., what is my signal

strength and clarity (Sect. 7.1.5)?

Read Hear, as in “I Read you Loud and Clear.”

Roger I received the message (even without understanding it), also “Roger That”; a “Roger”

response to a “Radio Check” means “Loud

and Clear” (Roger was the U.S. military designation for the letter “R,” as in “received,”

from 1927 to 1957). It is important to not

say “Roger” when actually meaning “Affirmative” or “Negative.”

This Is Identifies the addresser (the person speaking).

Wilco I understand and will comply with the contents of the received message (noting that

“Roger” and “Wilco” are redundant, because

“Wilco” includes the acknowledgement function of “Roger,” so “Roger Wilco” should not

be used).

Yes Affirmative.

Exercise 7.1.4 What is the difficulty with the above

example, “Lab, Deck; station in two minutes; Out.” for

new practitioners, and how can the messaging be improved?

7.1.5 Radio Checks

Radio checks provide the means to verify the circuit is

operating, to check the strength and clarity of the speech

on the net, and to verify the speech is clearly understood

and of normal tonal quality for the type of circuit under

test. The degree of signal strength and clarity of the transmission may be stated by word or number combinations as

given in Table 1 (e.g., “Loud and Clear” or “5 by 5”, noting

the use of “by” to separate numeric reporting).

Table 1. The degree of signal strength and clarity

of a transmission expressed in numbers and terms.

Signal Strength Signal Clarity

5 Loud 5 Clear

4 Good 4 With Distortion

3 Weak 3 With Noise‡

2 Barely Audible 2 With Fading‡

1 Noise† 1 Inaudible

† Inaudible ‡ But Readable

Voice checks are essential before commencing operations relying on R/T communications, both before deploying to the field and prior to their initial use in the

35
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

Table 2. The identity (ID) of the NATO phonetic alphabet and numbers for radiotelephony with the syllable

to be emphasized during pronunciation shown in all capital letters. Note the altered pronunciations, which are

used to prevent ambiguity, e.g., “five” and “nine” can sound the same over the radio, so they are pronounced

“fife” and “niner” for clarity. And for international clarity, “Juliett” is spelled with a “tt” construct for French

speakers, because they may otherwise treat a single final “t” as silent.

ID Word Pronunciation ID Word Pronunciation ID Word Pronunciation

A Alfa AL fah M Mike mike Y Yankee YANG key

B Bravo BRAH voh N November no VEM ber Z Zulu ZOO loo

C Charlie CHAR lee† O Oscar OSS cah§ 1 One wun

D Delta DEL tah P Papa pah PAH§ 2 Two too

E Echo ECK oh Q Quebec keh BECK§ 3 Three tree§

F Foxtrot FOKS trot R Romeo ROW me oh 4 Four FOW er§

G Golf golf S Sierra see AIR rah 5 Five fife§

H Hotel hoh TELL T Tango TANG go 6 Six six

I India IN dee ah U Uniform‡ YOU nee form 7 Seven sev en

J Juliett JEW lee ett V Victor VIK tah§ 8 Eight ait

K Kilo KEY loh W Whiskey WISS key 9 Nine NIN er§

L Lima LEE mah X X-ray ECKS RAY 0 Zero ze ro

† Or SHAR lee§ ‡ Or OO nee form§ § Altered pronunciation.

field. These checks are important because they allow faulty

equipment to be identified and replaced before operations

are commenced (which means all deployments should have

at least one spare radio). When testing a radio or establishing a communication net, a standard short count, e.g,

“1, 2, 3, 4, 5, -5, -4, -3, -2, -1” (where “-” is “minus”),

should be spoken directly into the microphone at a normal

voice level and cadence of speech. By having the addresser

use an easily anticipated sequence of words, the addressee

can more properly evaluate if the spoken words are clearly

understood, because there is little ambiguity in what each

word was intended to be. When the addresser finishes the

test, the addressee should report signal strength and clarity, and then follow the same voice check procedure the

original addresser used.

Exercise 7.1.5 Why is blowing air from the lips over a

handset microphone an inadequate radio check?

7.1.6 Voice Procedures

It is useful to adhere to NATO voice procedures for

R/T communications, because they are likely to be somewhat familiar to novice and experienced practitioners alike.

The NATO phonetic alphabet (Table 2), more accurately

known as the International Radiotelephony Spelling Alphabet and also called the International Civil Aviation

Organization (ICAO†) phonetic or ICAO spelling alphabet, as well as the ITU‡) phonetic alphabet, is the most

widely used spelling alphabet.

† The ICAO is the United Nations agency concerned with civil

aviation.

‡ The ITU is the agency of the United Nations which regulates

information and communication technology.

To enhance clarity and reduce misunderstanding from

similarly sounding words, prowords with specialized meanings (Sect. 7.1.4 and Appendix D) are preferentially used

in radio communications in English-speaking countries and

in international radio communications wherein English is

the common language (e.g., maritime and aviation communications).

Exercise 7.1.6 Assuming the operators in the above

R/T traffic are experienced and have deployed the profiler many times, what would be a shortened, but equally

effective exchange between the Deck and Lab?

7.2 Functionality Test

Whenever an instrument system is transported, it is

advisable to perform a functionality or bench test at the

destination, prior to deploying the in situ instruments. In

many cases it is advantageous to be able to do this test

quickly and in a small amount of space, so visual confirmation that everything is correctly configured is easily

obtained. The functionality test should be performed with

shorter unequivocally functional cables, e.g., laboratory cables, if possible.

Exercise 7.2 What is the advantage of using laboratory

cables for the functionality test?

The instruments are typically placed on a bench top,

connected to the correct deck box port ports, and a serial cable from the computer is connected to the deck box.

Typically this is an RS-232 cable, but a USB cable can

also be used. The Y-cable routing on the C-OPS backplane allows the underwater instruments to be tested in

the shipping container by connecting a laboratory cable to

the MP/MR connector on the Y-cable.

36
S.B. Hooker

Do not test the solar reference with shadow

band attachment in its shipping container—the

shadow band must be free to move whenever the deck box

is powered.

The shadow band might have a reusable cable tie that

constrains the motion of the shadow band during shipment. It is very important to remove the shadow band

from its shipping container and to remove any restraint if

present. The solar reference must be positioned so the

shadow band is free to move throughout its functional

range (about 225◦).

The primary purpose of the functionality test is to expose any existing problems and establish a solution. If the

test reveals spares are necessary, and if the test is done soon

after arriving at the destination, the maximum amount

of time is provided to locate a solution from the recommended spares inventory (Sect. 9.2) or place an order for

an overnight shipment.

7.2.1 Deck Box Functionality

The BioSCAN and C-OPS instruments are powered using a deck box. The deck box is usually powered with an

AC adapter (12 VDC at 8.3 A output), which also charges

the internal battery. The C-OPS power-up sequence is

shown below as a series of eight primary steps, with some

steps having secondary steps (identified with letters as

being representative, but not completely comprehensive).

The C-OPS power-up sequence is shown, because it is a

little more complicated than the BioSCAN sequence.

Verify the deck box AC adapter is plugged in and the

Charger Power LED is lit, before proceeding (although in

some cases, e.g., small-boat operations, a functionality test

might be performed using deck box battery power, because

an alternative power source is inactive). If external power

is applied, but the Charger Power LED is not lit, check the

cabling connections back to the power source.

The deck box is powered on using the latching power

switch (Fig. 8), which must be lifted up before moving

it, and then it will latch into the new position. For each

power-up step, the deck box display is shown in green typewriter typeface and explanations of the deck box messages

are shown in slanted typeface. The C-OPS configuration

for the power-up sequence is as follows:

Port 1 The underwater port is connected to the C-OPS

backplane that has Ed and Lu instruments with

the latter also containing a pressure transducer

and a water temperature probe;

Port 2 The surface port is connected to the solar reference subsystem that has an Ed(0+) instrument

plus a BioSHADE and BioGPS.

All three radiometers have 19 channels.

The first step in the power-up sequence describes the

deck box, including the communication protocol and the

firmware.

1. Deckbox Standard

115200,N81

v:1.33 12/18/11 HDpx

Waiting to stabilize

Description of the deck box;

baud rate, no parity, 8 bits,

1 stop bit; the firmware version; and wait message.

The second step activates Port 1 at maximum voltage

to check the power consumption. If sufficient power is

drawn to indicate that a sensor is connected (step 2a), the

deck box waits until the remote subsystem has stabilized

(step 2b), as indicated by an increasing list of periods (“.”)

in the last line of the display.

2a. Activating Port 1

Drawing 190.4mA

Port 1 activated and current draw is checked.

2b. Activating Port 1

Drawing 190.4mA

Stabilizing .......

Several seconds will elapse

during initialization of the

Port 1 instrument(s).

The deck box gradually reduces power to the port 1

subsystem until it reaches the required voltage as reported

by the underwater instruments (step 3). This allows the

power to be optimized to the cable lengths that are being

used. Note the large power draw is due to the long cable

being used (a bench test will use considerably less power).

3. Activating Port 1

Optimizing:

Port1 11.3v 79.5mA

Tag: 3 Ed@Depth

The voltage reported by the

instrument is reduced to an

optimum of about 7 V to reduce power and heat.

After the port 1 sequence is completed, it is repeated

with port 2 (step 4), which in this case, is connected to a

surface reference, BioGPS, and BioSHADE.

4. Activating Port 2 Port 2 is activated.

The fifth step starts the BioSHADE motor and is used

to determine the voltage drop over the cable length.

5a. Activating Port 2

Drawing 166.0mA

Stabilizing .......

Port 2 consumes much more

current than a radiometer,

because of the BioSHADE.

5b. Motor setup @ port 2

Preparing motor

Power: 18.8v 0.20A

The voltage drop and power

consumption over the cable

is determined from the motor.

The sixth step adjusts the power sensed at the end of

the cable during motor motion.

6a. Motor setup @ port 2

Preparing motor

Drawing 402.3mA

The current draw increases

as the motor is used to move

the shadow band over the

solar diffuser.

6b. Motor setup @ port 2

Adjusting line drop

- moving motor -

Power: 16.3v 0.57A

Starting at the upper limit,

the voltage level is slowly

lowered while the motor is

moving the shadow band.

6c. Motor setup @ port 2

Adjusting line drop

- moving motor -

Power: 14.0v 0.64A

Intermediate messages display the reduction in power

consumption as the voltage

is decreased.

37
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

6d. Motor setup @ port 2

Adjusting line drop

- moving motor -

Power: 14.1v 0.58A

When the target voltage at

the shadow band is reached,

the process stops and the

motor stops moving.

The seventh step reports a summary of the sensors

found, and then the power is turned on for port 1.

7. 2 devices on port 1

3 devices on port 2

Rechecking with both

ports on......

The number of devices is reported, Ed and Lu on port

1, plus Ed(0+), BioSHADE,

and BioGPS on port 2).

After a delay, the eighth step provides a complete inventory of the attached devices and their aggregator tag

numbers.

8a. Aggregator 1

19 channels

105 bytes

Tag: 1 Ed surface

The instruments with both

ports on are reported as a

sequence of aggregator messages.

8b. Aggregator 2

21 channels

113 bytes

Tag: 2 Lu@Depth

The Lu instrument, which

has 21 channels (19 wavebands, pressure, and water

temperature), is tag 2.

8c. Aggregator 3

19 channels

105 bytes

Tag: 3 Ed@Depth

The Ed instrument, which

has 19 channels (19 wavebands), is identified as tag

number 3.

8d. Aggregator 7

1 channels

29 bytes

Tag: 7 GPS

The BioGPS accessory has

only 1 channel (the GPS)

and is identified as tag number 7.

8e. Aggregator 8

1 channels

31 bytes

Tag: 8 Shadowband

The BioSHADE accessory,

with 1 channel (the motor),

is identified as tag number

8.

The ninth step completes the process and ends with a

display showing the voltage and current for various parts

of the system.

9a. Ready...

26.5C

Initialization complete and

deck box temperature.

9b. Vext: 13.0V, 1.21A

Chgr:15.9V, 0.00A

Bat: 13.8V, 0.00A

10.3V180mA 16.4v406m

This is the display that is

normally seen after successful initialization (described

below).

If the deck box is running on battery power, the display

is not backlit to conserve power.

9c. Vext: 0.2V, 0.09A

Chgr:0.1V, 0.09A

Bat: 13.0V, 0.16A

1.2v0mA 1.1v0mA

The deck box is using battery power (Vext is about

0 V), and there are no instruments connected.

Because microradiometers and their attendant aggregators self organize, it is important to observe the deck

box displays during power up. If a sensor, e.g., an individual channel in an optical instrument fails to report, the

subsystem will organize into a functional state with the errant channel missing and turned off. If this is not detected

by the operator, and if the data acquisition software does

not check if the powered on system is not configured as

anticipated, the missing channel will be undetected.

If BioSHADE is being used, another functionality check

that can be determined during the powering of the deck

box is to visually verify the shadow band is moving through

its entire range of motion from one side of the irradiance

instrument to the home position below the opposite side.

Exercise 7.2.1 If the deck box is malfunctioning, what

is a good way to record the messages generated by the

deck box, so they can be studied more carefully and

perhaps transcribed for the manufacturer?

7.2.2 BioSCAN and C-OPS Functionality

Although the deck box functionality test establishes the

instruments able to report, it does not establish unequivocally proper configuration. The latter requires the data

acquisition software, because it allows the values coming

from the instruments to be inspected. This inspection will

reveal if an instrument is returning data that is out of

bounds or if an anticipated channel is not reporting.

After powering up the deck box, confirm the serial connection from the deck box to the computer is properly connected. If the RS-232 (9-pin) connection is used, a serial

adapter or dongle, will usually be needed to convert the

cabling to USB. Power up the data acquisition software

and use it to verify all optical channels are reporting for

each instrument and that the values are at the dark levels.

Inspect the ancillary channels, e.g., tilt and roll in the

solar reference and profiler (if the testing is for C-OPS),

and verify the values being reported are sensible. For example, position the reference so it is approximately plumb

and verify the vertical tilt is close to zero. Rotate the reference through a positive-to-negative pitch and roll sequence

and verify correct response.

If C-OPS is being tested and it is laying on its side,

reorient it vertically and verify the vertical tilt is approximately zero. Rotate the profiler through a positive-tonegative pitch and roll sequence to verify correct response.

Check the water temperature value and confirm it is reasonably close to air temperature.

The data acquisition software should also display the

data sampling rate (nominally 12 or 15 Hz), voltage levels

at the instruments (nominally 6.5 VDC for the profiler and

6.2 VDC for the reference with BioSHADE and BioGPS),

and deck box power (nominally 12 VDC).

If BioGPS is being used, the date and time values can

be verified, as can the longitude and latitude (e.g., with a

handheld GPS or the GPS on the platform).

Exercise 7.2.2 What additional simple procedure can

be used to verify the individual light instruments are

responding as anticipated?

38
S.B. Hooker

7.3 Deploying the Solar Reference

The C-OPS and BioSCAN solar reference is designed

to be pointed at a zenith angle of 0◦, i.e., pointed straight

up or plumb, so the cosine collector can collect a planar

measurement. For a platform in motion, e.g., a ship, it is

not necessary for the reference to be mounted on a gimbal,

as long as the reference is plumbed before sailing and the

ship maintains a level trim at sea. The latter is not an

unusual requirement, because almost all ships maintain a

rather level trim. Ship operations are safer to conduct and

fuel efficiency is maximized if the ship remains trimmed.

Exercise 7.3 What kinds of changes in solar illumination are acceptable on a moving platform?

7.4 Deploying the BioSCAN Frame

Confirm all optical apertures are clean and collect ondeck dark data for all radiometers by placing opaque caps

on the apertures. Dark data must be collected for all three

gain stages. A total of at least 1,024 records per gain setting should be collected, because this allows a power spectral density (PSD) analysis of the data using fast Fourier

transform (FFT) techniques. The latter allows, for example, confirmation that no AC 60 Hz contamination is

present in the data. Remove the caps after the dark data

have been collected, and release the slack in the cable that

is attached to the sea cable.

The BioSCAN above-water radiometers are typically

pointed to a nadir angle of 40◦ for the sea-viewing (LT )

instrument and a complementary zenith angle of 40◦ for

the sky instrument (Li). These angles are set by movable plates on the frame, which should be checked before

a campaign commences and intermittently throughout the

campaign or immediately after the system is perturbed.

During data acquisition, the frame is rotated into the

sun plane and the solar compass (Fig. 19) is used to verify the instruments are pointed directly at the Sun. This

task aligns the shadow from an upward-pointing thin rod

with the large mark immediately behind the rod when the

frame is pointed into the sun plane. The position of the

azimuthal band at the base of the frame is used to then

rotate the frame perpendicular to the sun plane by adding

or subtracting 90◦ with respect to the sun plane reading.

Fig. 19. The BioSCAN solar compass a) pointed

(down) into the sun plane (left), and b) pointed

(CW) perpendicular to the sun plane (right).

The final position is checked using the solar compass to

verify the shadow from the rod falls on the large mark that

is 90◦ away from the sun plane mark and in the correct

direction. The direction of perpendicular rotation with

respect to the sun plane is arbitrary as long as the seaviewing instrument views the water and is pointed far from

the deployment platform. If both perpendicular positions

result in views of the sea surface, the one that has the seaviewing instrument pointed farthest from the deployment

platform should be usedwhich for a ship means the Sun is

kept amidships and the radiometers point to the bow.

Typically, the BioSCAN is deployed on a reasonably

large vessel such that there is a deck operator of the frame

and a data acquisition operator for recording the data for

each data acquisition event or cast. It is advisable to record

at least 1,024 data records from the instruments, because

this will permit proper glint filtering and allow the aforementioned PSD analysis of the data using FFT techniques.

In terms of communications between the two operators established in Sect. 7.1.3, the basic sequence involves

the deck operator establishing that conditions are stable,

pointing the frame into the Sun plane, and then rotating

the frame 90◦ away from the Sun. In each case the computer operator is told what the azimuthal band reading for

the frame is, as follows:

Deck: “Lab, Deck; BioSCAN in position with stable sea

and sky conditions, Over.”

Lab: “Deck, Lab; Roger, Over.”

Deck: “Lab, Deck; Sun at Wun Ait Six, Over.”

Lab: “Deck, Lab; Roger, Sun Wun Ait Six, Over.”

Deck: “Lab, Deck; sea at Too Seven Six, Over.”

Lab: “Deck, Lab; Roger, sea Too Seven Six; recording

data, Over.”

Deck: “Lab, Deck; standing by.”

Usually, three sequential casts are collected for each sampling opportunity, and then a BioSHADE cast is made (if

it is being used). It is also typical for the direction of the

surface swell to be measured while noting if the direction

is towards or away from the observer.

If the wind speed is not being recorded by a separate device mounted on the deployment platform, a handheld anemometer, e.g., Kestrel 1000 wind meter (NielsenKellerman, Boothwyn, Pennsylvania), can be used. In this

case, the deck operator will collect the wind speed data

while the optical data are being recorded, and report a

representative (average) value to the computer operator

at the conclusion of the data acquisition sequence. Similarly, if GPS is not available on the ship, a handheld unit

can be used by the deck operator and reported once data

acquisition commences.

Exercise 7.4 When there are two sea-viewing options

with BioSCAN, why is the position that has the seaviewing instrument pointed farthest from the deployment platform selected?

39
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

7.5 Deploying the C-OPS Backplane

The C-OPS in-water radiometers are pointed to a nadir

angle of 0◦ for the Lu or Eu instruments and a zenith angle of 0◦ for the Ed instrument. The profiler is designed to

descend with average vertical tilts of 5◦ or less, although

typically an average vertical tilt of less than 2.5◦ can be

achieved. The sea cable and ambient currents can pitch the

sensors out of the vertical. The v-blocks that hold the instruments can be rotated to counter the average influence

of these sources of pitch by moving them in the opposition

pitch direction (Sect. 7.5.3). To minimize self-shading effects the Sun should be kept on the platform side that the

C-OPS instrument is deployed.

When not being deployed, the profiler is stowed in a

secure location. A large basket with a white sheet on the

bottom can be used for this purpose (Fig. 20). The sheet

can be used as a cushion, and as a shield against solar insolation. Fold the sheet in half, wrap it around the profiler so

the weight of the instrumentation keeps the sheet in place,

and then keep it wet with fresh water. The water weights

the sheet (which helps prevent it from blowing away) and

keeps the underlying equipment cool.

Fig. 20. The C-OPS profiler in a basket on top of

a white sheet on the R/V Hakuho Maru.

While waiting for a deployment, do not allow the

in-water instruments to bake in the sun uncovered,

because excessive heat will result in notably higher dark

currents and a thermal shock when the instrumentation is

deployed into the much cooler water.

Exercise 7.5 What is unusual about the configuration

of the C-OPS profiler shown in Fig. 20 and what advantage does it provide?

7.5.1 Preparing for Deployment

Confirm all optical apertures are clean and collect ondeck dark data for the solar reference and the C-OPS backplane instruments by placing opaque caps on the radiometer apertures. Dark data must be collected for all three

gain stages and the procedure used should also tare the

pressure transducer, so the atmospheric contribution to the

measured in-water pressure can be removed. Remove the

caps after the dark data have been collected, and release

the slack in the cable that is attached to the sea cable.

Although cable snarls are reduced with the figure-eight

cable coiling method, they are still possible. When cable

is pulled from the bucket, some coils that should logically

be on top of a prior coil will be below that coil, so more

than one coil will be pulled from the bucket when the cable

is dispensed and their orientation will be reversed. Consequently, a fair lead should always be used when dispensing

cable. A fair lead is a straight unobstructed course of a

line, or cable in this case, between two points. One reason

the cable is kept in a bucket connected to another cable

with slack in it is so the cable bucket can be moved around

to establish a fair lead and to minimize the length of the

lead. In most cases, the fair lead will be between the cable

bucket and the point where C-OPS is being deployed over

the side of the platform (Fig. 21).

Fig. 21. A fair lead between the cable bucket and

the point where C-OPS is being deployed over the

stern of the R/V Hakuho Maru.

Do not establish a course for the cable that will

expose it to any snags that could cut the cable

or the person working with the cable.

Based on the water depth and optical complexity of the

water mass, the descent rate and surface loitering characteristics of the C-OPS backplane must be selected. The

descent rate is controlled by adding or removing buoyancy

as flotation (Fig. 7n) or weight (Fig. 7p) discs, whereas the

surface loitering is a function of the descent rate and how

many compressible bladders are put into the hydrobaric

buoyancy chamber (Fig. 7l). In shallow water, especially

if the bottom is rough, a downward-pointing spar can be

attached to the bottom of the backplane (Fig. 7q).

For very shallow and optically complex water, a terminal velocity of less than 10 cm s−1 is desirable. Although

40
S.B. Hooker

C-OPS can be trimmed to fall even slower, if there are significant surface gravity waves present, the rotary motion

of the waves can keep the profiler from sinking below the

depth of wave influence, because the rotary will buoy the

profiler back up to the surface.

For the open ocean wherein it might be desirable to

reach the depth of the chlorophyll maximum (DCM) or

the 1% light level, faster descent rates will be required to

overcome cable consumed by the drifting vessel and subsurface currents. The selected descent rate will depend on

the length of the sea cable, the desired depth, and anticipated cable loss due to horizontal advection.

Another factor to consider, particularly in the open

ocean, is the presence of a strong thermocline or other

circulation features with significant horizontal shear (e.g.,

an undercurrent). If the momentum of the profiler (mass

times velocity) is too low, it is possible the profiler might

not push through a high-shear feature and the depth of the

cast will be less than desired. It is not unusual for profilers to slow down as they descend into a high-shear feature

even if they are able to descend through it.

The data acquisition computer operator and the deck

operator should check their radios for proper channel setting plus loud and clear communications. If radios are not

necessary, because of the proximity of the two operators

(e.g. small-boat operations), this step is not necessary and

is omitted. In some cases, a third party acts as a relay for

the communications between the two operators, e.g., if one

or both radios have failed or if the size of the vessel easily

accommodates relay communications. In this case, both

operators should review the communications command set

with the relay person to ensure familiarity.

Another important aspect of discussing communications is to establish what will happen when the profiler

drop command is given. It is important that the deck operator understands that when the command is given the

profiler will be hauled gently to the surface, so the cast begins as shallow as possible. By giving the drop command

first and then hauling in on the cable, the computer operator will have sufficient time to start recording the data

before the profiler reaches the surface.

Exercise 7.5.1 What is a good habit to learn in order to

overcome a common omission when preparing to deploy

the C-OPS backplane, especially if there are unanticipated problems, that some software might not detect?

7.5.2 Trimming the Profiler

Profiler buoyancy is adjustable to ensure the profiler

is trimmed to be almost neutrally buoyant, but slightly

negative. At this point, the relationship between the nearsurface behavior and the ultimate terminal velocity is controlled by the ratio of flotation from the air-filled bladders

to the amount of excess weight beyond the neutral buoyancy point. The larger this ratio, the longer the profiler

will loiter near the surface (i.e., initially fall slower) and

the faster it will fall at depth (i.e., faster terminal velocity). It is the amount of additional weight acting against

the air-filled bladders that provides the wide range of sampling strategies that can be applied to a wide range in

water depths spanning very shallow coastal water to deep

oceanographic stations.

Prior to the first full cast, make an abbreviated cast

to confirm the profiler sinks at the desired rate and with

near-zero vertical tilts. Lower the profiler to the surface

and observe its behavior after releasing some cable. If the

profiler immediately sinks, it probably has too much weight

or too little flotation. Change the buoyancy with one or

more of the following: a) adjust the desired number of air

bladders or rigid flotation within the hydrobaric buoyancy

chamber (Fig. 7l), which can hold a total of three; b) adjust

the number of flotation disks below the hydrobaric buoyancy chamber (Fig. 7n); and c) adjust the desired amount

of weight along the lower part of the backplane (Fig. 7p).

It may take one or more short casts to set the buoyancy.

During the buoyancy adjustments, observe the pitch and

roll readings of the profiler. If either or both show a bias,

note the sign and magnitude, and apply the opposite as a

correction using the conventions in Fig. 22.

– Pitch

– Roll + Roll

+ Pitch

Harness Side

Fig. 22. The directionality of the pitch and roll

axes on the C-OPS backplane (note the orientation

is with respect to the side with the harness, wherein

the Ed instrument is on the left and Lu instrument

is on the right).

For example, if the profiler has positive roll bias, the

radiance aperture is lower than it should be and the irradiance aperture is higher. The problem can be corrected by

moving the floatation disks (Fig. 7n) towards the radiance

instrument or moving the weights (Fig. 7p) towards the

irradiance instrument. There are locking nuts on the shaft

mounting the floatation disks and the weights that must

be loosened and then retightened. Some experimentation

and practice will be needed to determine how much lateral

motion is needed for either correction approach.

Pitch bias takes a little more time to correct than roll

bias, because both of the instruments must be repositioned.

The nuts that secure the v-blocks to the backplane must be

loosened and the v-blocks rotated in the desired direction.

41
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

The plastic caliper should be used to verify both v-blocks

are rotated the same amount. This is done by measuring

the offset of the v-blocks with respect to the backplane are

the same at a common reference (e.g., the bottom edge of

the v-blocks where the displacement is the greatest).

Exercise 7.5.2 If the maximum range of adjustable tilt

in a particular direction has been achieved, but more

tilt adjustment in that direction is needed, what can be

done to provide the needed adjustment?

7.5.3 Executing a Cast

Lower the profiler into the water using a hand-overhand motion (Fig. 23), which ensures one hand is always

gripping the cable. It is tempting to let the cable slide

through the hands, but this is a more uncontrolled procedure and should be avoided. When aboard medium- and

large-sized vessels, it is important to initially place the

profiler as far away from the vessel as possible, so surface

waves cannot push it against the hull and cause damage.

Fig. 23. Lowering the C-OPS over the side of the

R/V Hakuho Maru with a hand-over-hand motion.

If the distance to the water is relatively small, 10 ft

(3 m) or less, the profiler can be tossed into the water.

In this case, an effort should be made to knife the profiler

into the water so it enters along the bottom edge (Fig. 24),

rather than on the front or back of the backplane (which is

reminiscent of a belly-flop). If the distance to the water is

more than 10 ft (3 m), it is advisable to stand on a side of

the vessel at the stern and lower the profiler half way to the

surface. The profiler can be carefully swung side to side

with the top of the profiler facing aft and perpendicular

to the vessel. If the profiler is released at the height of

the swing towards the stern, with a bit off practice, it will

knife into the water along the bottom edge.

Fig. 24. Knifing the C-OPS backplane into the

propeller turbulence aboard the R/V SRV-X in the

Chesapeake Bay.

Once the profiler is in the water, a current acting on

the ship or profiler, or the wind and waves acting on the

ship, will increase the distance between the profiler and

the ship. Consequently, it is advisable to use the wind,

waves, and current to advantage, i.e., deploy the profiler

on the side of the ship wherein the wind, waves, or current

will move the vessel away from the profiler. If this is not

possible, an effective way to move the profiler away from

the ship is to position it at the surface and behind the ship’s

propeller(s). A short burst of thrust to the propeller will

create enough turbulence to push the profiler far away. For

larger ships, a thruster can serve the same purpose, and

can allow the profiler to be deployed further forward on

the vessel if equipped with a bow thruster.

Exercise 7.5.3 What is the disadvantage in using propeller or thruster turbulence to move a profiler away

from the ship?

Although the data acquisition computer operator can

observe when the profiler is in the water, the deck operator should provide a timely update when the profiler is

sufficiently far away from the platform and if sky and sea

conditions are forecast to be satisfactory so the cast can be

executed. This communication should also make it clear

if the deck operator requires any more time before beginning, and the computer operator should do the same. An

example exchange, following the call signs established in

Sect. 7.1.3, would be as follows:

Deck: “Lab, Deck; C-OPS in position with stable sea and

sky conditions, Over.”

Lab: “Deck, Lab; Roger, awaiting your drop command,

Over.”

Deck: “Lab, Deck; drop, drop drop, Over.”

Lab: “Deck, Lab; Roger that, Over.”

Deck: “Lab, Deck; standing by.”

In this case, the deck operator ends the conversation by

saying that a future response from the computer operator

42
S.B. Hooker

is expected, in this case, it is the command to terminate

the cast and start hauling in the profiler. The computer

operator should log the cast number, the start time, the

geolocation coordinates, and the sky conditions.

An important aspect for collecting good data with a

free-fall system is to prevent the power-telemetry cable

from coming under tension, because even brief periods of

tension can adversely affect the vertical orientation (tilt)

and velocity of the profiler. To ensure this does not occur,

a coil or two of extra cable should be at the surface as the

profiler sinks. A tangle-free and continuous feed of cable

into the water is also needed, so an extra portion of cable

that exceeds what is going over the side (3–5 coils) should

be continuously removed from the bucket and flaked onto

the deck to minimize the chance for cable entanglements.

When dispensing cable during profiling, a fair lead is

established between the cable bucket and the point where

the cable goes over the side of the ship (Fig. 21). To maintain the fair lead, the cable is pulled from the bucket using

two hands. One hand pulls the cable out of the bucket

using a back-and-forth motion, while the other is used to

grip the cable and remove any snarls. If this is done, the

figure-eight method provides a smooth delivery of cable

during handheld profiling.

The termination depth of a profile is determined by

the science objectives and the water depth. It is advisable

to descend to at least the 10% light level, because this

ensures near-surface data products can be produced and

deeper ones can frequently be estimated. If this is not

possible, because the water depth is less than the 10%

light level, then there is likely to be a significant bottom

contribution to the water-leaving radiance and additional

corrections will be needed for the data products. To obtain

a comprehensive description of the optical properties of the

water column, it is advisable to profile to the depth of the

1% light level or the depth of the chlorophyl maximum

(whichever is deepest). If the water depth is deeper than

or on the order of the 1% light level, bottom contributions

to the water-leaving radiance will be negligible.

Once the termination depth is reached, the data acquisition operator notifies the deck operator who immediately

begins hauling in on the C-OPS sea cable. Meanwhile, the

computer operator watches the depth and velocity display,

and as soon as the profiler reverses direction, which usually also corresponds to an increase in vertical tilts, data

acquisition is stopped and the stop time logged. A typical

exchange between the two operators is as follows:

Lab: “Deck, Lab; bring it up, bring it up, Over.”

Deck: “Lab, Deck; Roger, bringing it up.”

Note that the computer operator repeats the command to

establish priority and the deck operator leaves the conversation open.

Because the C-OPS backplane is kite shaped, it has

a tendency to maintain a somewhat vertical orientation

in the water column when the cable is hauled in. This

means the profiler is frequently well positioned, in terms of

vertical orientation, when it reaches the sea surface (Fig.

25). Consequently, it is frequently easy to immediately

begin another cast once the profiler is at the surface.

Fig. 25. The C-OPS profiler being hauled in aboard

the Arctic Survey Boat (ASB) launched from the

USCGC Healy.

If the profiler is too far away or too close to the platform, after it is hauled to the surface, it will have to be

repositioned before the new cast is started (as already discussed in Sect. 7.5). In general, it is advisable to keep the

profiler 10–50 m away from the platform, with the lower

range used for small platforms and the upper range used

for large platforms. In situations wherein windage acts

upon the vessel to move it away from the profiler, it is

likely that the profiler will come to the surface much farther from the ship than desired, so it will need to be hauled

in to conserve cable for profiling.

Another important aspect for collecting good data with

a free-fall system like C-OPS is to keep a close watch on the

sky conditions around the Sun. Although the data acquisition computer operator can monitor the stability of the

solar flux, this person cannot usually forecast when conditions will deteriorate, and if they are already unsuitable,

when conditions will improve (an exception is on small

platforms, e.g., small-boat operations). All forecasting requires an observer, which means the sky around the Sun

must be periodically observed to understand trends and

predict changes.

Although the deck operator is the logical person to provide solar stability forecasts, both operators should share

in this responsibility to the extent possible, so there is

good situational awareness as to what is going on environmentally. Although the emphasis here is on the conditions

around the solar disc, the opportunity should be taken to

also observe the horizon for threatening weather.

The Sun is a very bright object, so viewing the

sky around the Sun must be done with care,

and it is advisable to occlude the solar disk with the hand

and wear glasses with appropriate UV blocking, as shown

in Fig. 26.

43
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

Fig. 26. Observing the sky conditions around the

Sun aboard the R/V Hakuho Maru, while occluding

the solar disk with a hand and wearing glasses with

UV blocking.

When the termination depth is reached for the last cast

that is to be executed, the exchange between the computer

operator and the deck operator should make that clear, as

follows:

Lab: “Deck, Lab; bring it on board, bring it on board,

Over.”

Deck: “Lab, Deck; Roger, bringing it on board, Over.”

Again, Lab repeats the termination command to establish

priority.

At this time, if the BioSHADE accessory is being used,

a BioSHADE cast would typically be collected while the

profiler is hauled to the surface, in which case the communications would continue as follows:

Lab: “Deck, Lab; acquiring BioSHADE, Over.”

Deck: “Lab, Deck; Roger.”

Once the profiler has been retrieved and stowed, the

communications would usually continue as follows:

Deck: “Lab, Deck; profiler on board, Over.”

Lab: “Deck, Lab; Roger, standing by for the water sample, Over.”

Deck: “Lab, Deck; taking the water sample now, Over.”

Lab: “Deck, Lab; Roger, Over.”

Deck: “Lab, Deck; water sample completed, Out.”

It is common that water sampling occurs after a certain

number of optical casts (usually three), so this exchange

has been added to the conversation for completeness. Under normal circumstances Deck tells Lab when the sample

is taken, so Lab can enter the time and geolocation into

the written log.

8. TEST RECOVERY

With the BioSCAN frame there is no recovery per se.

Once the desired number of observations have been collected, the frame needs to be stowed to complete the data

acquisition event. The C-OPS in-water subsystem, however, requires a separate more complicated recovery operation and subsequently it must be stowed. Both the

BioSCAN and C-OPS require the reference to be stowed

when data acquisition is completed. All these functions

are described in the following three sections.

Exercise 8.0 Are there circumstances wherein the safest

place for the backplane is at depth, i.e., it should not be

recovered?

8.1 Stowing the BioSCAN Frame

To stow the BioSCAN frame, the azimuthal collet is

loosened with a 5/32 (hexagonal) ball-point driver, and the

instruments are rotated until they are facing the operator,

i.e., towards the deployment platform. The instruments

are capped, and the collet is tightened (Fig. 27). This

protects the instruments from weather coming towards the

platform and, if on a ship, wave spray coming over the bow

(assuming a preferred mounting on the bow).

Fig. 27. An earlier version of the BioSCAN frame

in the stowed position aboard the Canadian Coast

Guard Ship (CCGS) Amundsen with the instruments capped and pointed inward.

Exercise 8.1 How should the BioSCAN frame be stowed

if severe weather is anticipated?

8.2 Recovering and Stowing C-OPS

Recovering C-OPS is essentially a reversal of deploying it. Once the profiler is hauled in close to the ship,

44
S.B. Hooker

a hand-over-hand motion is used to lift the backplane up

and over the gunwale (Fig. 28). Shortly after recovery, the

equipment should be rinsed with freshwater making sure

to force the water into all crevices and orifices, to the extent practicable. The optical apertures should be blotted

dry and the caps affixed. The profiler should then placed

in its storage basket.

Fig. 28. Recovering C-OPS aboard the R/V Gulf

Challenger in the Piscataqua River.

Exercise 8.2 If severe weather is expected, how should

the C-OPS backplane be stowed?

8.3 Stowing the Solar Reference

If a BioMAST is being used, the mast should be retracted and the restraining rod put into place with the security pin affixed. The solar diffuser should be inspected.

If the diffuser is not damaged, rinse it with freshwater and

blot dry; if the diffuser is damaged, follow the procedures

in Sect. 9.5. Because the reference is frequently mounted

in a more remote part of the ship, a squirt bottle filled with

fresh water can be used for the freshwater rinse. After the

rinse, the diffuser should be blotted dry with a lint-free

cloth or paper towel. Then the cap should be fastened to

the irradiance instrument.

On very large platforms with difficult opportunities to

mount a solar reference, e.g., an icebreaker that has a large

box-like superstructure, it is advisable to use a large telescoping mast mounted on top of the bridge to deploy the

solar reference (Fig. 29). If this is done, stowing the mast

is a more complicated procedure, because the mast is retracted in two steps. The first step retracts the mast, and

the second step breaks down the retracted mast, so the

instruments are easier to access and to ensure safety during severe weather (the instruments can be accessed with

the telescoping components retracted, but this requires the

use of a built-in ladder that might be difficult to use in bad

weather).

Fig. 29. A Telescoping Mount for Advanced Solar Technologies (T-MAST), the precursor device

to BioMAST, aboard the CCGS Amundsen which,

when deployed, placed the solar references at the

highest point on the ship.

Exercise 8.3 How should the solar reference be stowed

if severe weather is anticipated?

9. MAINTENANCE

The most recurring and periodic maintenance activity

involves almost no tools and this is the daily maintenance

that must be performed while in the field. After a data

acquisition event is completed (usually a set of three casts),

all of the instrumentation and support frames should be

rinsed with freshwater. This is particularly important for

the C-OPS backplane, because it is immersed in seawater.

If the instrument cannot be washed down soon after use,

the apertures should be blotted dry with a lint-free cloth

or paper towel.

The quartz window of a radiance instrument can

stain if salt water is left to dry on it.

Based on a visual inspection of the irradiance instrument teflon diffuser, it should be cleaned with soap and

water or isopropyl alcohol, whenever there are visible particles or foreign matter on the diffuser.

45
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

Do not use stronger solvents or abrasives to clean

the radiance quartz window or the irradiance teflon

diffuser, which can etch or scratch the surfaces and compromise the calibrated responsivity.

In addition to maintaining the instrument apertures,

the freshwater rinse protects the anodized aluminum housings, which can pit if stored with salt water on them and

this is not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty and

neither is aperture damage. After rinsing, the apertures

should be blotted dry with a lint-free cloth or paper towel.

Do not use a wiping or swirling motion to dry an

aperture, because if there is a rough particle left

on the aperture, the wiping or swirling motion can cause

scratching.

Once the apertures are clean and dry, they should be

immediately protected by putting on the caps.

Longer-term maintenance procedures should also be

pursued, wherein the instrumentation is returned to the

manufacturer every 6–12 mos for calibration, inspection,

and service. If field campaigns are conducted frequently

or if the objective of the fieldwork is to support calibration and validation activities, the 6 mo calibration interval

is recommended. As part of a calibration, the manufacturer will provide a standard evaluation of all components,

O-ring service, and calibration of the optical instruments.

On at least an annual basis, the pressure transducer, temperature probe, and tilt sensors should all be calibrated.

If additional accessories are being used, e.g., BioSHADE

and BioGPS, these should also be inspected.

Periodic intercomparisons with a different group or instrument system are recommended within every 5 yr or

less. These types of exercises not only validate the capabilities of the instrumentation, but also the data processing

and protocols being used. There are many types of uncertainties that can be exposed through intercomparisons,

especially biases (e.g., the misapplication of a correction

in two different parts of the data processing procedure).

Example intercomparisons for both above- and in-water

instrument systems are presented in Fig. 30.

Fig. 30. The intercomparison of above- and inwater instruments as follows: two solar references

aboard the R/V Atlantic Explorer (left), and the

C-OPS and SuBOPS deployed from the R/V Gulf

Challenger (right) within Great Bay, New Hampshire.

Exercise 9.0 If a cap is lost, what is a good substitute

that can be obtained or fashioned in the field?

9.1 Maintenance and Minor Repair Tools

The tools discussed below are for common types of

maintenance and repair—they are not intended for arbitrary problems requiring larger tool sets. This is not necessarily a concern when deploying on medium- and largesized vessels, because they usually have technicians and

an inventory of spare parts. On small platforms, spare

parts are usually restricted to what is brought aboard, but

the field campaigns are frequently day trips, which means

spares can frequently be received as an overnight delivery.

The contents of the recommended maintenance and repair tool set is as follows:

1 ea Tool bag (color coded or labeled);

1 ea Multi-tool with all locking blades and tools constructed of 100% stainless steel, e.g., Leatherman

Tool Group, Inc. model Wave (Portland, Oregon);

1 ea 6 in adjustable wrench;

1 ea 6 5/8 in needle-nose pliers;

1 ea 6 1/2 in combination jaw slip-joint (two-position)

pliers;

1 ea 10 in slip-joint pliers;

1 ea six-piece slotted and Phillips screwdriver set (with

blade sizes for slotted narrow round 3/16 × 3 in,

3/16 × 6 in; slotted round 1/4 × 4 in, 5/16 × 6 in; and

Phillips #1 × 3 in, #2 × 4 in);

1 ea Can of (oil-free) compressed air with nozzle;

1 pk Lint-free paper towels or cloths;

1 ea 8 oz (237 mL) squirt bottle for freshwater;

1 ea Electrical coating 15 oz (444 mL) can (e.g., 3M

Scotchkote);

1 ea Black, self-fusing, insulating putty in tape form

(e.g., 3M Scotchfil Electrical Insulation Putty);

1 ea Conformable (to −18◦C) rubber self-fusing tape

(e.g., Scotch 23);

1 ea Conformable (to −18◦C) rubber electrical splicing

tape (e.g., Scotch 130C);

1 ea All weather, heavy duty, abrasion resistant, black

vinyl electrical tape (e.g., Scotch Super 88);

1 pk Assorted sizes of heat-shrink tubing spanning 1/32– 1/2 in diameters.;

1 ea Handheld soldering iron with lead-free solder;

1 ea Handheld voltmeter; and

2 ea 1.5 ft (0.5 m) red and black 18 AWG wire with

small alligator clips at the ends.

The diversity of tapes above reflects their intended uses,

and it is important to use the right tape for the right conditions. The example Scotch vinyl tapes discussed in this

46
S.B. Hooker

document, i.e., Scotch 35 and Super 88, provide protective jacketing, electrical insulation, identification and color

coding, as well as harness and bundling. These tapes are

rated for cold-weather applications of 0◦F (−18◦C) and

high-temperature environments of 221◦F (105◦C).

Rubber tapes provide electrical insulation, waterproof

sealing, mechanical padding, and shaping. The temperature ratings for the Scotch rubber tapes discussed above

are as follows: Scotch 23 and 130C are rated for 194◦F

(90◦C) continuous and 266◦F (130◦C) short-term exposure, and Scotchfil is rated for 176◦F (80◦C).

Vinyl electrical tape is used the most often and is relatively straightforward to apply. A safe and reliable protocol for its use is as follows:

1. Apply tape with enough stretch (pulling force) to

conform to the object(s) being wrapped.

Relax the amount of stretching on the last 2–

3 in before tabbing it down to prevent unwinding (also called flagging, because the unwound end

resembles a flag).

2. Wrap cone-shaped splices uphill—that is, from the

smallest to the largest point, thereby always securing

the previous layer.

3. Wrap an irregular connection with rubber or mastic

tape.

Pad all sharp edges before over wrapping

with vinyl electrical tape.

4. Keep fingers close together when tearing tape.

The farther fingers are apart when tearing, the

more the tape will stretch before it tears, which

can lead to flagging.

5. Always use a minimum of two half-lapped layers.

The last layer should be wrapped in a more relaxed manner to prevent the layer from flagging.

6. For short-term use with anticipated disassembly, fold

the torn end under to leave a flag for easy removal.

Rubber tape is used as a build-up compound on irregular surfaces to pad sharp edges and provide a smooth taping surface. For example, to replace insulation removed for

a splice, rubber tape is used to build up the section with

missing insulation. Scotchfil putty is soft and pliable—

simply press the putty into place, mold with finger pressure, and over tape using standard methods. Rubber selffusing tape is designed to achieve a waterproof seal of a

splice, particularly for cable with a neoprene outer jacket.

For this application, all surfaces must be clean (use alcohol

saturated pads to remove dirt and oils).

Exercise 9.1 What is a another name for self-fusing

tape?

9.2 Spares Inventory

The number and types of spares taken into the field is

a function of the remoteness of the sampling location(s),

the harshness of the anticipated environment, the duration

of the field campaign, the fragility of certain components,

and the age of the equipment being deployed.

The perspective adopted here is that field campaigns

are rather expensive and the data is sufficiently precious

that all deployments should include a spares inventory.

Field campaigns are complicated affairs, so problems are

inevitable. The objective of the spares inventory is to be

prepared for likely problems. Upon receipt of the instrumentation from the manufacturer, a so-called enhanced

spares inventory is recommended. These spares are simple additions to the tool set supplied by the manufacturer,

which also contains some useful spares.

For more complicated, but nonetheless relatively short,

campaigns close to the home institute, or deployments in

areas with good overnight service possibilities, a standard

spares inventory, that builds upon the enhanced inventory,

is suggested. The standard inventory supports deployments on larger or more complicated platforms wherein additional flexibility in mobilizing the equipment is needed.

For remote campaigns or sampling conducted with older

equipment, an extended spares inventory is recommended.

As the spares inventory is built up, it is inevitable that

the items will not fit into one of the original containers

from the manufacturer, so additional container space is

needed. It is important to note that the information regarding spares is simply advisory. It is expected that each

researcher will make an informed decision as to what spares

are appropriate based on available resources and science

objectives. In some cases, a spare might simply be having

access to another piece of equipment that is part of the

campaign and is available at no conflict when the optical

sampling requires it (e.g., a spare computer).

Exercise 9.2 Why is containerizing spares and tools

important to successful problem solving?

9.2.1 BioSCAN Spares Inventory

The BioSCAN tools, which are supplied with the frame,

are the starting point for establishing a BioSCAN spares

inventory. It is intended to facilitate trimming and maintaining the frame and should contain the following spare

components and tools (some items are in addition to what

is provided by the manufacturer):

3 ea Mated six-contact SubConn micro dummy plugs

with mated locking sleeves, i.e., three male and

three female;

1 ea Small, resealable plastic container of Molykote 44

lubrication;

1 ea 5/32 in and 3/16 in (hexagonal) ball-point drivers for

loosening and tightening cap screws;

47
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

1 ea Solar compass vertical rod;

1 ea Triangular angle set (40◦ and 45◦) for setting instrument viewing angles;

1 ea Oval head stainless steel diagonal cutters;

1 ea Kestrel 1000 handheld wind speed meter (NielsenKellerman, Boothwyn, Pennsylvania);

1 ea 6 in (15 cm) spirit level; and

1 ea Scotch Super 88 8.5 mil vinyl electrical tape.

Exercise 9.2.1 Why is it desirable that certain tools

appear in more than one tool inventory?

9.2.2 C-OPS Spares Inventory

The C-OPS orange waterproof toolbox is supplied with

the instrumentation and is the starting point for establishing a C-OPS spares inventory. It is intended to facilitate

trimming and maintaining the profiler and contains the following components and tools (some items are in addition

to what is provided by the manufacturer):

3 ea Mated six-contact SubConn micro dummy plugs

with mated locking sleeves, i.e., three male and

three female;

1 ea Small, resealable plastic container of Molykote 44

lubrication;

6 ea Slotted floats (two widths);

3 ea Long rectangular floats for hydrobaric buoyancy

control;

3 ea Plastic air-filled bladders for hydrobaric buoyancy

control;

7 ea Slotted weights (three sizes) for trimming the roll

axis and buoyancy of C-OPS;

2 ea Nut drivers (1/4 in and 9/32 in) for loosening and

tightening hose clamps and backplane nuts;

2 ea 1/2 in open end wrenches for loosening and tightening weight and flotation nuts plus pitch adjustment nuts;

1 pk Small 6 in (15.2 cm) black cable ties for securing

cable to the backplane;

1 pk Small 4 in (10.2 cm) cable ties for securing shackle

pins;

1 ea Oval head stainless steel diagonal cutter;

1 ea Scotch Super 88 8.5 mil vinyl electrical tape; and

1 ea Plastic caliper and metal ruler for use as a reference when making mechanical adjustments.

Note that the cable ties are in addition to the inventory

provided with the tape and cable ties tool bag (Sect. 6.1).

Exercise 9.2.2 How is a small cable tie used to secure

a shackle pin?

9.2.3 Standard Spares Inventory

The standard spares inventory is designed to be applicable to both the BioSCAN and C-OPS instrumentation.

The list of equipment is anticipated for common problems

that experience has shown are likely to be encountered by

first practitioners and seasoned field scientists alike. The

recommend parts are as follows:

3 ea Waterproof marine R/T radios (one voice activated for hands-free deck operations, if possible);

1 ea 500–700 VA UPS;

1 ea 25 ft (7.6 m) grounded extension cord;

1 ea Surge protected power strip with on-off switch;

2 ea Dark cap screw (black nylon 1/4–20 thumb screw

with shoulder 1/2 in long);

1 ea Dark cap;

1 ea Handheld GPS;

1 ea Handheld low-speed anemometer (Kestrel 1000,

Nielsen-Kellerman, Boothwyn, Pennsylvania);

2 ea 5 m adapter cable (MP/FG and FS/FG MCIL6

connectors);

1 ea anti-corrosion lubricant, e.g., Break Free Cleaner

Lubricant Preservative (CLP) 16 oz (474 mL) bottle (Safariland, Jacksonville, Florida); and

1 ea Spare data acquisition computer.

The spare computer can be a computer that is used for

another task, but is available during optical data collection in the event it is needed. In anticipation for its role

as a spare, all needed software should be loaded onto the

computer and tested as part of mobilizing for the field

campaign.

Exercise 9.2.3 Why is a handheld GPS useful even if

a BioGPS is part of the instrumentation?

9.2.4 Enhanced Spares Inventory

The enhanced spares inventory is also designed to be

applicable to both the BioSCAN and C-OPS instrumentation and is intended for deployments on larger or more

complicated platforms wherein additional flexibility in mobilizing the equipment is needed. The recommend parts

are as follows:

1 ea 25 m extension cable (MP/MR and FS/FG MCIL6

connectors);

2 ea 15 m extension cable (MP/MR and FS/FG MCIL6

connectors);

2 ea 5 m laboratory cable (MP/FG and FS/FG MCIL6

connectors);

1 ea 1 m serial extension cable;

1 ea Computer AC adapter;

1 ea Serial adapter dongle, e.g., Tripp-Lite (Chicago,

Illinois) Keyspan Model USA-19HS;

1 pk AA batteries (handheld GPS); and

1 ea CR2032 coin cell battery (handheld wind meter).

48
S.B. Hooker

Exercise 9.2.4 If an underwater cable is damaged, why

is it important to not deploy it to depth?

9.2.5 Extended Spares Inventory

The extended spares inventory is anticipated for remote

deployments wherein overnight service is not possible and

spares on the deployment platform are expected to be limited. The recommend parts are as follows:

1 ea Deck box AC adapter;

1 ea Deck box logic board;

1 ea 25 m extension cable (MP/MR and FS/FG MCIL6

connectors);

1 ea Y-cable (one MP/MR and two FS/FG MCIL6

connectors);

1 ea MCIL6 mated pigtail cables (one MP/MR and one

FS/FG);

1 ea Fast-setting (5 min), two-part epoxy in two singleplunger 1 oz (30 mL) tubes (e.g., Devcon 5 Minute

Epoxy Gel, Riviera Beach, Florida); and

1 ea Slow-setting (4–6 hr), two-part epoxy in two separate 1 oz (30 mL) tubes (e.g., J-B Weld, Sulphur

Springs, Texas).

The Y-cable and logic board should not be viewed as luxuries, because if either are damaged, there are no alternatives except to repair the damage (if possible). Although

it might be possible to fashion a replacement cable from

other spares, that option is unlikely for the logic board.

Exercise 9.2.5 What is a cable pigtail?

9.3 Routine Maintenance

The most important routine maintenance are those activities that can be accomplished on a daily basis.

Exercise 9.3 Why are daily activities so important to

routine maintenance?

Daily rinsing of the equipment with freshwater is recommended to the extent practicable, so corrosive salts

are washed away as promptly as possible.

For C-OPS, the optical apertures should be rinsed

repeatedly with freshwater after every recovery,

and the aperture surfaces blotted blotted dry with a lintfree cloth or paper towel.

If compressed air is used to clean or dry an

aperture, especially a cosine collector, verify it

does not contain any petroleum products, which are sometimes used as a propellant (e.g., butane).

The body of the C-OPS backplane or the BioSCAN

frame can air dry. After the apertures are dry, they should

be inspected for damage (e.g., cuts or abrasion) and contamination (e.g., foreign particles or oils and rinsed again

if present). If no damage is detected, and no additional

cleaning is needed, affix the caps to the apertures.

The remainder of this section documents those maintenance activities which cannot typically be performed on

a daily basis, but are necessary for maintaining the equipment in a high state of functionality.

9.3.1 Maintaining the Reference Mount

Because it does not get submerged into the water and

automatically rinsed with freshwater daily, the solar reference can get rather dirty, particularly on a ship. Although

the forward progress of a vessel sweeps air over the instrumentation, which assists in preventing particles from settling on the cosine collector, this is not true during stations

wherein the vessel usually stops. Once a ship is stopped,

the relative direction of the wind and the hot stack gases

determines the areas that will be subjected to soot deposition, which can be significant (Fig. 31).

Fig. 31. The solar reference irradiance instrument

after 10 dy at sea aboard the TR/V Oshoro Maru

in the Bering and Chukchi Seas during which the

ambient wind exceeded 20 kts (37 km hr−1).

The solar reference subsystem should be rinsed with

freshwater as often as practicable (e.g., some large masts

remain extended for as long as possible, because of the

extra work of retracting them), but at least weekly. Even

at the top of a 60 ft (18 m) mast, there will be notable soot

deposits if the cosine collectors are not cleaned on a regular

cycle, because the hot stack gases buoy the particles to

a high altitude. After the freshwater rinse, all surfaces

should be wiped down to remove soot deposits, which can

be corrosive. The diffuser should then be blotted dry with

a lint-free cloth or paper towel, and immediately capped.

Fasteners that are rarely tightened or loosened should

be removed on a periodic basis, e.g., at least once a year

and preferably every 6 mos. The parts should be cleaned

49
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

in freshwater using a mild grease-removing soap, rinsed in

freshwater, and air dried. If the threads of the fasteners

enter a dissimilar metal, the threads should be greased with

a small amount of Dow 111 and the parts reassembled.

Any excess grease should be wiped away, and the affected

area washed while being wiped clean. Any pipe fittings

should be similarly cleaned and a stainless steel anti-seizing

compound should be applied before reassembly. Again,

any excess compound should be wiped away.

Exercise 9.3.1 What other sources of airborne particulates can be deposited on the solar reference aperture?

9.3.2 Maintaining the C-OPS Backplane

In addition to the daily maintenance conducted while in

the field (e.g., freshwater rinses and aperture drying), periodic maintenance is needed to keep the instrumentation in

a high state of functionality. A useful schedule for periodic

maintenance is to perform it well before the instrumentation is shipped for the fieldwork. If this is done, there will

be sufficient time to deal with any unanticipated failures

with the equipment. The following are recommended inspections as part of periodic maintenance:

• Check the four-point harness to ensure each clip is

held with two pieces of threaded rod capped with

nylon-insert nuts (tighten with a 1/4 in nut driver).

• Check the shackles securing the harness to the backplane (tighten with a pair of pliers).

• Check the hose clamps affixing the instruments to the

v-blocks (tighten with a 9/32 in nut driver).

• Verify the offsets of the v-blocks with respect to the

backplane are the same (set them both to the average

of the two offsets and remember to evaluate the pitch

angle the next time the profiler is deployed).

• Check the nuts securing the pitch adjustment for the

v-blocks (tighten, but do not over tighten with a 1/2 in

open end wrench, while taking care not to bend the

insert).

• Check the knurled nuts holding the lid on to the hydrobaric buoyancy chamber (hand tighten, while taking care not to over tighten).

• Check the nuts holding the movable flotation disks

and weights in place (tighten with a 1/2 in open end

wrench, while taking care not to round the nuts over).

• Check the locking sleeves on all the cables and make

sure they are hand tightened.

Exercise 9.3.2 Why are threads that fasten dissimilar

metals greased with Dow 111?

9.3.3 Maintaining the BioSCAN Frame

Because the BioSCAN is usually mounted on the bow

of a ship, it receives a significant amount of salt spray

from the forward motion of the vessel, breaking waves, and

white caps. The BioSCAN frame and instruments should

be rinsed with freshwater as often as practicable (e.g., on

some large ships freshwater must be hand carried to the

bow), but at least every 7 dy. After the freshwater rinse,

all surfaces should be wiped down to remove salt deposits,

which can be corrosive. The radiance apertures should

then be blotted dry with a lint-free cloth or paper towel.

Fasteners that are rarely tightened or loosened should

be periodically removed, e.g., at least once a year and

preferably every 6 mos. The parts should be cleaned in

freshwater using a mild grease-removing soap, rinsed in

freshwater, and allowed to air dry. If the threads of the

fasteners enter a dissimilar metal, the threads should be

greased with a small amount of Dow 111 and the parts reassembled. Any excess grease should be wiped away, and

the affected area washed while being wiped clean.

Exercise 9.3.3 What are some cautions that must be

observed when removing fasteners that have held fast

for a long time without being tightened or loosened?

9.4 Damaged Backplane or Frame

The C-OPS backplane is made with several synthetic

components, whereas the BioSCAN frame is made almost

entirely with metal. Nonetheless, both are very strong and

not likely to be damaged under normal use. For example,

Fig. 32 shows a long line of scientists and crew hauling

in the C-OPS backplane against a strong current and the

combined pulling tension of so many people had no negative effect on backplane components.

Fig. 32. A line of scientists and crew hauling in the

C-OPS backplane against a strong current aboard

the R/V Hakuho Maru.

A likely source of damage are impact strikes. For the

C-OPS backplane, waves tossing the backplane against the

deployment platform are a concern, as are waves coming up

and over the BioSCAN frame. Whether or not sustained

damage is repairable requires a case-by-case analysis that

exceeds the objectives of this report. A possible type of

damage to the C-OPS backplane that can be repaired, if all

broken pieces are recovered, is damage to the red flotation,

which can be reassembled with a two-part epoxy (e.g., 3M

Scotch-Weld 1838).

A type of damage on the BioSCAN frame, or any other

metal housing, that should be repaired promptly is if the

50
S.B. Hooker

surface is scratched so deeply bare metal is exposed. In this

case, the area should be thoroughly cleaned with freshwater, the area around the scratch should be masked off with

tape, and the scratch similarly painted.

Exercise 9.4 Why should scratched anodized aluminum

be painted promptly?

9.5 Damaged Optical Apertures

If an aperture shows evidence of contamination, the

following procedures should be followed:

1. Log a description of the contamination and note the

data acquisition events that might have been, or will

be, negatively effected.

2. Rinse the aperture repeatedly with freshwater.

3. If the contamination persists, use more freshwater

and light brushing strokes with a lint-free cloth or

paper towel to try and remove the contamination;

then rinse again with freshwater.

4. If the contamination appears adhered to the aperture, blot isopropyl alcohol against the contaminated

area and use light brushing strokes with a lint-free

cloth or paper towel, followed by a freshwater rinse.

Do not use any chemicals except isopropyl

alcohol, and if compressed air is used, ensure it does not contain oils of any kind (some compressed air contains a hydrocarbon in the propellant).

5. If the aperture remains contaminated, remove the instrument in question, apply the dummy plug(s), and

immerse the sensor in freshwater for a long period of

time (e.g., over night), and repeat steps 1–3.

If an aperture shows evidence of permanent damage

(e.g., a scratch or stained area in the radiance quartz window, a scratch in the irradiance diffuser, etc.), the following

procedures should be followed:

1. Log the observation(s) and note the data acquisition

events that might have been negatively effected.

2. Take a picture of the aperture to record its present

state as the new baseline as to what the aperture

looks like.

3. After returning from the field campaign, request a

return merchandise authorization (RMA) from the

manufacturer, and provide a detailed description of

what occurred in the field, including all cleaning attempts.

Exercise 9.5 Why is a scratched aperture a concern?

9.6 Power or Telemetry Integrity Faults

Troubleshooting a loss of power or telemetry integrity,

because of a fault in instrument performance, inevitably

leads to an investigation of the cables and connectors being

used. If a visual inspection does not identify the problem,

a common tool for further investigations is the voltmeter.

Many voltmeter probes are sufficiently large that they

can splay female sockets, especially if the probes are

firmly inserted into the socket at an awkward angle.

An alternative practice for measuring signals on female

sockets is to plug a spare male pigtail into the female connector and measure the desired signals from the stripped

wires of the male pigtail.

Exercise 9.6 What is another safe technique for measuring signals on female sockets?

Using a secondary smaller probe or stripped

wires with a voltmeter requires caution if the

power must be applied to the cable to troubleshoot a fault

condition, but is safe if the signal measurements are to

determine continuity or obtain resistance readings, which

can be accomplished with the power off.

Troubleshooting a fault condition with a cable involves

confirmation of proper pin-to-socket conductivity for the

power and telemetry conductors (Sect. 4.2,), which means

engineering drawings or wiring diagrams for the cables being used are required. In most cases, these are only available from the manufacturer. Figure 33 presents the BSI

engineering drawing for an interface cable, which is one of

the more common cables used in the field.

Although it may be possible to receive diagrams like

Fig. 33 while at sea, there are frequently size limitations

for attachments sent to research vessels. Consequently, it is

advisable to have all cabling diagrams for the instrumentation before commencing field operations. For convenience,

the other cable diagrams needed for HySEAS instruments

(in addition to Fig. 33) are presented in Appendix F.

9.7 Repairing a Damaged Cable

Repairing a cable that has more than topical abrasion,

i.e., it has been cut or crushed, will likely require splicing to

remove the damaged area. In such a case, the cable is cut

on both sides sufficiently far from the damaged area such

that unequivocally undamaged conductors are present.

The sea cable should not be spliced except close

to the MP/MR end, because no techniques exist to properly splice the kevlar strength member and, thus,

ensure the cable will not part under load.

If the sea cable is spliced at the MP/MR end, only a

small length of cable, or pigtail, containing the MP/MR

connector should be retained. After the splice is completed, brightly colored tape should be affixed to the splice

to make it clear that the cable is compromised at that end.

Staggered splicing is advised because each splice lies

against one or more unspliced neighbors and are protected

by the original insulation of nearby conductors. Consequently, if there is a sharp edge from the splice (e.g., from

solder) it is first covered with heat-shrink tubing, and then

51
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

Fig. 33. An engineering drawing of an interface cable to be used with HySEAS instruments (e.g., the C-OPS or

BioSCAN reference) divided into four parts (bottom to top):

a) The title block (bottom) identifies (right to left) the firm (Biospherical Instruments Inc.) with their contact

information; the name of the work piece MCOM6F+MCDLSF to MCOM6M+MCDLSF TERMINATION, wherein

the terminology used is provided by the manufacturer (MCOM is a micro connector for over molding, 6F is six

female sockets, 6M is six male pins, and MCDLSF is a micro connector delrin locking sleeve with female grooves);

the drawing (paper) size (B), number (006060AC), and previous version (005935AA); finish, dimensions, tolerances, and surface machining (radius of 63 μin); material, drawing author with date, and scaling; plus assembly

notes and a clear requirement to USE ONLY GENUINE SUBCONN CONNECTORS AND LOCKING SLEEVES.

b) The detailed drawing (middle) of the assembled cable showing the connector faces with pin (right) and socket

(left) face views; the presence of the locking sleeves; applied labels to both ends (006060AC/XX, where XX is

the length of the cable in meters between the connector ends); the requirement to leave (a chinese finger) mesh

in place, if present; and to add one 6 in long piece of 5/8 in shrink tube to the socket end, in case a chafe guard

is needed (so it is not shrunk into place).

c) The schematic diagram (top left and center) specifying straight-through pin-to-socket assignments wherein

(right to left) PWR is power, GND is ground (or common), TX+ is transmit positive (voltage), TX- is transmit

negative (voltage), RX+ is receive positive (voltage), RX- is receive negative (voltage), RED is red, BLK is black,

GRN is green, ORG is orange, BLU is blue, YEL is yellow, AWG is American wire gauge†, TW/SH/PR is twisted

shielded pair, and nc indicates no connection.

d) The version control block (top right) shows when the original (REV. A) was established and by whom, and all

subsequent new versions (B and C) with a description of what changed for the new versions.

† A 20 AWG wire has a diameter of 0.0320 in (0.812 mm) and a 24 AWG wire has a diameter of 0.0201 in (0.511 mm), so smaller

AWG wire numbers are larger in cross-sectional area and ampacity. The diameter in inches (millimeters) of a number n AWG

wire is computed as dn = 0.005 dp (dn = 0.127 dp), where the diameter proportionality term dp = 92(36−n)/39.

52
S.B. Hooker

lies against the original insulation of the neighboring conductor(s) rather than another taped or heat-shrunk splice.

A partial representation of a staggered splice is provided diagrammatically in Fig. 34, wherein the heat shrink

tubing that must be put on before the wires are joined is

not shown for clarity. The top shows two wires exposed

with a gray over jacket and stripped back with the bare

conductors crossed. In the bottom, the bare conductors

have been twisted together to create a mechanical bond

of the conductors. They are then individually soldered

and the heat-shrink tubing applied (the heat-shrink tubing must have been placed over the conductors before they

were twisted and soldered).

Fig. 34. A schematic of a staggered splice with

the ground wire and heat-shrink tubing omitted for

clarity: the wires stripped back within the gray over

jacket and the bare conductors laid across one another at angles (top), so they can be twisted together and soldered (bottom).

After the heat-shrink tubing is applied, the spliced conductors can be covered or painted with ScotchKote, making sure to get good coverage over all irregular surfaces.

After 15 min of drying, the area between the gray over

jacket is then built up with self-fusing rubber tape that

is then extended outwards approximately 2 in (5 cm) from

each end as a series of overlapping wraps. Finally, vinyl

electrical tape is applied, again as a series of overlapping

wraps to cover the rubber tape and provide an abrasiveresistant layer for protection.

Staggered splicing creates a slightly enlarged diameter

over a longer span of the cable. Wherever two wires are soldered together, flexibility is compromised. Consequently,

reinforcing ribs cut from cable ties can be added to provide strain relief over the extent of the splice, so the cable

cannot be bent so much as to break the soldered joint.

Exercise 9.7 What is a common mistake when applying

heat-shrink tubing that must be avoided for splices that

will be submerged to depth?

10. SHIPPING

Sensitive equipment, like optical instruments, should be

shipped in rigid-shell, reusable containers that are foam

lined, preferably with custom inserts to keep the instruments from moving. Plastic boxes that cannot corrode

with stainless steel hardware are preferred, because of the

frequency of deployments in the marine environment. The

hardware should have multiple closing hasps that securely

latch the lid to the bottom of the container.

The density and thickness of the foam lining should be

selected based on the weight and fragility of the item(s) being packed. For general purposes, a 1 in (2.5 cm) rigid-foam

lining is appropriate. If items requiring a less dense material are included, they should be over wrapped with the

proper insulation. Another consideration is that fieldwork

involves exposure to inclement weather during mobilization and demobilization, so containers and their contents

can be wetted. Consequently, closed-cell foam lining with

a sealed outer surface that can be wiped dry is preferred,

because it prevents the retention of water, which could be

salty.

Small pieces of insulation (e.g., so-called styrofoam

peanuts) should not be used, because packing and

unpacking on an open deck frequently means exposure to

windy conditions that can blow the material into the harbor or out to sea, which is forbidden (Sect. 12.5).

A critical aspect of successful packing is to ensure no

voids allow the packed contents to move (Fig. 35). In some

cases, this means filling voids with an insulating material,

e.g., bubble wrap. An overlooked void is the top of the box.

When closing a box that is presumed full, there should be

mild resistance to the lid being closed; if not, insulating

material should be used to fill the void.

Fig. 35. An improperly packed instrument sent

to the manufacturer wherein loose packing material

permitted the instrument to tumble inside the container and completely flatten a piece of bubble wrap

insulating material (courtesy J. Morrow).

For long-distance and remote shipments, the most sensitive components should be packed using a box-within-abox approach. For example the optical containers should

53
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

be packed inside a second container to further protect

them. In some cases, this might not be feasible, because of

restrictions in container size and weight for unique, usually

remote locations. For example, sometimes the final cargo

flight might be on a small propeller plane or a helicopter

with small cargo hatches.

Another important aspect of successful packing is to ensure the over wrapped insulating material is held in place.

For heavy and fragile items, like glassware, this might

mean taping the insulating material to keep the heavier

item from working its way out of the insulating material

due to vibration. If glassware shakes free of the insulating material, it can come into contact with another hard

object, like a second piece of glassware, and break.

It is advantageous to label the general contents of each

box to facilitate mobilization, particularly if the time to do

so will be short. It is also useful to have one box designated

as being the first to be opened, so unpacking tools are

immediately available. For example, if wooden crates are

part of the shipment, it is advantageous to be able to access

a cordless hex-drive impact driver to remove screws from

the wooden boxes. Such a box should include large pliers

or diagonal cutters for removing any banding applied to

the containers (a very useful safety precaution).

Exercise 10.0 How does labeling the contents of boxes

aid demobilization?

To facilitate return shipping, it is convenient to use

plastic self-adhesive envelopes to hold the shipping labels.

The label itself is a folded piece of paper with the address

for going out to the field on one side and the return address

on the other. To return the shipment, all that is required

is the plastic envelope is opened, the piece of paper flipped

over, and the plastic envelope resealed with clear tape.

11. STORAGE

There are two kinds of storage of interest here: a)

short-term storage during a field campaign, and b) longterm storage between campaigns. During a campaign some

equipment is stowed daily to keep it safe, e.g., the C-OPS

backplane and sea cable. This equipment is used each day

under varying conditions, so it is not practical to try and

keep it dry between use. The objective should be to always

rinse the equipment with freshwater after use and dry the

optical apertures before the caps are put on. Under these

circumstances, the equipment can be stowed wet.

The cable bucket is open to the atmosphere and if holes

are drilled into the bottom it will drain, which means the

cable will also mostly dry between deployments. The same

is true for the profiler if it is stored in an open basket. If

a container with a lid is used, which has the advantage

of providing sun shielding, the lid should be kept slightly

open so the contents can mostly dry between deployments.

Long-term storage presents opportunities for problems,

because the containers are typically sealed shut.

Do not store equipment that is wet inside a

sealed container for an appreciable amount of

time—especially the optical instruments—because seawater can stain the radiance quartz window, significant corrosion can occur on metal parts, and the aluminum housing

can pit.

All equipment and the container plus insulating material used for holding and protecting the equipment must

be completely dry for long-term storage. Because boxes

that are stored for a long time can get moved around, the

contents should be packed from the perspective as if they

were being shipped (Sect. 10). Any solar shielding material, e.g., a white sheet, should be cleaned (laundered) and

dried before being packed.

Cabling, which by definition gets wet, should be cleaned

and air dried before it is stored. If the outer jacket is rough,

it should be soaked in freshwater for approximately 1 hr to

dissolve the salts in the over braid, and then cleaned with

a mild grease-removing soap; if the outer jacket is smooth,

it should be cleaned with a cable cleaner and degreaser

or a mild grease-removing soap. After cleaning, the cable should be coiled into a container, a large diameter line

passed through the center, and the coil hung to dry.

The C-OPS backplane and the BioSCAN frame should

be rinsed with freshwater, cleaned with a mild greaseremoving soap, and then rinsed repeatedly with freshwater.

The backplane and frame should be dried on both sides. It

is important to open up the C-OPS hydrobaric buoyancy

chamber and make sure it and the contents are cleaned

and then fully dry before reassembly. For the BioSCAN

frame, the collet and azimuthal band components should

be rinsed with freshwater several times.

The solar reference, BioGPS, and BioSHADE should

be cleaned and rinsed as a unit. It is important to use

freshwater to clean out the pivot points for the shadow

band with running freshwater and to force freshwater into

all areas where salt can accumulate. After repeated freshwater rinses, the unit should be allowed to air dry.

If used, the BioMAST should be cleaned with a mild

grease-removing soap and repeatedly rinsed with freshwater. It is important to force water into all the gear and

cable pathways to dissolve and remove any salt accumulation. The stainless steel winch should be operated back

and forth with freshwater running over the moving parts.

All components must be allowed to dry before the mast is

packed into its shipping crate.

During inclement weather, it may be necessary to take

equipment indoors to air dry. If this occurs during demobilization on a ship, it will strain the schedule, so the

cleaning and drying tasks might need to be started earlier

than initially planned.

Exercise 11.0 What other activity should be synchronized with long-term storage?

54
S.B. Hooker

12. SMALL-BOAT OPERATIONS

Small-boat operations can be undertaken from a large

vessel by simply launching a smaller one (Fig. 36). Frequently, and just as effectively, small-boat operations are

conducted by trailering a small boat to a sampling site.

This approach can add new dimensions to data acquisition in near-coastal shallow waters. Small-boat operations

are particularly well suited for field campaigns to lakes,

reservoirs, rivers, bays, and estuaries.

Fig. 36. The small boat or barge launched from the

CCGS Amundsen wherein the smaller vessel could

drift into sea ice areas with minimum mixing of the

water mass to be sampled.

Trailering provides flexible exploration of shallow-water

ecosystems, because a trailer allows economical boat storage between expeditions to a diversity of sites that might

not otherwise be connected by waterways (as opposed to

renting a boat at each site, which might not be possible).

This approach provides the advantage that the boat need

only be outfitted once, which can be a big time saver, particularly in comparison to establishing a mount for the

solar reference on a variety of vessels.

The operator is responsible for understanding the restrictions, regulations, and safety precautions for using a

small boat for scientific research. A paramount concern

is safety, which is a function of properly preparing for the

known aspects of a field campaign and then acting responsibly to unknowns, e.g., changes in weather.

High winds can lead to a small craft advisory,

whereupon, as a safety precaution, boat ramps

should not be used to launch a boat and are frequently

closed, although they can be used to retrieve a boat.

In the U.S., a small craft advisory is issued by the National Weather Service when winds have reached, or are

expected to reach within 12 hr, a speed of nearly gale force.

The wind speed warning encompasses the combined ranges

of forces 6 and 7 on the Beaufort scale, which is 22–33 kts

(about 11–17 m s−1) and seas 10 ft (3 m) or greater. For

the purposes of the advisory, a small craft is typically a

vessel with an overall length less than 65 ft (about 20 m).

Inexperienced mariners, especially those operating small

craft, should avoid navigating in these conditions.

For the shallow estuaries, rivers, and lakes anticipated

here for small-boat operations, the remainder of the material presented is based on a more restrictive definition of a

small boat and its intended operations as follows:

A small-boat operation uses a vessel less than 23 ft

(7 m) long with an outboard motor and portable gas

tank that is manned by adults during good visibility

and daylight hours in navigable U.S. waters.

For determining the length of the boat, the distance is measured from end to end, over the deck, excluding sheer. This

means a straight line measurement of the overall length

from the foremost part of the vessel to the aftermost part of

the vessel, measured parallel to the centerline (bowsprits,

bumpkins, rudders, outboard motors, brackets, attached

diving platforms, and similar fittings or attachments are

not included in the measurement).

The requirements to safely operate or handle a small

boat are significant. Even with the more restrictive definition of a small boat given above, the amount of detail

needed to convey all this topic entails is beyond the scope

of this document. Consequently, only a few of the most

important topics are provided as a means to motivate the

practitioner to seek the proper training and information†.

In the U.S., a boat is required to be registered in the

state of principal operation. The registration must be

available for inspection at all times when the vessel is

in use and the boat registration numbers must be displayed on the forward half of the vessel. The numbers

must be painted or permanently attached with state validation stickers, when required, affixed within six inches of

the registration number (state requirements may vary).

Exercise 12.0 Why are the limits and cautions of a

small craft advisory useful to understand even on a large

deployment platform?

12.1 Trailering

The trailer is an important part of small-boat operations and the National Marine Manufacturers Association (NMMA) has a trailer certification program to assist

boat trailer manufacturers in the U.S. comply with established industry standards and federal safety regulations.

This program benefits the public by ensuring a trailer with

NMMA certification that is purchased or rented is compliant in regards to identification plates, capacity ratings,

couplings, safety chains, lighting, winches, brakes, registration, and conspicuity. A manufacturer participating in the

NMMA program certifies all model years are fitted with

factory-supplied equipment, and inspectors visit the manufacturer and inspect each trailer model for compliance to

all certification standards.

† In the U.S., to find a boating course near the practitioner’s

location, visit www.boatus.com/foundation or contact a local Coast Guard auxiliary.

55
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

There are several elements that need to be considered

to trailer a boat. The first is the towing capacity of the

vehicle to be used. This information is in the vehicle

owner’s manual. Sedans are generally not suitable for towing. Most standard pick-ups, large sports utility vehicles

(SUVs), and small 10–12 ft (3.0–3.7 m) box trucks, however, can trailer boats that are 25 ft (8 m) in length or less.

If the vehicle has the requisite towing capacity, there

are two types of weight that are important to towing: the

tongue weight and the towing weight. The tongue weight

sets the downward weight limit on the trailer tongue, and

the towing weight sets the horizontal limit. The tongue

weight is always a small fraction (about 10%) of the total

tow weight and requires adherence to sensible balancing of

the boat on the trailer, as well as paying attention to the

height of the tow ball with respect to the frame height of

the trailer. The trailer is also designed to be towed with a

tow ball of a specific size, e.g., 1 7/8 in.

Do not attempt to tow a trailer with a vehicle

that does not have the towing capacity for the

weight of the trailer being towed, as well as the necessary

ratings in terms of the trailer tongue weight and towing

weight, the size of the tow ball, and the height of the tow

ball above the ground.

In general, as the weight, length, and beam of a boat

increase, the difficulty in launching and retrieving it increases. For small boats as defined here—less than 23 ft

(7 m) in length—they may all be safely handled by one

person in the vehicle and one person at the ramp. From

the perspective of conducting sampling on the water, three

people are preferred: one to handle the boat, one to deploy

and recover the instrumentation, and one to operate the

data acquisition software.

Trailering laws vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction

and often are based on weight and beam. The regulations

that apply to the local jurisdiction where the fieldwork is

occurring should be checked prior to commencing smallboat operations.

Exercise 12.1 If the tow vehicle meets all trailering

requirements except the tow ball is not at the correct

height above the ground, what is a possible solution?

12.2 Towing

Before attempting to tow a particular trailer and boat,

the towing capacity of the intended vehicle and the towing

hitch must be compared to the weight of the boat and

trailer. The boat owner’s manual lists the dry weight of the

boat, which is the weight of the boat, without fuel, gear,

and any modifications made after manufacturing. When

assessing the towing capacity of the vehicle and hitch, it is

advisable to add several hundred pounds to the dry weight

of the boat to account for the extra equipment that will

be added for the field campaign. The weight of the trailer

is usually provided on a specification plate affixed to the

front of the trailer near, or as part of, the tongue.

The hitch on the tow vehicle must be rated for the

anticipated weight of the fully loaded trailer. Hitch classes

vary from Class I with a capacity of up to 2,000 lb gross

trailer weight and 200 lb tongue weight, to Class V with

a capacity greater than 10,000 lb gross trailer weight and

1,000–1,200 lb tongue weight. The hitch attaches directly

to the tow vehicle and provides the physical connection

between the tow vehicle and the trailer.

For the operations considered here, hitch installations

are usually permanent and involve two types of hitches:

1. A fixed tongue hitch has a flat, non-removable drawbar; and

2. A receiver-style hitch has a square receptacle (usually 1 1/4 or 2 in) wherein a hitch bar is slid into the

receptacle.

The hitch bar is designed to to hold a hitch (or trailer) ball,

as well as accessories. Recreational and light commercial

hitch balls come in a variety of sizes, with 1 7/8 and 2 in

being the most common.

The trailer coupler is the forward-most part of the

trailer tongue. The coupler attaches to the hitch ball to secure the trailer on the tow vehicle, and articulates around

the hitch ball during towing. The size stamped on the ball

must be the same size stamped on the coupler. If the ball

is too small, a bump in the road could cause the coupler

to lift off the hitch.

A release mechanism on top of the coupler facilitates

connecting the coupler to the hitch ball. Pull up on the

coupler latch to fit the coupler onto the ball and then release the latch. Lift up on the trailer tongue to verify the

coupler is properly engaged and does not lift off the ball.

There is also a hole in the mechanism to accept a safety

pin, so the release mechanism cannot accidentally engage.

The hitch also contains receptacles for safety chains.

The chains are attached to the trailer tongue and have

hooks on their free ends to attach to the hitch (Fig. 37).

The chains keep the trailer connected to the tow vehicle

should the coupler or hitch ball detach from the tow vehicle.

Fig. 37. A partial view of a trailer attached to

a hitch, showing the coupler attached to the hitch

ball on a receiver with crisscrossed safety chains attached below (http://www.boat-ed.com).

56
S.B. Hooker

Once a suitable vehicle-boat-trailer combination is selected, the functionality of the trailer

with the boat attached should be checked before towing as

follows:

1. The wiring harness attaches securely (perhaps with

adapter) and all trailer lights work as intended;

2. The coupler functions and has the safety pin;

3. If a receiver is being used, the safety pin is present;

4. The hand winch securing the boat to the trailer works

in both directions;

5. The front wheel winch works and the wheel rotates

(this functionality can be invaluable during parking);

6. Both safety chains are crisscrossed under the coupler

and in place;

7. The vessel is secured to the trailer with several tiedown straps to prevent shifting (do not trust the bow

hand winch alone to hold the vessel onto the trailer);

8. The tow vehicle and trailer tires are properly inflated;

9. The lug nuts (or bolts) on the wheels of both the

towing vehicle and the trailer are properly tightened;

10. The spare tire for both the vehicle and the trailer are

in good shape and properly inflated; and

11. No safety equipment has visible signs of wear.

Replace any worn or questionable equipment

as necessary and as soon as possible.

A needed awareness for steering a vehicle while towing

a trailer is the increased length, which means the vehicletrailer combination requires more space to turn. In the

U.S., this means righthand turns must be made wider than

normal to prevent the trailer from hitting or bumping over

the curb. Furthermore, if the tongue weight is too light,

the trailer will tend to swing from side-to-side (or fishtail).

If the tongue weight is too heavy, the rear wheels of the tow

vehicle will be weighted down and make steering difficult.

Backing a vehicle with trailer can be challenging, because there is limited visibility around the boat and the

trailer will move opposite the direction the tow vehicle is

steered. For example, if the steering wheel is turned to the

right (CW) while backing up, the trailer will move to the

left side of the tow vehicle (and vice versa).

Many hotels do not have parking areas to accommodate

a vehicle-trailer combination, so the trailer might need to

be detached from the tow vehicle and parked separately by

manually moving the trailer into the parking space using

the front wheel winch. If the trailer is removed for parking,

remember to use the appropriate locks and if a receiverstyle hitch is used to disconnect the receiver and stow it in

the tow vehicle with the safety pin.

Exercise 12.2 If the vehicle mirrors are used for backing up a trailer, what precaution should be followed in

regards to steering the vehicle?

For trailer security, a wheel lock and a coupler lock are

advisable. A wheel lock is usually a hardened steel cable

with a lock. With the lock open, a free end is fed through

the trailer wheel spokes and through the trailer frame; once

the lock is engaged, the trailer cannot be moved. A coupler

lock is a special lock designed to a) fit through the coupler

latching mechanism when the trailer is hitched to the tow

vehicle, or b) attach to the ball receptacle when the trailer

is not hitched to the tow vehicle.

12.3 Equipping

Safety equipment is arguably the most important equipment loaded on the boat, some of which must be Coast

Guard approved. The term “Coast Guard approved” is

applied only to those items required by regulation to be in

compliance with U.S. Coast Guard specifications.

For recreational boats of the type commonly

used for the defined small-boat operations considered here, i.e., vessels less than 23 ft (7 m) in length with

an outboard motor and portable gas tank that are operated

and manned by adults during good visibility and daylight

hours in navigable U.S. waters, the items of equipment

that must be Coast Guard approved are as follows:

1. Personal flotation devices (PFDs);

2. Fire extinguishers; and

3. Visual distress signals (VDSs).

In addition, the following equipment that might be carried

aboard is as follows:

4. Sound producing devices;

5. Navigation lights; and

6. Recommended items.

Exercise 12.3 What is one of the difficulties of using

safety equipment on a small boat?

12.3.1 PFDs

Aside from the capabilities of the boat operator, PFDs

are usually the most important safety equipment on a boat,

because they provide protection against drowning—a universal concern when working on a vessel.

To be effective, PFDs must be in serviceable

condition, and correctly sized for the user.

There are six types of Coast Guard approved PFDs.

Type I, II, and III PFDs are designed to maintain a person

in an orientation that is not face down. Type I PFDs are

the most capable, but also the most cumbersome. Type II

and III PFDs are intended for use in inland waters where

there is a reasonable chance of a speedy rescue. Type IV

are throwable devices and Type V are intended for special

use activities, e.g., exposure suits and work vests. The

inflatable recreational PFD is a sixth type and is more

comfortable to wear, especially while working.

57
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

Following the axiom that the best PFD is the one that

is worn, the inflatable PFD might seem a perfect choice.

Unlike other types of PFDs, however, inflatables require

the user to pay attention to the condition of the firing device (e.g., a CO2 cylinder). Inflatable PFDs must have a

full cylinder and all status indicators confirming functionality to satisfy the requirement for carrying this PFD.

Wearable PFDs must be readily accessible and available for immediate donning in an emergency (vessel sinking, fire on board, etc.) PFDs should not be stowed in

plastic bags, in locked or closed compartments, or have

other gear stowed on top of them. Throwable devices must

be immediately available for use. Although not required,

boaters should wear a PFD when a vessel is underway.

Exercise 12.3.1 What common accident might render

an inflatable PFD ineffective for the person wearing it?

12.3.2 Fire Extinguishers

Fire extinguishers are only required on certain boats,

but all must be specifically marked “Marine Type U.S.

Coast Guard Approved.” Extinguishers are classified by

a letter and a roman numeral. The letter indicates the

type of fire the unit is designed to extinguish. Type B, for

example, is designed to extinguish flammable liquids, e.g.,

gasoline, oil, and grease. The roman numeral indicates the

relative size of the extinguisher (minimum extinguishing

agent weight). The extinguishing agents include CO2, dry

chemical, halon, or aqueous film-forming foam (AFFF).

Exercise 12.3.2 Although designed for safety purposes,

what are some hazards posed by fire extinguishers?

12.3.3 VDSs

All vessels 16 ft (4.9 m) and over in length must be

equipped with Coast Guard approved VDSs. Between the

hours of sunset and sunrise all boats must carry on board a

means of distress signaling suitable for night use. Floating

and handheld orange smoke or an orange flag are suitable

for day use. A handheld flare, pistol or handheld parachute

red flare, and aerial pyrotechnic red flare can be used day

or night. An electric distress light can only be used at

night. The required number of VDSs aboard is three, except for the orange flag and electric distress light for which

only one is required.

Each VDS must be in serviceable condition and

the date of small-boat operations must be no

more than 42 mos from the date of manufacture.

After 42 mos the VDSs are considered expired, do not

meet requirements, and must be replaced.

Exercise 12.3.3 What is a sensible use for an expired

VDS?

12.3.4 Sound Signaling Devices

Sound signals are required to be made under certain

circumstances. Meeting, crossing, and overtaking maneuvers, as well as periods of reduced visibility, all require

sound signals to be used (Sect. 12.8.2).

All vessels under 39.4 ft (12 m) in length are

required to carry an efficient sound signaling

device (e.g., whistle, horn or other means), and to use that

device to signal their intentions, as well as their position

in periods of reduced visibility.

Exercise 12.3.4 For small-boat operations, what commonly available sound signaling device can be used?

12.3.5 Navigation Lights

Vessels 16 ft (4.9 m) or more in length are required to

display navigation lights between sunset and sunrise, as

well as during other periods of reduced visibility, e.g., fog,

rain, and haze. The details for the lighting requirements

(e.g., the arcs of visibility and their location on the vessel)

are not presented, because the defined small-boat operations are for good visibility and only during daylight hours.

Furthermore, vessels under 23 ft (7 m) are not required to

display anchor lights or day shapes unless anchored in or

near a narrow channel, fairway, or anchorage, or where

other vessels normally navigate. This restriction is rather

easily avoided for the type of sampling envisioned for the

small-boat operations described in this document.

Exercise 12.3.5 What are the operating requirements

for a small boat having installed lights that are not required?

12.3.6 Recommended Items

There are a number of useful or recommended items

that boat operators should carry regardless of explicit requirements for equipping a vessel.

12.3.6.1 Marine VHF Radio Most recreational

vessels under 65 ft (19.8 m) in length do not have to carry a

marine VHF radio. Cellular phone coverage is available in

many coastal areas, but the use of a cellular phone should

not be considered a substitute for VHF marine band radios

for emergency purposes.

Cellular phones do not allow for direct communications with the rescue craft, so it is always recommended to have a marine VHF radio on board.

Operators of vessels that carry a marine radio must follow the applicable FCC rules. The FCC does not require

an operator of a recreational vessel with VHF radio (with

or without digital selective calling capability) to have a license to operate the equipment. Operators must, however,

follow the procedures and courtesies that are required of

licensed operators specified in FCC rules (Sect. 7.1).

58
S.B. Hooker

12.3.6.2 Dewatering Device The equipment recommendation for removing or bailing water from a boat is

based on common sense. This may be the only means to

take care of an emergency situation.

All boats should carry at least one effective manual

dewatering device, i.e., a hand-operated plunger, a

bucket, or a large plastic bottle with the bottom cut off to

serve as a water scoop.

This recommendation is in addition to any installed

equipment the boat may have on board.

12.3.6.3 Anchor An anchor is useful, because an

anchored vessel is a stable platform. More importantly, it

can be used to keep the boat from running aground or into

danger. A 3–6 ft (1–2 m) length of galvanized chain should

be attached to the anchor. The chain resists abrasion better than a fiber line, and helps to hold the anchor flat on

the bottom so it can dig in better. A suitable length of nylon anchor line should be attached to the end of the chain.

Nylon line resists the strain from wind or wave action better.

12.3.6.4 Fire Extinguisher Boats less than 26 ft

(7.9 m) long with outboard motors, portable fuel cans, and

not carrying passengers for hire, need not carry portable

fire extinguishers if the construction of the boat will not

permit the entrapment of explosive or flammable gases or

vapors.

For small-boat operations, however, it is nonetheless advisable to carry one B-I fire extinguisher using CO2 (4 lb), dry chemical (2 lb), halon (2.5 lb), or AFFF

(1.75 gal) as the extinguishing agent.

The fire extinguisher should be checked to ensure it

is not damaged and the pressure gauge or indicator is in

the operable range (note CO2 extinguishers do not have

gauges). Mount or stow the fire extinguisher such that it

is readily accessible.

12.3.6.5 First Aid To assist in retrieving a person

in the water, extra PFDs are recommended as well as a life

ring (or horseshoe) with a polypropylene line tied to it. A

line attached to the PFD or ring thrown to the person in

the water will provide a means for pulling them back to the

vessel. A gaff hook should not be used to retrieve a person

in the water. The boat operator should always make sure

the propeller is stopped when assisting a person back on

board near the stern.

For small-boat operations, a first aid kit in a

waterproof container is recommended.

12.3.6.6 Batteries Although, a laptop computer has

a battery, as does the deck box for the optical equipment

discussed here, it is recommended the vessel be equipped

with a second battery to ensure scientific operations do not

place an undue strain on the boat’s original battery (Sect.

12.4), which is primarily used to start the engine.

Batteries must be secured and terminals covered to prevent accidental arcing, which is a

significant burn hazard to personnel and can start a fire.

12.3.6.7 Fuel Tank A portable fuel tank (7 gal capacity or less) must be constructed of unbreakable material

and be free of corrosion and leaks. All vents must be capable of being closed.

The fuel tank must be properly secured and

have a vapor-tight, leak-proof cap.

12.3.6.8 Engine On vessels less than 20 ft (6.1 m)

long and others with capacity plates, the small-boat operator should verify that the engine horsepower is equal to

or less than that stated on the capacity plate. If installed,

a kill-switch mechanism must be in proper working order.

Exercise 12.3.6 What is a kill-switch mechanism?

12.3.6.9 Capacity If there is no capacity plate on a

single hull boat under 20 ft (6.1 m) in length, the carrying

capacity should be computed.

The maximum number of persons safely carried in

calm weather can be determined by multiplying the

length of the vessel by the width (both in feet), dividing

by 15, and ignoring any fraction.

12.3.6.10 Waste There are several regulations governing the disposal of waste and garbage from a vessel

(Sect. 12.5), so it is advisable to make sure a sealable container is brought aboard for all types of trash.

12.3.6.11 Cold Waters Sudden immersion of a person in cold water can induce rapid, uncontrolled breathing,

cardiac arrest, and other physical body conditions that can

result in drowning. An immersion suit delays the onset

of hypothermia—the abnormal lowering of internal body

temperature. Immersion suits should be stored and maintained according to the manufacture’s instructions, while

being readily accessible on board the vessel. Prior to leaving the dock, all participants should be familiarized with

the proper donning of an immersion suit.

For small-boat operations in cold waters, i.e.,

ambient water temperatures of 59◦F (15◦C) or

less, an immersion suit should be carried for every person

on board.

If a person is forced to enter the water without an immersion suite, they should do the following (where possible): a) button up all clothing; b) cover the head; c) enter

the water slowly, to give the body time to adjust; d) keep

the head out of the water; and e) raise both knees with legs

tucked and cross the arms across the chest to minimize the

exposed surface area of the body.

If the boat capsizes it will likely float on or just below

the surface. The effects of hypothermia can be reduced

by getting as much of the body as possible out of the water. Most small boats built since 1978 are designed to stay

afloat even if filled with water.

59
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

It may be possible to revive a drowning victim who has been under water a considerable

amount of time and shows no signs of life by administering cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) as quickly as

possible. Conventional CPR—that is, CPR with a combination of breaths and compressions—is recommended

for all infants and children, for adult victims found unconscious and not breathing normally, and for any victims of drowning or collapse due to breathing problems

(http://www.heart.org or http://www.redcross.org).

12.3.6.12 Offshore Operations For offshore operations, carry additional equipment beyond the minimum

federal requirements, ensure all persons wear a PFD, and

adhere to all the recommendations given above.

Offshore operations should also include an Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacon (EPIRB),

which provides a means to accurately determine the location of a vessel in distress.

An EPIRB is registered when purchased with the vessel

name, owner, and point-of-contact information. Once activated, it provides a signal to aid rescue operations (some

EPIRB units provide a GPS position, but that is not the

primary means of position determination).

12.4 Lead Acid Batteries

Flooded-electrolyte lead acid batteries have been available for a long time (before 1860) and are inexpensive and

reliable for many applications. They have major deficiencies compared to AGM or gel batteries, however. For example, the escape of hydrogen and oxygen during charging

(visually perceptible as bubbles in the individual cells) is a

serious safety hazard if the gases are not properly vented.

A lead acid battery can produce an explosive

mixture of hydrogen and oxygen, and contains

a sulphuric acid electrolyte that can cause severe burns to

body tissue.

Furthermore, electrolyte stratification, wherein the concentration of acid becomes higher at the bottom of the cell

and lower at the top, occurs as the battery is cycled during

normal use. The stratification leads to reduced capacity

and shortened battery life.

Gel batteries have been available since 1970. They use

a combination of silica gel and dilute sulfuric acid in a viscous suspension as an electrolyte. Although a gel battery

cannot be spilled when new, the electrolyte is difficult to

keep homogeneous and the mixture can separate, thereby

creating a flooded battery. Handling, vibration, and high

temperatures contribute to separation, and the process occurs gradually even for normal temperatures and use. Gel

batteries also require tight controls on the charging voltage

and the inrush current or battery life suffers.

If the external terminals are short circuited, a

lead acid battery is capable of delivering a high

current that can cause severe burns and pose a potential

fire hazard.

AGM batteries, e.g., those manufactured by Concorde

Battery Corp. (West Covina, Califronia) use a glass fiber

mat to hold the liquid electrolyte in direct contact with

the plates (Fig. 38). The electrolyte remains immobilized

even during use in high-vibration environments. AGM batteries require less space between plates, which provides a

lower internal resistance, greater charging efficiency, and

improved performance on discharge, especially at low temperatures.

Fig. 38. A cutaway view of a Concorde AGM battery, in this example, one of the Lifeline models

(http://www.lifelinebatteries.com) emphasizing the following design features: a) copper alloy

terminals; b) lifting handle; c) sealed, pressure relief safety valve; d) cover-to-container seal; e) intercell connections; f) thick plates and high density oxide paste materials; g) AGM separator; h)

polyethylene envelope; and i) reinforced copolymer

polypropylene container and cover.

AGM batteries offer superior performance for smallboat operations for the following additional reasons: a)

cannot be spilled in all orientations; b) never needs water added; c) the discharge rate is 3–5 times less than a

flooded battery; d) negligible hydrogen gas emissions unless severely overcharged; e) no damage when frozen; and

f) no electrolyte stratification, which prolongs battery life.

If a lead acid battery is at high ambient temperature (e.g., due to environmental factors or

the charging voltage is set too high), battery temperature

can increase rapidly, thereby producing extreme overheating of the battery, and the battery can melt, catch on fire,

or even explode.

60
S.B. Hooker

To overcome the inherent risk of a lead acid battery,

the following precautions should be followed when one (or

more) is used for small-boat operations:

• Remove all metallic items (e.g., rings and watches),

wear insulating gloves, eye and face protection, and

use insulated tools when installing or servicing;

• Avoid contact with the electrolyte and in the event

of an accident, flush with water and seek medical

treatment immediately;

• Install in an adequately vented enclosure to prevent

sun loading and accidental placement of metal objects across the terminals;

• Do not install near heat sources and provide adequate

air circulation around the battery to prevent heat

build up;

• Charge a battery in accordance with the instructions

provided by the manufacturer;

• Keep all sparks, flames, and cigarettes away from

batteries;

• Connect the cables tightly to the terminals to avoid

sparks; and

• Never remove or damage built-in vent valves.

Exercise 12.4 If a separate 12 VDC AGM battery is

brought for the optical sampling, should it be kept separate or wired to the starting battery for the engine?

12.5 Pollution and Trash

There are several applicable laws that govern pollution

and trash while boating in U.S. navigable waters, as follows:

The Refuse Act of 1899 prohibits throwing, discharging, or depositing any refuse matter of any kind (including trash, garbage, oil, and other liquid pollutants) into U.S. waters.

The Water Pollution Control Act prohibits the discharge of oil or hazardous substances which may be

harmful into U.S. navigable waters and requires all

vessels with propulsion machinery to have a capacity

to retain oil mixtures on board. A fixed or portable

means to discharge oily waste to a reception facility is

required. A bucket or bailer is suitable as a portable

means of discharging oily waste on recreational vessels.

The Act to Prevent Pollution from Ships places limitations on the discharge of garbage from vessels. It is

illegal to dump plastic trash anywhere in the ocean

or U.S. navigable waters. It is also illegal to discharge

garbage in U.S. navigable waters, including the Great

Lakes.

Given these regulations and the fact that small boats necessarily operate in windy conditions (usually) without an

enclosed cabin to keep trash from being blown overboard,

it is prudent to make sure a sealable container is available

for all types of trash.

Exercise 12.5 How can the requirement for proper trash

disposal aboard a vessel be used to advantage?

12.6 Instrument Mounts

For C-OPS deployments, the only instrument requiring

a physical mount is the solar reference. Some small boats

have a small console or radar mount that can be used to affix a pipe mast for the solar reference. In other cases, there

may be opportunities to mount the mast to the transom,

but some work prior to the field campaign might need to be

scheduled. If none of these opportunities are available the

so-called bar stool method is recommended. This method

is particularly advantageous for soft-bottomed boats, e.g.,

inflatables.

The bar stool is fashioned from 3/4 in (1.9 cm) solid

wood cut into a 1.5 ft (0.5 m) diameter circle, wherein a 1 in

(2.5 cm) 316 SS pipe flange is attached to the middle of one

side. The opposite side is covered with 1/2 in (1.3 cm) rigid

foam (it is convenient to use a spray-on adhesive to attach

the foam). The wood and foam are then covered with a

thick vinyl material that is cut larger than the wood, e.g.,

about 30 in (76 cm) square. The vinyl is stretched over the

wood and rigid foam and then stapled to the underside of

the wood on the same side as the pipe flange. Once the

staples are installed, excess vinyl is removed.

A 4 ft (1.2 m) long 1 in 316 SS pipe is then attached to

the pipe flange, and a 1 in 316 SS coupler with a 1 ft (0.3 m)

316 SS pipe nipple is attached to the 4 ft (1.2 m) long pipe.

The foam and vinyl padded side of the bar stool is placed

facing the deck in the middle of the small boat. Four guy

lines are attached to the pipe above the coupler (thereby

preventing slippage). The four guy lines are then affixed to

the sides of the vessel and tightened while checking that the

vertical pipe remains approximately plumb. The reference

mount is screwed onto the 1 ft (0.3 m) pipe nipple. The

installation of a bar-stool mount is presented in Fig. 39.

Fig. 39. The installation of a bar-stool mount

for the C-OPS solar reference with BioSHADE and

BioGPS on a small inflatable launched from the

R/V SRV-X into the Blackwater National Wildlife

Refuge.

As soon as everyone is in the boat and seated at their

sampling positions, the solar reference should be checked

61
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

for plumb and adjusted as necessary. As long as the persons conducting the sampling do not substantially change

their positions, the solar reference data will be unbiased.

Exercise 12.6 What is a disadvantage of the bar-stool

surface reference mounting system?

12.7 Launching and Loading

Small boats are typically launched at a boat ramp (or

slipway) made of concrete. To facilitate launching, the vessel should be launched unloaded to the extent practicable.

Most boat ramps have an adjoining parking facility with

pull-through parking so the towing vehicle and the boat

trailer can be parked conveniently nearby.

Exercise 12.7 Why is it important to launch a boat as

unloaded as practical?

There are restrictions on launching and retrieving a

small boat at most boat ramps. The simplest restriction

is set by access permissions. In most cases, boat ramps

are public and the public may use the facility by paying a

fee. Usually the fee is paid by filling out vehicle and user

information on an envelope, placing the fee in the envelope, and then depositing the envelope in a tamper-proof

container. Another common restriction on boat ramp use

is the time of day, i.e., the ramp and parking area might

have hours of operation. Some boat ramps are in parks

that are frequently locked after sunset.

The height of the tide can restrict the usability of the

ramp unless the ramp continues well below the low-water

level. Many lakes, which frequently have boat ramps, are

artificial and may function as reservoirs. It is common for

the water level to be controlled for agricultural, industrial,

or municipal purposes, which means the water level may

change significantly over a relatively short part of a season.

Proper planning of small-boat operations includes

research as to the anticipated water level at the

boat ramp during launch and retrieval.

A recurring limitation on small-boat launching is the

use of mitigation strategies to prevent the introduction of

invasive species (e.g., the zebra mussel) into an uncontaminated ecosystem. This is particularly true in lakes used

as freshwater reservoirs, wherein the invasive species may

clog water distribution equipment. It is not unusual that

the only boats permitted in such reservoirs are the ones

already approved to be in the lake. For particularly important reservoirs, boat launching might be forbidden as a

last resort to control the introduction of invasive species.

It is also possible that gasoline engines will be prohibited in

some reservoirs and only electric so-called trolling motors

can be used for propulsion.

In some areas, small boats must undergo a rigorous inspection to ensure there is no evidence of water present

anywhere in or on the vessel that might transport an invasive species. Such dry requirements forbid the launching

of a boat that is wet from rain or a wash down, because

the water source cannot be determined. It is also possible

that the launching of vessels registered in areas where the

invasive species is already established will not be allowed.

Proper planning of small-boat operations in lakes

and reservoirs must include research as to the existing regulations to control the introduction of invasive

species.

Prior to launching the boat, make sure the drain plug

is in place and verify the fuel tank is full or sufficiently full

to reach the sampling location, conduct the sampling, and

return with a sensible fuel reserve.

Boaters should adhere to the one-third rule for fuel

by using one third going out for sampling, one third

for getting back, and one third held in reserve.

Prepare the vessel for launching away from the ramp

to the greatest extent practicable. Use at least two experienced people to launch the vessel. One is needed to drive

the towing vehicle and the other to control the vessel. In

many cases, three people are needed, so two hand lines on

the boat can be properly controlled.

Do not block a ramp with an unattended vessel or vehicle. If the boat ramp is crowded, move the vessel away

from the launch lane as soon after removing it from the

trailer as possible. Return briefly to pick up the vehicle

driver once the driver has parked the vehicle and is back

at the ramp.

To launch the boat, the restraints keeping the boat on

the trailer are loosened or removed. The towing vehicle

is then used to back the trailer and boat down the ramp

and into the water until the boat floats free, after which

the boat is pulled to shore or a neighboring dock using a

line attached to the vessel. Once the boat is secured, it

is ready for loading, and the vehicle can be driven from

the boat ramp and parked (usually in a designated area

with pull-through parking to accommodate vehicle-trailer

combinations).

Loading a small boat is based on distributing the load

across the length of the vessel, while recognizing that the

engine, battery, and fuel are heavy components mounted

in the stern, plus the boat operator is seated in the stern.

Another consideration is to ensure access to safety equipment and needed equipment, e.g., the anchor. To power

the data acquisition computer, it is common to use a DCto-AC inverter that is connected to a 12 VDC battery.

From a layout perspective, the data acquisition operator should be positioned forward and the instrument operator amidships. This also places the cable bucket amidships,

which helps balance the stern loads. This means the proximity of the needed items for the data acquisition operator

should be placed forward. A useful and safe arrangement

is to put the computer in a large waterproof case.

62
S.B. Hooker

The inverter, computer AC adapter, deck box, and

other equipment brought on board can be kept in a large

plastic tub. The closed deck box can be rested on top of

a plastic cover to protect the contents of the tub from any

splashes. Care must be taken to ensure all cabling and

connections are secure and not stressed by working in a

confined space. Optical data are rarely collected in isolation, so the cooler for holding the water samples should be

placed forward to help balance the load.

12.8 Boat Handling

An important aspect of boat handling is mastering the

so-called Rules of the Road, which are published by the

U.S. Government Printing Office, and involve international

and inland rules†. Although they are mandatory to be kept

on vessels over 12 m (39.4 ft) in length, every boat operator

should have a copy. Because the emphasis here is on smallboat operations, only the inland rules are considered—and

only in a brief format to establish the perspective for additional study.

These rules deal with the responsibilities of the boat

operator when encountering marine facilities, shore structures, navigation aids, and other vessels. The latter involves a set of rules to establish which boat has the right

of way and, thus, which boat must give to, i.e., yield the

right of way to avoid a collision.

Common marine facilities encountered during smallboat operations are boat ramps, docks, yacht clubs, and

marinas. Although small boats like the one in Fig. 1b

can be launched with a minimal ramp, perhaps completely

earthen, it is safer to use proper facilities wherein a concrete apron and floating dock are available. In terms of

understanding the local marine environment, launching a

boat at a yacht club or marina usually affords access to local knowledge about water depth and attendant hazards.

A common shore structure encountered during smallboat operations is a bridge. Bridges, dock areas, marinas, and yacht clubs are points of congestion with limited

room to maneuver wherein the likelihood of encountering

another vessel is increased, so caution is paramount.

Exercise 12.8 What is a common restriction on boat

handling within a marine facility, channel, or bridge?

12.8.1 Navigation Aids

Two different colored buoys and markers mounted on

pilings driven into the seabed are used to identify a channel of safe passage. The two colors are red and green. If

† The Coast Guard publication entitled “Navigation Rules,

International—Inland” provides the present version of the

rules and is available in principal ports or directly from the

U.S. Government Printing Office (GPO) as follows: a) online at www.bookstore.gpo.gov; b) by telephone order at

+1-202-512-1800; or c) by mail from Superintendent of Documents, U.S. GPO, Washington, DC 20402.

a vessel stays midway between the two different colored

navigation aids, it will not run aground. There is no assurance of not running aground if a vessel is too close to

either of the channel markers—safe passage is assured in

the middle of the channel, not on the edges.

To prevent confusion as to what constitutes the channel, a vessel returning to a port or dock must keep the red

aids on the starboard (right) side. If a vessel is leaving a

port or dock, the red navigation aids will be on the port

(left) side. The red navigation aids have even numbers,

and green ones have odd numbers.

The center of a channel with separated one-way traffic

lanes is marked with red and white or black and white

navigation aids. A vessel operating in separated one-way

traffic lanes should stay in the middle of the lanes on the

correct side and not maneuver in such a way as to oppose

the direction of traffic. Separated traffic lanes are usually

associated with very large ships and small boats should

exercise extra caution when operating in such situations.

Exercise 12.8.1 What is the memory mnemonic regarding navigation markers and a vessel returning to

the dock?

12.8.2 Right of Way and Signaling

The right of way is assigned to the vessel with the highest priority, represented here numerically, so 6 has the highest priority, as follows:

1. Power driven;

2. Sailing;

3. Commercial fishing;

4. Restricted to channel water depth;

5. Limited in turning ability; and

6. Unable to steer.

Exercise 12.8.2 Given the description of a small boat

for this document, what priority will typically be assigned to a small boat for right-of-way purposes?

The three most common meeting engagements between

two vessels, with the applicable rules of the road, are as

follows:

• When vessels meet head-on, both keep astarboard.

• When crossing the path of a vessel, the right of way

is given to the boat ahead and astarboard.

• When overtaking a vessel, the passing boat gives the

right of way to the boat being passed.

A horn is used to signal the intended maneuvers of a

vessel, wherein a “•” indicates a short blast on the horn

and a “ ” indicates a prolonged blast, as follows:

a) Turning astarboard (•);

b) Turning aport (• •);

c) Going astern (•••);

63
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

d) Leaving the dock ( );

e) Open bridge ( •); and

f) Danger (•••••).

For the types of waters and, thus, vessels encountered during small-boat operations, horn signaling is usually not

necessary.

12.8.3 Weather, Assistance, and Accidents

If the weather rapidly changes for the worse, the following precautions should be taken (where possible and

applicable):

1. Recover any equipment that is in the water as quickly

and safely as possible.

2. With a reduced speed, but with enough power to

maintain headway, turn the bow of the boat into the

waves at about a 45◦ angle.

3. Set a course for the nearest harbor that is safe to

approach.

4. All persons should put on any extra clothing, don

immersion suits, put on PFDs, and cover their heads.

5. Seat everyone except the boat operator on the bottom of the boat near the centerline.

6. Turn on navigation running lights.

7. Keep all accessible areas free of water.

Exercise 12.8.3 If the shortest course to the nearest

harbor results in a rough ride and water splashing into

the boat, what should the boat operator do?

If the engine subsequently fails, a sea anchor

should be trailed on a line from the bow to

keep the boat headed into the waves (a metal bucket will

function as a sea anchor in an emergency).

The operator or person in charge of a vessel is required

by law to provide assistance that can be safely administered to any individual in danger at sea. In the U.S., the

Good Samaritan Act protects boaters rendering responsible assistance.

Failure to render assistance to a boat in distress

could result in fine or imprisonment.

The operator or person in charge of a vessel is required

to file a Boating Accident Report (BAR) if the boat is

involved in an accident that results in the following: a) loss

of life; b) personal injury which requires medical treatment

beyond first aid; c) damage to the boat and other property

exceeding $500 (amount may vary in some states); or d)

complete loss of the boat.

Boat operators are required to file a BAR with

the nearest state and local authorities in the

state where the accident occurred.

The type of information collected includes, but is not

limited to, the following: a) date, time and exact location

of the accident; b) name of each person involved and their

status (i.e., witness, dead, or disappeared); c) registration

number and name of the vessel; and d) name and address of

the owner and operator. If a person dies, disappears from

the boat, or there are injuries requiring medical treatment

beyond first aid, the BAR must be filed within 48 hr of the

accident. If the accident involves more than $500 damage

or complete loss of a vessel, the BAR must be submitted

within 10 days.

The owner of the vessel can be held responsible

for the safety and condition of their boat even if

someone else is at the helm; this is also true if the owner is

not on board and someone else has permission to use the

boat.

12.9 Sampling

As noted above (Sect. 12.7), boaters should adhere to

the one-third rule by using one third of the fuel going out

for sampling, one third of the fuel for getting back, and

one third of the fuel held in reserve. This practice encourages boaters to have full fuel tanks before conducting any

sampling. The other caution is to not have more than one

person standing at the same time, because a small boat

can be a lively platform and sudden unanticipated motions can lead to a loss of balance and perhaps a person

falling overboard.

Exercise 12.9 What is the best orientation of the person operating the C-OPS backplane during small-boat

operations, in terms of the stability of the vessel?

Data acquisition on a small boat is simpler than on a

large vessel. Although much of what was presented in Sect.

7.5.3 is applicable, the close proximity of all the persons

and functions makes for much simpler communications and

radios are not needed for data acquisition—although still

useful for safety on the water (Sect. 12.3.6.1). As in the

large vessel case, the computer operator starts and stops

data acquisition and is responsible for the written log.

12.9.1 Personnel

Three people are preferred for conducting sampling on

a small boat: one to handle the boat, one to deploy and

recover the instrumentation, and one to operate the data

acquisition software. Because small boats necessarily have

limited space, however, only two persons might be practical

if the vessel is quite small.

Exercise 12.9.1 If only two people are available for

small-boat operations, what are the safest assignments

for the three tasks involved (boat handling, instrument

operation, and software control)?

64
S.B. Hooker

12.9.2 Data Acquisition and Logging

Regardless of the number of persons aboard, attention

must be paid to the proximity of the needed items to conduct sampling, as provided in Sect. 12.7. When sampling is

commenced, the waterproof case holding the computer can

be placed on top of the cooler holding the water samples.

The case can then be opened and the computer plugged

into the AC adapter that will be powered with 120 VAC

power from the inverter.

Placing the computer on top of the cooler provides a

useful height and stable configuration for the computer

operator. The deck box can be placed on top of a plastic cover in the tub holding the additional electronics and

other equipment brought on board. When sampling out

on the water, the deck box lid can be lowered to provide

splash protection for the deck box panel.

The inverter should only be turned on when

all the equipment is ready to be used and the

stability of the boat is assured.

A recurring element in small-boat operations is the

need to shield the computer screen from sunshine, so it

can be properly viewed. An effective mechanism for this is

to use the sheet that protects the profiler from overheating

in sunshine as a shade (Fig. 40). If winds are a problem,

the sheet can be held to the waterproof container holding

the computer with large clips.

Fig. 40. Using the sheet that protects the profiler

from overheating in sunshine as a shade, so the data

acquisition computer screen can be seen in bright

sunlight on board the R/V Recon 18.

For the first cast of the operations, or if the sampling

environment has changed significantly (e.g., going from salt

water to freshwater), an abbreviated cast should be conducted at first to verify the descent rate of the profiler and

its vertical stability (i.e., trim). If the BioSHADE is part

of the system, it should be used to collect one cast after

three sequential in-water casts. Similarly, a water sample

should be collected after the third cast.

If a current will take the profiler away from the vessel

and if the water depth is suitable, it is advisable to anchor

the boat while sampling. The general sampling sequence

for small-boat operations follows from Sects. 7.5.1–7.5.3,

so only cursory details are provided here: dark data are

acquired and all caps removed, the profiler is lowered into

the water and positioned away from the vessel, and then

the desired number of casts are executed.

Exercise 12.9.2 In areas of high heterogeneity or if

the desired three casts cannot be obtained quickly, how

should the sampling strategy be modified?

12.10 Docking, Unloading, and Retrieval

Do not pull the vessel into a launch lane until the towing vehicle is at the ramp. The line is formed by vehicles

with trailers, not by vessels in the water. Drop off the vehicle driver, and wait offshore and clear of the ramp until

the driver arrives with the trailer.

Docking a small boat involves approaching the dock

slowly, which is a natural consequence of the requirement

to not leave a wake in a marine facility. One of the persons

in the boat should have the bow line in hand, and once

the boat is close to the dock, the line should be looped

around one of the dock cleats. The forward momentum of

the boat can be decreased by having the operator reverse

the engine for a short time. Once the person with the

bow line has secured it, that person can get on the dock

with the stern line and secure it to a dock cleat. The

preferred orientation is to use a cleat ahead of the vessel

and another behind (Fig. 2b). In some cases, the lines will

need to be repositioned to provide the desired orientation

and stability against the dock.

After the boat has been docked, the equipment loaded

for the sampling campaign should be removed, so the boat

will float as high in the water as possible. The contents

removed from the vessel should be placed where they cannot interfere with other persons using the dock or packed

immediately into the towing vehicle. When packing the

towing vehicle, it is important to position the contents so

they cannot move or shift while driving, i.e., to fill all voids

as is done when packing a box for transport (Sect. 10).

Do not leave anything in the boat that is not secured or tied down, because at highway speeds

it might be blown out of the vessel and become a significant

hazard to other motorists.

Retrieving a boat from the water essentially involves

the reverse of the steps to launch the boat. The towing

vehicle is used to back the trailer into the water at an appropriate distance down the boat ramp. Hand lines are

used to position the boat correctly over the partially submerged trailer.

Do not power the boat onto the trailer using

the motor, because this can cause damage.

65
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

In addition to damaging the boat and trailer if a mistake is made during power loading, the propeller wash can

erode the sediment just beyond the ramp surface, thereby

creating a large hole in the sediment and a mound where

the eroded sediment is deposited behind the propeller.

Trailer tires can get stuck in the hole, and boats can potentially run aground on the mound.

Attach the trailer winch line to the bow eye of the vessel

and finish pulling the vessel onto the trailer by cranking

the winch.

Stay clear of the direct line of the winch cable

in case it snaps or control is lost of the winch.

Raise the engine or outdrive, pull the vessel out of

the water, and inspect the positioning of the boat on the

trailer. If the positioning is inappropriate, back down the

ramp until the vessel floats free and correct the positioning.

While still at the ramp area, remove and dispose of all

aquatic vegetation from the vessel and trailer. Remove any

drain or scupper plug(s) to release any bilge or stored water. This will help prevent the spread of aquatic nuisance

plants and organisms.

After the boat is correctly positioned on the trailer,

drive the trailer away from the boat ramp to prepare for

highway driving. Carefully stow and secure all equipment

that is to be transported in the vehicle or boat. Secure the

raised engine or outdrive with the appropriate mechanisms,

which will usually include a stiffener to restrict the range

of motion that the engine or outdrive can move.

Reapply the straps or mechanisms that hold the boat

onto the trailer, taking care to secure all loose ends against

windage. If removable trailer lights are used, reapply and

secure them. Double check all cargo stowed inside the boat

cannot be blown out of the boat. A large zipper bag that

can be tied into the boat is a good container for properly

stowing numerous smaller items. For open-hull designs, a

netting that can be secured at the bow and from side to

side is useful for providing an outer barrier to keep cargo

inside the vessel at highway speeds.

Wash the boat and trailer down with freshwater making

sure to force water into all crevices or areas where water

can be stored. Attach a hose to the proper fitting on the

engine, so it can be run and flushed with freshwater. Many

boat launching facilities include an area and water source

for this purpose (sometimes it is coin operated).

After the boat and trailer have been washed down,

the functionality of all trailer lights should be confirmed to ensure the recent submersion in water has not

created a fault.

Exercise 12.10 What should be the course of action if

one of the trailer lights stops working after being submerged to launch or retrieve the boat?

Before towing the trailer, inspect the functionality of

the trailer and hitch components following the list provided

in Sect. 12.2.

Appendix A

Answers to Exercises

Exercise 1.1 What is likely the most significant advantage and disadvantage of deploying an autonomous

radiometric system on a terrestrial structure as opposed

to an offshore structure or research vessel (R/V)?

A terrestrial structure will very likely not need to generate its own power, but will very probably have to deal

with light contamination sources, particularly if nighttime

observations are made.

Exercise 1.2 What types of in-water platforms are not

mentioned in the five platform classifications that might

benefit from mobilization protocols?

Buoys, unmanned surface vessels (USVs), unmanned underwater vehicles (UUVs), and taught cable moorings are

not mentioned. All of these deployment options can use

the same instrumentation and cabling presented in this

report, so those sections will have applicability to these

alternative platforms.

For example, a proposed use of the C-OPS instrumentation is to mount the solar reference on a USV and tow

the backplane at depth, using the same cable presently

used, behind the USV (Fig. A1). In this scenario digital thrusters from the new Compact-Propulsion Option

for Profiling Systems (C-PrOPS) accessory (Exercise 3.1

and FAQ 18) are used to drive the backplane to the surface and slightly towards the USV every 30 min (weather

and illumination conditions permitting). A profile is then

obtained from the free descent of the backplane back to

the tow depth while the tow cable is relatively slack.

Fig. A1. A concept drawing for deploying a C-OPS

system with a small USV.

In addition, the Compact-Conductivity Accessory for

Profiling Systems (C-CAPS) would also be added to the

backplane so the verification of homogeneity of the upper

water column when influenced by freshwater input (e.g.,

ice melt and estuaries) can be better verified. The USV

would also have weather instruments, a GPS, and an Automatic Identification System (AIS). The AIS is used for

automated collision avoidance with other vessels similarly

equipped (medium- and large-sized vessels that could damage the USV are required to have AIS).

66
S.B. Hooker

Exercise 1.3 What are additional advantages of a freefall profiler like C-OPS with respect to the following

deployment alternatives: a) winch and crane frame, b)

buoy, and c) glider?

The respective advantages of a free-fall profiler are as

follows: a) it is not perpetually responding to the surge and

heave of the sea surface, b) it is not in near proximity of a

surface perturbation, and c) it has minimal self-shading.

Exercise 1.4 What types of deployment might logically

require a different type of cable for the surface reference

than the one provided?

The cable provided with a new system assumes relatively short-duration campaigns (i.e., up to 8 weeks) with

a standard power configuration, in terms of voltage and

current. For longer-duration deployments, cable with a

thicker outer jacket might be needed for enhanced protection against a greater likelihood of accidental damage from

increased exposure to platform maintenance operations or

enhanced wind loading, which can lead to chaffing.

Similarly, if a cable must be laid on a deck and subjected

to foot traffic, a stronger outer jacket and a sacrificial overwrap to minimize the trip hazard and protect the cable is

recommended. In addition, if the cable run is significantly

longer than usual, cable with a larger wire gauge might be

needed to overcome resistive losses, while staying within a

preferred voltage range.

Exercise 2.0 What is a principal concern for an electrical cable that is designed to be used to deploy and

recover an instrument system?

Whenever an electrical cable is used to support a mechanical load (i.e., it is pulled), a primary concern is ensuring the induced strain is restricted to the cable and

not transmitted to the connectors and conductors, because

neither the connector, the locking sleeve, nor the pin and

socket connections are designed to withstand significant

pulling forces. A common and reliable way of preventing

tensile forces being applied to the connector and locking

sleeve is to transfer the load from the cable to a strength

member using a chinese finger. For an in-water instrument

like C-OPS, the strength member is the harness attached

to the backplane, which is connected to the chinese finger

using a shackle.

Exercise 2.1 What is the definition of an ungrounded

electrical system, and what are the advantages and disadvantages of such a system?

In an ungrounded electrical system, there is no intentional conducting connection between a service or equipment enclosure and the Earth. Although grounding has

the advantage of high fault levels to trip over-currentprotection devices (e.g., a fuse or circuit breaker), such

faults present dangers posed by electrical arcing and flashing hazards.

In addition, some functions require higher service continuity to ensure a more significant safety hazard is not

produced when the circuit that would normally trip open

removes a vital capability, e.g., propulsion or steering. This

is based on the argument that most ground fault currents

are small and result in negligible burning or heating when

the fault is not cleared; consequently, line-to-ground faults

can be left on the system until it is appropriate to find and

clear them under controlled circumstances.

A major disadvantage to an ungrounded system is the

difficulty in locating a line-to-ground fault. In general,

the fault must be located and repaired quickly, because

if a second fault occurs, the subsequent fault is usually

more extensive than the first (e.g., burning and loss of protective insulation is likely), thereby extending the extent

and cost of the repair process. Finding the fault can be

a time-consuming process and if it occurs during a period

of heightened safety concerns (e.g., during a severe storm),

the amount of time to clear the fault can be significant and

the initial problem that created the fault can escalate to

more dangerous levels.

Exercise 2.2 What other common resistance factor besides water, especially seawater, is important to be aware

of when working around electrical components?

The resistance of the internal human body can be as low

as 500 Ω. Consequently, if there is a puncture of the skin at

the current path, the shock danger increases dramatically.

Exercise 2.3 How can the cable pins and sockets be

used to establish the run direction, and why is that an

advantage?

Because an instrument will always have a bulkhead connector with male pins to receive power, the run direction

to the instrument is set by simply taking the end of the

cable with the female sockets towards the instrument. Similarly, the male pins are run towards the deck box. This

provides the advantage of not having to actually have the

instruments in question to properly plan a cable run.

Exercise 2.4 What is a perceived “disadvantage” of all

cables having the same pin assignment?

If all cables have the same pin assignment, the electronics must be able to detect the “resistive” length of the

cable to ensure proper line voltage is provided. This extra

circuitry adds to the cost of the electronics and, thus, is

sometimes perceived as a disadvantage.

Exercise 2.5 What types of circumstances might require a locking sleeve to be replaced?

A common reason for replacing a locking sleeve is that

it is accidentally damaged, in which case, it should be replaced promptly. Another reason for replacing a locking

sleeve is to change the purpose of the cable, because a particular type is needed, but only other types are available.

For example, if an extension cable is needed, but only an

interface cable is available.

67
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

Exercise 2.6 What is the advantage of a cable with an

MP/MR connector on one end and an FS/FG connector

on the other end?

It can be coiled up and plugged into itself to protect the

connector pins and sockets, and the locking sleeves mate

to prevent accidental disconnection.

Exercise 2.7 For a cable with an MP/FG connector on

one end and an FS/FG connector on the other end—

which have locking sleeves that do not mate—what is a

reliable way to protect the connectors while stowed, if

dummy plugs with the appropriate locking sleeves are

not available?

Plug the male pins into the female sockets and then use

vinyl electrical tape to join the two FG locking sleeves

together to prevent disconnection.

Exercise 2.8 What vulnerability is created when an

extension cable is connected to a deck box?

The male pins on the cable can be pushed into the female sockets on the deck box, but the locking sleeves will

not mate, which means the cable can be accidentally disconnected from the deck box.

Exercise 2.9 What is another disadvantage of an allplastic locking sleeves?

An all-plastic locking sleeve cannot be changed in the

field. A common way this type of locking sleeve is changed

is to cut a slit through the outer shell along the long dimension of the locking sleeve, so it can be spread open enough

to pass over the diameter of the much smaller cable; the

locking sleeve is then taped together to give it some holding strength, but it is obviously and seriously compromised

in such a state.

Exercise 2.9.1 What is another reason to not use excessive grease when lubricating connectors?

Excess grease is easily transported from one surface to

another through the routine handling of the cabling and

equipment, and could ultimately be transferred to one of

the optical apertures (e.g., irradiance diffuser or radiance

window), which will alter the characterized responsivity of

the aperture.

Exercise 2.9.2 What is an “appropriate” way to stow

dummy plugs?

Like cables, dummy plugs should be stowed connected to

their opposite type and joined together with mated locking

sleeves.

Exercise 2.9.3 What is an appropriate way to protect

exposed pins or sockets for an extended period of time

if no dummy plugs are available?

The connector is inserted into a clean plastic bag, and

the bag is over wrapped with vinyl electrical tape to secure

the bag to the cable. If a bag is unavailable, tape can be

used as follows: a) invert the tape, so the sticky side is up

away from the connector; b) wrap the inverted tape around

the connector to form a small pouch that completely covers

the connector; and c) invert the tape, so the sticky side is

now facing the connector pouch, and overwrap the pouch

with the tape to secure it to the cable.

Exercise 2.10 What happens to the integrity of the

shield when shielded and unshielded cables are mixed

together in a single cable run.

Mixing shielded and unshielded cables in a cable run will

nullify the protection of the shield. Typically the simplest

way to preserve the benefit of shielded cable is to only use

shielded cable, or to enclose the cabling in a separately

grounded shield, which is usually not practical.

Exercise 3.0 How does the fact that a microradiometer

PCA contains circuits so small it must be machine made

affect quality?

Machine-made components provide a higher quality assurance (QA) than legacy handmade components, because

the high degree of repeatability removes almost all of the

individualized sources of variance in the manufacturing

process, e.g., operator-to-operator skill differences, alertness stressors at the start or end of the day (or week), etc.

Machines are not foolproof, however, but machine-made

components tend to fail quality control (QC) procedures

in batches whereas handmade components usually fail as

individual items.

Batch failures are easier and cheaper to detect than individualized failures, because a subset of a production can be

analyzed for QA, rather than every single item. The experiences with microradiometers is that the overall quality is

significantly improved with having as many machine-made

components as possible.

Exercise 3.1 How else might the solar reference be used

as a “reference”?

Because microradiometers have 10 decades of dynamic

range, they can be used for making measurements under

moonlight, typically the Disseminating to Gibbous Moon

(75% of lunar disk), although challenges do exist for some

of the shorter wavelengths due to low signal levels. If

C-OPS is deployed under moonlight, the solar reference

becomes a lunar reference and provides the same functionality except now the source of temporal evolution is the

Moon rather than the Sun.

As a proof of this concept, in-water measurements were

made under a full Moon using a C-OPS with the C-PrOPS

accessory (Fig. A2a) for Compact-Buoyant Environmental

AOP Measurements of the Moon and Sun (C-BEAMMS)

activity (Fig. A2b). The thrusters on C-PrOPS allow the

profiler to be maneuvered away from the deployment platform, in this case a dock, under difficult conditions (nighttime).

68
S.B. Hooker

Fig. A2. Optical measurements made under challenging low-light levels from a dock used a) the

C-PrOPS accessory concept for obtaining in-water

profiles, for example, b) Ed(780) in the upper 1 m

of the water column.

Exercise 3.2 Why does rotating the BioSCAN radiometers perpendicular to the sun plane not eliminate sun

glint contamination in the LT measurement?

Rotating the BioSCAN radiometers perpendicular to the

sun plane does not eliminate sun glint contamination in

the LT measurement, because the sea surface is typically

wind roughened. A rough sea surface contains a random

occurrence of capillary waves wherein oblique wave facets

can reflect light into the FOV of the LT instrument. Because the capillary waves represent small, fast-changing

wave slopes, the glint pattern is always changing and can

be filtered out if the data acquisition is sufficiently fast,

i.e., 6 Hz or more (Hooker et al. 1999).

Exercise 3.3 Why is knowing the vertical orientation

of the profiler during descent important?

All sensors on the C-OPS backplane (Ed and Lu or Eu)

must make planar measurements to within 5◦, because the

light fields are not isotropic. C-OPS uses a two-axis set

of tilt sensors (arbitrarily denoted pitch and roll) to determine the resulting departure from vertical. The same

sensor set is also in the solar reference.

The vertical tilt data, however, are used differently for

the above- and in-water sensors. Because the in-water sensors are falling through the water column, there is a separate source of changing illumination that is convolved with

the tilting of the sensors. Given that the light fields are not

isotropic and the water column is in general not homogenous, the convolution of changing illumination from tilting

and falling is difficult to correct. The simplest procedure

is to filter out all data exceeding a 5◦ vertical tilt.

The above-water sensors does not experience a similar

convolution, and in fact remains at the same vertical point

in the light field (within the limits of the vertical scale

of the atmosphere). Although cloud heterogeneity contributes to the anisotropy, the effect is usually small and

the measured solar illumination can be derived from a fit

to the data rather than having to filter it.

Exercise 3.4 Are there negative consequences if the

C-OPS underwater cable is accidentally connected to the

reference bulkhead rather than the underwater (profiler)

bulkhead on the deck box?

There is no difference between the two deck box bulkhead ports—both support the reference or profiler. There

is a potential for software problems, however, if port assignments are changed between software restarts. If ports

are reassigned, the acquisition software should be restarted

(remembering that connections and disconnections should

only be done with all power off).

Exercise 3.5 If so much of a modern acquisition system

is computerized and can easily accommodate automated

record keeping, why retain a written log?

Despite the advantages of computer logging, maintaining a written log is frequently faster during data acquisition, because it does not interrupt the acquisition process. In addition, failures in electronic systems do occur,

so a written log provides a minimum backup in the case

of such failures. A written log should be transcribed to a

digital file promptly after data acquisition is completed, so

all details are fresh and easily remembered.

Exercise 4.0 Which is more vulnerable to failure, the

cable or the connector?

Each are similarly vulnerable for different reasons. A cable is much longer than a connector, so it has an integrated

exposure to a fault that makes it more vulnerable and if

the cable is strung in a particularly hazardous location, the

vulnerability increases significantly. For example, if 50 m

of cable is strung out along a ship, each point in the cable

can be accidentally damaged by normal activities.

A connector is a single point of stress, so it can fail

catastrophically if stresses exceed thresholds. For example, if the cable is pulled on inappropriately, the connector

usually takes the brunt of the load and the conductors can

be pulled to the point wherein connection to the pins or

sockets is broken. For this reason, it is advisable to apply

strain relief where two cables connect.

Exercise 4.1 What is a common mitigation factor that

must be considered when assigning priorities for mobilization work?

Weather can completely alter a well-planned mobilization activity. If there is a high probability of rain, snow,

or icing during a particular part of the work plan, it is

advisable to reschedule the work plan so that time period

involves indoor work, especially if there is a chance for

lightning or other conditions (e.g., high wind) that might

restrict access to needed parts of the ship.

Exercise 4.2 What should happen next given the priority matrix?

69
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

The fact that the manufacturer provided the adapter

cable suggests it should simply be installed, and the old

sensors tested for proper functionality as soon as possible,

so a timely mobilization can be completed. The remote

location of the field campaign and the fact that the ship is

about to sail, however, suggests caution is warranted.

Exercise 4.3 What is a common and simple way to

attach a reference sensor mount to a ship?

The railing on a ship is designed to prevent a person from

falling overboard and is a common attachment point for a

sensor mount. It also affords a simple attachment mechanism, because the scaffolding industry provides a diversity

of fixtures to join pipe securely. If pipe is the primary

part of a mast, it can be quickly and reliably attached to

the ship’s railing with scaffolding clamps or stainless steel

hose clamps (Fig. A3). Railing is usually made of pipe with

two different diameters, so shimming material is frequently

needed to plumb the mast (usually at the bottom).

Fig. A3. Three examples of affixing a mast on a

ship: a) the bottom of a pipe mast shimmed away

from a stanchion, the threads of the pipe protected

with rubber and purple vinyl tape, and the mast affixed with a hose clamp aboard the R/V Gulf Challenger ; b) a mid-point part of the mast affixed with

a hose clamp aboard the R/V Gulf Challenger ; and

c) a pipe mast affixed to the railing using a scaffolding clamp aboard the R/V Tethys II.

Exercise 4.4 What is a likely reason for avoiding ship’s

equipment that appears to be used infrequently?

It is common that infrequently used pieces of equipment

nonetheless are serviced and tested at sea. If the cabling

has to be removed for this work to be completed, valuable

data might be lost.

Exercise 5.0 Why is it important that the pipe used for

sensor mounts not be corrosive and, thus, not a source

of particles?

The concern for preventing pipe from being a source of

particles is mostly to stop the transportation of contamination from the pipe to the optical apertures of the sensors.

If the pipe is dirty, it is rather easy to transfer dirt to the

optical apertures when handling both in the field.

Exercise 5.1 What is a theoretical disadvantage with

multiple tool bags—rather than just one big tool box—

that might actually provide a practical advantage?

The use of multiple tool bags means some tools are duplicated, whereas in a single tool box there need only be

one. The duplication is actually an advantage, however,

because such tools are clearly needed for more than one

task, so having more than one provides built-in spares.

Exercise 5.2 What is the advantage of a smooth-band,

worm-drive hose clamp, and how can it be improved?

The smooth-band design prevents the drive screw from

cutting into the material below the band, so the individual components are not marred. The band also has rolled

edges to prevent them from cutting into the surface being clamped. Extra insulation can be provided by adding

heat-shrink tubing around the band where it is in contact

with the device being clamped.

Exercise 5.2.1 What is the difference between 304 SS

and 316 SS?

304 SS contains 18% chromium and 8% nickel and is also

known as 18/8 SS. 316 SS contains 16% chromium, 10%

nickel, and 2% molybdenum. The molybdenum helps resist

corrosion to chlorides, e.g., seawater (FAQ 5).

Exercise 5.2.2 What are the suggested pipe wrench

sizes as a function of pipe diameter?

The suggested pipe wrench sizes as a function of pipe

diameter (Table A1) show that the 10 and 12 in wrenches

used in these protocols (Sect. 5.1) provide a large range of

useful and commonly encountered pipe diameters.

Table A1. The recommended† pipe wrench sizes (left

entry in columns) for ranges of pipe diameters (right

entry in columns).

Wrench and Range Wrench and Range

6 in 1/8 –1/2 in 12 in 1/2 – 11/2 in

8 1/4 –3/4 14 1/2 – 11/2

10 1/4 – 1 18 1 – 2

Exercise 5.2.3 What are some of the advantages of a

modular mast made from commercial pipe and fittings?

A modular mast built from commercial pipe and fittings

provides a significant amount of flexibility for several deployment problems, as follows:

• It is more easily shipped, because the longest piece

is 4 ft (1.2 m);

• If one component is damaged, it is easily and cost

effectively replaced; and

• If additional sensors need to be added, it is easily

reconfigured using easy-to-obtain fittings.

Exercise 5.2.4 What is a likely disadvantage of a telescoping mast versus a pipe mast in winter conditions?

A telescoping mast has moving parts that must slide

past one another for the mast to be extended or retracted.

70
S.B. Hooker

During winter conditions, water can freeze between

the moving parts and prevent movement, which

means the mast will be frozen in place.

With BioMAST, hot air can be blown into the base of

the mast (e.g., with a heat gun), which rises up and melts

the ice (Fig. 13).

Exercise 5.3 What is another reason to not over tighten

the fitting that mates the BioSCAN frame flange to the

vertical 1 1/4 in 316 SS support pipe?

It is essential that the connection between the flange on

the bottom of the BioSCAN frame and the vertical pipe

supporting the frame can be disassembled at the end of the

field campaign for proper demobilization and packing. Although anti-seizing stainless steel joint compound will significantly help reduce the likelihood of galling (Sect. 5.2.1),

not over tightening the connection is also beneficial.

Exercise 5.4 What is the consequence of not correctly

specifying the offsets of the light sensor apertures with

respect to the pressure transducer?

An incorrect depth offset for a light sensor aperture artificially brightens or darkens the data. If the offset places

the aperture shallower (deeper) in the water column than

it is supposed to be, the data will appear darker (brighter)

than the offset would normally provide. Similarly, an incorrect pressure tare can artificially brighten or darken the

data. A comprehensive analysis of the sensitivity of common optical data products to these avoidable uncertainties

is provided by Hooker et al. (2013).

Exercise 5.5 What is one of the potentially hazardous

accidental misuses of industrial hook-and-loop fasteners

that can lead to damaged equipment?

If too large a surface is used, either as one piece or the

sum of several pieces, the pulling force to remove the equipment can be so great the shell of the equipment can be

damaged, i.e., distorted or even pulled apart.

Industrial hook-and-loop fasteners withstand a large

pulling or shearing force and must be used sparingly.

Exercise 6.0 When planning a cable run should the

amount of cable that is strung inside the vessel be minimized or maximized?

Opinions differ about which of these choices is optimal.

On the one hand, cable strung within a ship is more protected from mishap and weather than cable strung outside

the ship, but it is usually harder to install than the open

areas outside and it is much less accessible once the ship

sails, because so much happens inside the ship. The perspective adopted here is to be prepared for, and to be able

to respond rapidly to, fault conditions. This means outside

cabling is preferred and the rest of this document assumes

such a perspective.

Exercise 6.1 What are the advantages of using highvisibility (e.g., neon) cable ties?

By selecting a unique easy-to-see color, it becomes much

easier to remove an installed cable without accidentally

releasing the wrong cable tie and compromising a prior

cable installation. In addition, the high visibility makes

it easier to find cable ties or ends that are cut loose and

then dropped. The latter is important, because it is the

responsibility of all mariners to not introduce plastics into

U.S. navigable waters (Sect. 12.5).

Exercise 6.2 When applying color-coded tape to a cable, where should it be applied?

Color-coded tape should not be applied to the locking

sleeve. It should be applied as a few number of over wraps

a short distance away from the connector bodies (1–2 in

or 2–5 cm) at each end of the cable (e.g., Fig. 15), so it is

obviously visible when each locking sleeve is mated.

Exercise 6.2.1 How does a coil of slack cable attached

to a fixture (e.g., a pipe mast, as shown in Fig. 16a),

provide strain relief?

The strain relief is provided by the cable tie, because

if the long end of the cable is brought under tension, the

cable tie prevents the tension from being transmitted to the

cable connector and instrument bulkhead combination.

Exercise 6.2.2 What is the principle vulnerability of

using a Y-cable to power two instruments?

The principle vulnerability of a Y-cable is two instruments can be removed from service by a single cable failure.

Furthermore, unless a spare Y-cable is available, it cannot

be simply swapped out. In most cases, a replacement Ycable will have to be fashioned from available pigtail and

cable spares, which might mean sacrificing one or more

cables to make the replacement (assuming no part of the

original cable is available for useable parts).

Exercise 6.2.3 How can the cable initiation in Fig. 16c

be improved?

The top left blue circle indicates a loose cable tie, which

provides a range of motions for the red sea cable. The red

sea cable should pass over—not under—the black Y-cable

connecting the two sensors to the sea cable.

Exercise 6.3 If the only two cables that will span a

cable run are two interface cables, how can they be reconfigured to connect properly?

One of the interface cables will have to be converted to

an extension cable, by changing the MP/FG connector to

a MP/MR connector. The easiest way to do this is to use

a MR locking sleeve from a dummy plug. The sequence of

steps are as follows (Sect. 2.5):

1. Slide the FG locking sleeve away from the connector.

71
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

2. Remove the split ring from the MR locking sleeve

using a miniature flat-bladed screwdriver.

3. Wedge open one edge of the split ring, and rotate it

over the cable until the ring is captured around the

cable.

4. Slide the MR locking sleeve over the MP connector

body.

5. Push the split ring into the MR locking sleeve and

seat it into the groove using the miniature screwdriver.

Because this is probably a temporary cabling arrangement,

it is advisable to not remove the original FG locking sleeve,

so the original configuration can be easily restored by removing the added MR locking sleeve when appropriate.

Do not simply mate the two original male and female connectors and leave them without mated

locking sleeves, even if tape is applied to the connectors,

because a proper mating of the pins and sockets requires

mated locking sleeves.

Exercise 6.3.1 What is another advantage for having

a sea cable that can be disconnected close to the cable

bucket?

Being able to disconnect the cable bucket from the cable

that runs to the deck box allows the cable bucket and the

profiler to be easily moved to a safe location inside the ship

in the event of severe weather, i.e., behind a door that will

be closed or dogged shut.

Exercise 6.3.2 If the BioSCAN (two radiometers) is

mounted on the bow of a ship along with a surface reference (1 radiometer) without BioGPS and BioSHADE

accessories, how can all three devices be powered and

the data acquired with one power-telemetry cable going

back to the deck box?

An extra Y-cable is needed to provide a cable route from

the one cable coming from the deck box. In this case, one

part of the Y-cable will go to the Y-cable on the BioSCAN

frame, and the other part will go to the solar reference

following the cautions in Sect. 6.2.1.

If using one cable from the deck box is required as a

mission-saving requirement and the BioGPS data are also

required, then the BioSCAN instrument cluster and the

BioGPS and irradiance instrument may all be connected

together with spare y-cables. The BioSHADE instrument

must be disconnected from the system and the shadow

band stowed out of the field of view of the irradiance instrument. Dummy plugs should be properly installed on

the bulkheads of the BioSHADE.

Exercise 6.3.3 What is a common feature of weather

decks that can provide a convenient and secure location

to run cable on top of a deck?

Scuppers are usually installed along the bulwarks of the

weather decks. They are frequently continuous troughs

and at each brace that supports the bulwark, a keyhole is

cut in the corner where the deck and bulwark meet. The

keyhole allows cable to be run along the scuppers. Vents

and other pipes that emerge from the deck below, or the

grating covering the trough, allow the cable to be secured.

The water that drains into the scuppers can be rather

dirty and contain oils and grease, so any cable that

is laid in a scupper should be cleaned with a degreasing

solvent and thoroughly scrubbed with mild soap at the

end of the field campaign.

Exercise 6.4 What is a sensible precaution before connecting any cables to a deck box?

Before any cables are connected to a deck box, make

sure the power switch is off. Deck boxes have internal

batteries, so it is insufficient to expect they are off if they

are not plugged in. The switch on a deck box latches, which

means it must be lifted up before moving it to a new state.

The latching feature prevents accidental movements of the

switch.

Exercise 7.0 What is the difference between SPF and

UPF?

SPF is a standard for measuring the effectiveness of sunscreens applied to the skin to mitigate exposure to UVB

(280–315 nm) radiation—there is no agreed upon standard

for UVA (315–400 nm) protection in the U.S. The numerical rating indicates a longevity for exposure. For example,

if a person’s skin turns red after 10 min in sunlight, an SPF

10 sunscreen should enable the person to remain outside

10 times longer (i.e., approximately 100 min) before that

person’s skin turns red. UPF is a transmission test for

measuring how much UVA and UVB radiation is blocked

by a fabric. A UPF rating of 50+ is the highest rating and

means the fabric blocks 97.5% of both UVA and UVB rays.

Exercise 7.1 What would be a likely disadvantage of

using cellular telephony rather than R/T, if it were available?

An important feature of R/T is the ability for other operators to monitor the traffic on a particular channel. This

is an important safety feature, because it means, for example, the bridge can intercede if an emergency situation develops during a deployment of an instrument from the deck

of a ship. Although some cellular telephone providers do

provide such a capability, it is not automatically available

to all customers, particularly if a customer uses an alternative service provider. Another advantage of R/T is there

is no subscription costs; once the handsets are purchased,

an unlimited amount of communications are available at

no extra cost.

72
S.B. Hooker

Exercise 7.1.1 What happens when two R/T operators

transmit at the same time?

If the length of the transmissions are almost exactly the

same, neither operator will be aware the other transmitted

and both will wait for a reply, if one is expected. If one

transmission is rather longer than the other, the operator who sent the shorter transmission will hear the clipped

ending of the longer transmission, and should realize the

other operator transmitted a message. The cognizant operator should provide the lost original short message and

at the same time request a retransmission of the other operator’s longer message.

Exercise 7.1.2 In addition to machinery noise, what is

a common sources of noise on an outside deck that can

degrade R/T clarity, and how can it be mitigated?

A common source of noise on an outside deck besides

engine noise is the wind. When wind blows over a handset

microphone it creates a significant amount of noise. If it

is not possible to move to a location that is sheltered from

the wind, sometimes facing opposite of the wind direction,

i.e., with the wind to the back, will mitigate this noise

source.

Exercise 7.1.3 What is a common mistake for new R/T

practitioners that leads to incomplete messages?

A common mistake for new R/T practitioners that leads

to incomplete messages is not synchronizing the coordination between pressing the PTT button and speaking.

The two common failure modes are either speaking first

and then pushing the PTT button, or forgetting to push

the PTT button at all. Another source of incomplete or

missing messages is trying to use a handset while wearing

gloves, which can sometimes not provide the kind of tactile

feedback to the fingers that the PTT button was pressed.

Exercise 7.1.4 What is the difficulty with the above

example, “Lab, Deck; station in two minutes; Out.” for

new practitioners, and how can the messaging be improved?

The example message assumes someone is listening, and

if they are not, there is no way for the sender to know that

because the sender was “Out” at the end of the message.

For new practitioners who might not be capable of the kind

of R/T discipline the example requires (e.g., perhaps they

left their post to deal with an unexpected problem and did

not take their radio with them), a more foolproof message

is, “Lab, Deck; station in two minutes; Over.” Now, if

Lab does not respond, Deck knows there is a breakdown

in R/T discipline and can send someone to investigate.

Exercise 7.1.5 Why is blowing air from the lips over a

handset microphone an inadequate radio check?

Blowing air from the lips over a handset microphone

confirms a level of operability, but it does not provide a

good measure of signal strength and no measure of clarity.

Both of these transmission qualities are important when

evaluating radio checks.

Exercise 7.1.6 Assuming the operators in the above

R/T traffic are experienced, what would be a shortened,

but equally effective exchange between the Deck and

Lab?

Deck: “Lab, Deck; surface, surface.” Deck knows Lab

is aware the only instrument being deployed is the

profiler and that Lab is waiting to be told it is on

the surface and properly positioned under stable

illumination conditions, so surface is repeated to

establish that the required priorities have been met.

If Deck had to get the profiler farther from the ship

or if a cloud was approaching the Sun, the exchange

would have been, “Lab, Deck; surface, wait one.”

and Lab would have responded, “Deck, Lab; Roger,

standing by.”

Lab: “Deck, Lab; good-to-go, good-to-go.” Lab knows

Deck is aware that instabilities, like clouds nearing the Sun or near proximity of the profiler to the

ship, will be reported or properly dealt with, so

there is no need to ask for something that was not

stated. Furthermore, Lab knows Deck is waiting

to be told to proceed, so the “good-to-go” command is repeated to establish the required priority

is understood.

Deck: “Drop-drop-drop.” Deck knows Lab is aware the

drop command is for the profiler and provides a

three-word repeat of the command to establish priority. Note the omission of the call sign sequence,

which is not absolutely necessary, because it was already established in the initiating sequence above.

Lab: “Roger that; Out.” Lab knows Deck understands

the information exchanged only involves the drop

command, which must be acknowledged, and now

has nothing to do, so the conversation can be ended

by the addressee.

In this conversation, eighteen words are exchanged in

just a few seconds.

Exercise 7.2 What is the advantage of using laboratory

cables for the functionality test?

If the system configuration works with the laboratory

cables, then when the system is tested after the field cables

are installed and something is found to not work, it can

safely be assumed that the fault is with one of the field

cables.

Exercise 7.2.1 If the deck box appears to be malfunctioning, what is a good way to record the messages generated by the deck box, so they can be studied more

carefully and perhaps transcribed for the manufacturer?

73
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

Most modern digital cameras have an option allowing

the recording of a video or motion picture. This feature

can be used to document the messages displayed by the

deck box as they emerge during the power-up process. The

individual frames can then be viewed (Fig. A4) and transcribed, if necessary.

Fig. A4. A single deck box panel display during a

normal power-up sequence as recorded with a digital camera aboard the R/V John Le Conte.

If the ability to record a video is not an option, the

individual messages can nonetheless be recorded as still

pictures, which can be subsequently transcribed. The rate

at which the messages emerge might require multiple attempts to capture all the messages. Comparisons of the

transcribed messages with documentation provided by the

manufacturer, as well as summary information in Sec. 7.2.1,

might be sufficient to understand the fault condition and

clear it.

Exercise 7.2.2 What additional simple procedure can

be used to verify the individual light instruments are

responding as anticipated?

An additional simple procedure to verify the individual

light instruments are responding as anticipated can be executed in a well lit area or with the aid of a flashlight.

Remove the cap off one of the instruments, illuminate the

aperture (with the flashlight, if necessary), and verify that

the computer display for that instrument shows elevated

signals across all channels. Put the cap back on the sensor

and verify the signals return to dark values. Repeat this

process for each instrument.

Exercise 7.3 What kinds of changes in solar illumination are acceptable on a moving platform?

Slow and linear changes in solar illumination do not pose

a data processing challenge. Consequently, the change in

illumination from a varying solar zenith angle is not a problem on a moving platform nor is a slow brightening or

darkening during overcast conditions. Rapid changes, as

can occur when a small cloud moves across the solar disk

or when the Sun emerges temporarily from an overcast

condition, must be avoided.

Exercise 7.4 When there are two sea-viewing options

with BioSCAN, why is the position that has the seaviewing instrument pointed farthest from the deployment platform selected?

The position with the sea-viewing instrument pointed

farthest from the deployment platform is preferred, because this position will have less chance of a platform perturbation than the alternative. An exhaustive analysis of

platform perturbation effects is provided by Hooker and

Morel (2003), Hooker et al. (2003), and Hooker and Zibordi (2005).

Exercise 7.5 What is unusual about the configuration

of the C-OPS profiler shown in Fig. 20 and what advantage does it provide?

The unusual aspect of the C-OPS profiler in Fig. 20 is

that no flotation disks are present (compare to Fig. 7).

The hydrobaric buoyancy chamber has sufficient buoyancy

that the profiler can be trimmed using weights alone. The

advantage of this configuration is the backplane is more

transparent to the swell, which means it is easier to haul

in, it is less responsive to surface gravity waves, and it has

a smaller shading cross-section.

Exercise 7.5.1 What is a good habit to learn in order to

overcome a common omission when preparing to deploy

the C-OPS backplane, especially if there are unanticipated problems, that some software might not detect?

A common omission when preparing C-OPS for deployment, especially if there are unanticipated problems that

some software might not detect, is that the cap was left on

the solar reference radiometer. A good habit to learn is to

place all caps in the C-OPS instrument basket, and count

them when the in-water radiometer caps are added to the

basket, i.e., there should always be three caps.

Exercise 7.5.2 If the maximum range of adjustable tilt

in a particular direction has been achieved, but more

tilt adjustment in that direction is needed, what can be

done to provide the needed adjustment?

To add to the maximum range of adjustable tilt in a particular direction, weight or foam flotation can be moved to

the appropriate place on the backplane where extra tilting

is desired. For example, if more negative pitch adjust is

needed, weights can be moved to the inside of the bumpers

on the negative pitch side of the backplane, so they are acting over a longer moment arm. The concept of having the

flotation or weights repositioned so they act over a longer

moment arm can be further augmented by adding more

weight or flotation, but this will impact the descent rate.

Exercise 7.5.3 What is the disadvantage in using propeller or thruster turbulence to move a profiler away

from the ship?

The disadvantage in using propeller turbulence to move

a profiler away from the ship is it artificially mixes the

water and introduces a significant amount of bubbles and

foam (Fig. A5). A vertical profile cannot commence until

74
S.B. Hooker

sufficient time has elapsed for the turbulence to dissipate,

so normal water properties can be restored. The directed

energy of the propeller aids in clearing the turbulence, but

in some cases a significant amount of time must be devoted

before profiling can commence.

Fig. A5. The C-OPS backplane in the thruster

turbulence of the TR/V Oshoro Maru revealing the

large amount of small bubbles formed as a result of

using the bow thruster.

In shallow water, propeller or thruster turbulence can

resuspend bottom material that will significantly alter the

optical properties of the localized water mass. If there

is little or no current, the overturning motions associated

with the turbulence can persist for a long time, so extra

caution is needed when maneuvering in shallow waters.

Exercise 8.0 Are there circumstances wherein the safest

place for the backplane is at depth, i.e., it should not be

recovered?

When the proximity of the profiler with respect to the

deployment platform is unknown and sea surface conditions are very rough, the profiler is usually safer at an

intermediate depth (i.e., between the surface and the sea

bottom). Before recovery is attempted, the position of the

profiler with respect to the deployment platform must be

confirmed. If the profiler is being deployed from a ship, the

intermediate depth should be between the keel and the sea

bottom. The reason the profiler is relatively safer at depth

is because there is usually nothing that the profiler can be

thrown against to damage it, whereas at the surface there

is the hull of the vessel.

The exception to this general rule is when the profiler

is being deployed from an offshore structure, which will

necessarily extend to the sea bottom, so there is no intermediate depth wherein the profiler cannot be thrown

against the submerged parts of the structure.

When deploying a profiler from an offshore structure, it is important to keep the profiler and cable

leading to the profiler in sight, to the greatest extent practicable, so there is continuing visual evidence that it is not

becoming ensnared on a hidden obstruction.

Exercise 8.1 How should the BioSCAN frame be stowed

if severe weather is anticipated?

If severe weather is anticipated, the radiometers on the

BioSCAN frame should be capped, removed, and dummy

plugs affixed to the instruments as well as the Y-cable on

the frame. If the frame is located on the bow or in the

direction that severe weather is expected to come from,

the cable leading to the Y-cable should be disconnected

and a dummy plug affixed to both free ends. The resulting

slack in the cable coming from the deck box should be

coiled up and cable tied to a permanent fixture. Then the

frame should be removed by unscrewing if from the pipe

below the flange. The entire frame assembly should then

be stowed and secured indoors.

Exercise 8.2 If severe weather is expected, how should

the C-OPS backplane be stowed?

Whenever severe weather is expected, the C-OPS sea

cable should be disconnected from the cable coming from

the deck box and dummy plugs affixed to the free ends

of both cables. The resulting slack in the cable coming

from the deck box should be coiled up and cable tied to

a permanent fixture. Then the cable bucket and C-OPS

basket should be stowed indoors and secured.

Exercise 8.3 How should the solar reference be stowed

if severe weather is anticipated?

In the event of severe weather, the BioMAST should be

retracted. The cable from the deck box should be removed

from the solar reference subsystem and dummy plugs affixed to the exposed bulkhead connector and the free end

of the disconnected cable. The resulting slack in the cable

coming from the deck box should be coiled up and cable

tied to a permanent fixture. The radiometer should be

capped, and the solar reference subsystem unscrewed from

the 1 in pipe it is affixed to, and stored indoors.

Exercise 9.0 If a cap is lost, what is a good substitute

that can be obtained or fashioned in the field?

A replacement cap can be fashioned using some lintfree cloth, aluminum foil, and black vinyl tape. The most

difficult caps to replace are for radiance instruments, because on the C-OPS backplane and BioSCAN frame, these

apertures have the least amount of exposed areas in their

mounting systems. Consequently, if a radiance cap is the

one that is lost, the irradiance cap should be moved to the

radiance aperture in question and an irradiance replacement made.

To fashion the cap, cut a piece of cloth that is about

10 in (25.4 cm) square. Black or dark-colored cloth is preferred, but not required. Cover one half of one side of the

75
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

cloth with successive applications of lapped vinyl electrical

tape, wherein each application is longer than the cloth, so

the tape ends can be folded over the cloth ends. Roll the

cloth loosely around the instrument with the vinyl side laid

against the housing. Position the cloth cylinder such that

it projects beyond the aperture, and then fold the extra

cloth over the aperture. Tape the exposed outer cloth using vinyl electrical tape by applying it in successive lapped

layers, being careful not to apply the tape too tightly, so

the cap can be reliably positioned and removed.

Complete the cap by over wrapping all surfaces with

aluminum foil. Cover the aperture end with overlapping

layers of tape, and then finish the taping with a long circular application of overlapping tape layers from the bottom

of the cap to the aperture end. Additional taping can be

added to increase the relative stiffness of the cap. The cap

should fit on with a bit of resistance, but not be difficult

to slide on.

Exercise 9.1 What is a another name for self-fusing

tape?

Self-fusing tape is also known as self-vulcanizing, or simply vulcanizing, tape. Vulcanization, in this context, is the

process whereby the tape hardens to provide the needed

final elasticity, strength, and stability properties without

the need for adding any secondary agents (e.g., chemicals

or heat).

Exercise 9.2 Why is containerizing spares and tools

important to successful problem solving?

During a field campaign, there is frequently a limited

amount of time between the onset of a problem and the

needed resolution before the next sampling opportunity.

This means problems necessarily require prompt solutions.

In this situation, time spent looking for tools or spares

is time that is wasted on not solving the problem, so a

sensible system that facilitates finding spares and tools is

an advantage.

Exercise 9.2.1 Why is it desirable that certain tools

appear in more than one tool inventory?

Any tool that is used for a multitude of tasks should be

present in more than one tool bag, because by definition,

its loss will be an inconvenience and one or more spares

are needed. The most recurring hand tool that is needed

with spares is a pair of diagonal cutters.

Exercise 9.2.2 How is a small cable tie used to secure

a shackle pin?

To keep a shackle pin from loosening, a small cable tie

is fed through the shackle pin eye and then it is looped

around the shackle pin and tightened (Fig. A6). For the

anticipated uses of shackles described here, the use of a

cable tie for immobilization is preferred over a stainless

steel wire, because a twisted wire usually produces very

sharp edges that can cut or puncture the skin.

Fig. A6. A small cable tie fed through the shackle

pin eye and looped around the shackle pin on the

C-OPS harness to prevent the shackle from coming

loose during deployments aboard the R/V Shearwater.

Exercise 9.2.3 Why is a handheld GPS useful even if

a BioGPS is part of the instrumentation?

The handheld GPS is used to set UTC time on the data

acquisition computer (at least on a daily basis) and for

geolocation coordinates if the BioGPS is not part of the

reference subsystem. Even if a BioGPS is available, it is

not always easy to set the computer clock with the BioGPS

display in the data acquisition environment (although it is

possible with practice).

Exercise 9.2.4 If an underwater cable is damaged, why

is it important to not deploy it to depth?

An underwater cable that is damaged should not be deploy to depth, because the increased pressure might force

water into the interior wraps of the cable, which will waterlog it (make it heavier) and possibly lead to corrosion.

If a cable is damaged at depth and then brought to the

surface, any repairs will have to include an investigation

as to how for water penetrated into the cable above and

below the point of damage. In many case, a significant

amount of cable will have to be thrown away to remove

the water logged portions.

Exercise 9.2.5 What is a cable pigtail?

A cable pigtail is a short length of cable, usually 18 in

(0.5 m) long, with a connector at one end. A pigtail is also

referred to as a whip and is intended to be used to repair

the end of a damaged cable or create an unanticipated

cabling configuration.

Exercise 9.3 Why are daily activities so important to

routine maintenance?

Daily activities are important to routine maintenance

because they provide a recurring opportunity to inspect

the equipment and determine if repairs are necessary.

76
S.B. Hooker

Exercise 9.3.1 What other sources of airborne particulates can be deposited on the solar reference aperture?

Other sources of airborne particulates that can be deposited on the solar reference aperture include, but are

not limited to, the following: a) most large vessels have

an incinerator and the burning of trash can add to the

amount of soot deposits; b) there are areas of the world

ocean wherein plumes of desert dust are transported out

to sea and these deposits can be significant (they are frequently easily identified by their red-brown color); c) in

coastal areas deposits from industrial areas can be substantial; and d) the sea surface, especially when breaking

waves and white caps are present, is a recurring source of

particles. Consequently, if an instrument aperture is not

collecting data, it should be kept capped to ensure cleanliness.

Exercise 9.3.2 Why are threads that fasten dissimilar

metals greased with Dow 111?

Threads that fasten dissimilar metals should be greased

with Dow 111, because it is a dielectric compound, which

means it will help prevent the galvanic corrosion that takes

place between dissimilar metals.

Exercise 9.3.3 What are some cautions that must be

observed when removing fasteners that have held fast

for a long time without being tightened or loosened?

A fastener held fast for a long time may be partially

seized, which means the head of the fastener can round

out when the tool to remove the fastener is used. It is

important to grip the tool being used firmly, and apply a

strong downward pressure, before attempting to loosen the

fastener. If the fastener does not initially release, an anticorrosion and rust breaking lubricant should be applied

to the fastener, e.g., Break Free CLP (Safariland, Jacksonville, Florida), and a sufficient amount of time needs

to be provided for the lubricant to work into the threads.

If possible, the lubricant should be applied at more than

one point (e.g., if the fastener is through bolted, lubricant should also be applied at the end of the through-bolt

threaded hole and the end of the fastener.

Exercise 9.4 Why should scratched anodized aluminum

be painted promptly?

Anodized aluminum should be painted promptly if it

is scratched, because the freshly exposed metal will become the point for galvanic corrosion for the entire piece

of metal.

Exercise 9.5 Why is a scratched aperture a concern?

A scratch on an aperture creates uncharacterized scattering of light. Depending on the severity of the scratch,

it can invalidate the calibration of the instrument.

Exercise 9.6 What is another safe technique for measuring signals on female sockets?

A smaller conductor, like a paper clip or smaller gauge

solid wire, can be attached to the voltmeter probe, e.g., by

using a wire with alligator clips on the ends.

Exercise 9.7 What is a common mistake when applying

heat-shrink tubing that must be avoided for splices that

will be submerged to depth?

When heat-shrink tubing is applied it is important to apply the heat starting at one end, and then slowing working

towards the other end. If this is not done, air bubbles can

be trapped inside the tubing. When a bubble is subject to

pressure at depth, water can ingress into the collapsing air

volume.

Exercise 10.0 How does labeling the contents of boxes

aid demobilization?

Labeling the contents of boxes aids the demobilization

process, because it provides guidance as to what equipment should be packed in which containers. This can save

time, which is frequently needed, because modern field

campaigns frequently have inadequate time allotted for demobilization.

Exercise 11.0 What other activity should be synchronized with long-term storage?

It is advantageous to conduct all periodic maintenance

prior to long-term storage. This will ensure the equipment

is in a known state of serviceability at the time of storage, which means corrosion during storage (if any) can be

properly assessed.

Exercise 12.0 Why are the limits and cautions of a

small craft advisory useful to understand even on a large

deployment platform?

A small craft advisory is useful to understand even on a

large deployment platform, because it indicates a sea state

that will likely be hazardous for instrument deployments.

Whenever a small craft advisory occurs, personnel should

exercise extra caution regardless of the size of the deployment platform.

Exercise 12.1 If the tow vehicle meets all trailering

requirements except the tow ball is not at the correct

height above the ground, what is a possible solution?

If the trailer hitch uses a removable (rather than fixed)

receiver, an adjustable receiver can be used instead, and

the correct height selected from the range of possibilities.

Exercise 12.2 If the vehicle mirrors are used for backing up a trailer, what precaution should be followed in

regards to steering the vehicle?

77
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

Backing up a trailer can be confusing, because the steering wheel must be turned opposite to the desired turning of

the trailer, i.e., if the steering wheel is turned to the right

(CW), the end of the trailer will track to the left (and vice

versa). If this process is executed while looking through

the vehicle mirrors it can be doubly confusing. The precaution that should be followed is to make small course

corrections until sufficient experience is gained.

Exercise 12.3 What is one of the difficulties of using

safety equipment on a small boat?

Small boats are frequently cramped and wet, so safety

equipment must frequently be stowed to protect it, which

makes it less accessible.

Exercise 12.3.1 What common accident might render

an inflatable PFD ineffective for the person wearing it?

If a person wearing a PFD is knocked unconscious and falls overboard, it is unlikely the

PFD will function as intended.

Exercise 12.3.2 Although designed for safety purposes,

what are some posed by fire extinguishers?

Halon fire extinguishing agents may cause toxic

fumes or be lethal; halon discharged in closed

spaces consumes the available oxygen and persons should

be evacuated immediately; and CO2 is discharged at subzero temperatures and the operator may be injured if contact is made with the horn of a portable CO2 extinguisher.

Exercise 12.3.3 What is a sensible use for an expired

VDS?

An expired VDS may be retained as additional backup,

or used for inland waters (in some states).

Exercise 12.3.4 For small-boat operations, what commonly available sound signaling device can be used?

An athletic whistle is an acceptable signaling device for

small-boat operations.

Exercise 12.3.5 What are the operating requirements

for a small boat having installed lights that are not required?

If lights are installed on a boat that does not require

them, they must work properly.

Exercise 12.3.6 What is a kill-switch mechanism?

A kill switch is an engine ignition switch wherein the key

can be removed at any position. If the engine is running

when the key is pulled out, the engine immediately stops.

For this feature to be useful, the boat operator usually

wears a lanyard looped around a wrist with the other end

of the lanyard attached to the key.

If the boat operator is knocked down—perhaps

overboard—the engine stops.

Exercise 12.4 If a separate 12 VDC AGM battery is

brought for the optical sampling, should it be kept separate or wired to the starting battery for the engine?

In terms of boating safety, it is advisable to

not use the designated starting battery for any

other purpose other than starting the engine.

If the capacity of the starting battery and second battery

are high, the two can usually be wired together for a single

battery having greater capacity. The advantage of this

approach is that when the engine is running and providing

a charge, both batteries will be charged.

Two batteries can be connected either in series or in

parallel (Fig. A7). When wired in series, the net voltage is

the sum of the two batteries, whereas the capacity is the

average of the two; when wired in parallel, the voltage is

the average of the two batteries, and the capacity is the

sum.

Fig. A7. The two standard configurations for connecting two batteries: a) in series (left), and b) in

parallel (right).

For the case of adding a second battery to a small boat,

the two batteries should have comparable capabilities (i.e.,

both should be starting or deep cycle batteries), similar capacities (i.e., the same VA or Ah ratings), and they should

be wired in parallel (Fig. A7b). This allows both batteries

to be charged when the motor is used. Although there is

a risk for draining both batteries with excessive data acquisition, this is easy to prevent for the type of sampling

documented here, wherein data collection is over a very

short time period (usually less than 30 min).

Exercise 12.5 How can the requirement for proper trash

disposal aboard a vessel be used to advantage?

Use a container that can be draped over or positioned

on top of other equipment to provide water proofing.

Exercise 12.6 What is a disadvantage of the bar-stool

surface reference mounting system?

A disadvantage of the bar-stool surface reference mounting system is the presence of the four stabilizing lines,

which can interfere with operations inside the boat, although Fig. 39 shows this disadvantage can frequently be

accommodated.

78
S.B. Hooker

Exercise 12.7 Why is it important to launch a boat as

unloaded as practical?

It is important to launch a boat as unloaded as practicable, because it will float free from the trailer sooner. This

means the trailer does not have to be backed as far into

the water and the vehicle will be far enough up the boat

ramp to have good traction.

Exercise 12.8 What is a common restriction on boat

handling within a marine facility, channel, or bridge?

When navigating in a marine facility, a channel, or under

a bridge, the boat operator should adhere to a speed that

is slow enough to leave “No Wake” (which is frequently

posted for these circumstances).

Exercise 12.8.1 What is the memory mnemonic regarding navigation markers and a vessel returning to

the dock?

When a vessel is returning to the dock, red navigation

markers are on the starboard (right) side of the boat or

red right returning.

Exercise 12.8.2 Given the description of a small boat

for this document, what priority will typically be assigned to a small boat for right-of-way purposes?

A small boat as described herein will typically have the

lowest priority and must yield the right of way under most

circumstances.

Exercise 12.8.3 If the shortest course to the nearest

harbor results in a rough ride and water splashing into

the boat, what should the boat operator do?

If the shortest course to the nearest harbor results in

a rough ride and water splashing into the boat, the boat

operator should fall off the desired course and follow a

course that is in the general direction of the harbor, but

that provides a smoother ride and less water splashing into

the vessel. At some point, the operator will have to turn

away from the desired course and tack towards the harbor

until the smoother course can be aligned with the harbor

entrance. In some cases, more than one tacking maneuver

will be required.

Exercise 12.9 What is the best position for the person operating the C-OPS backplane during small-boat

operations, in terms of the stability of the vessel?

The C-OPS backplane is typically deployed, positioned

away from the vessel, and recovered with the operator

standing up. Once casts are commenced it is advantageous

for the operator to be seated, because it creates less ship

motion, which is beneficial for the solar reference measurements and the data acquisition computer operator.

Exercise 12.9.1 If only two people are available for

small-boat operations, what are the safest assignments

for the three tasks involved (boat handling, instrument

operation, and software control)?

If the boat can be anchored, the boat does not have

to be steered, so one person can deploy and recover the

instrumentation, and the other person can operate the data

acquisition software.

If the boat cannot be anchored, one person must handle

the boat and the other person must deal with the data

acquisition, as well as instrument deployment and recovery.

A recommended set of procedures, based on a slow descent

rate for the profiler (i.e., a terminal velocity of 15 cm s−1

or less) is as follows:

1. Start recording the data.

2. Deploy the backplane and float it away from the

deployment platform.

3. Once the backplane is far enough away to avoid platform perturbations, pull out the amount of cable

equal to the desired depth from the cable bucket.

4. Release the cable and as the profiler descends, estimate the amount of cable used since the release as

a proxy for the depth of the profiler and verify this

corresponds with the amount of cable pulled from

the bucket (i.e., the cable out of the bucket should

be consumed when the desired depth is reached).

5. Pull the profiler back to the surface and repeat the

process for as many times as needed (usually three

times).

6. Recover the profiler and stop recording the data.

This scenario assumes the single data file can be split into

the requisite number of individual casts, which should usually be three.

Exercise 12.9.2 In areas of high heterogeneity or if

the desired three casts cannot be obtained quickly, how

should the sampling strategy be modified?

In areas of high heterogeneity or if the desired three casts

cannot be obtained quickly, a second set of three casts is

advised after the water sample, so the optical sampling

temporally brackets the water sample.

Exercise 12.10 What should be the course of action if

one of the trailer lights stops working after being submerged to launch or retrieve the boat?

If a trailer light stops functioning as a result of being

immersed in water, remove the lens, remove the bulb and

verify it is not blown (if it is blown, replace it), and then

rinse the bulb and interior of the light assembly with fresh

water. Wipe everything dry and inspect for corrosion. If

corrosion is present, scrape it loose, and rinse with freshwater, and wipe dry. Insert the bulb and test. If it does

not work, replace the bulb.

79
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

Appendix B

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)

FAQ 1. What are the principal differences between the

C-OPS and a legacy rocket-shaped profiler?

The C-OPS instrumentation represents a significant improvement over legacy profilers which are not suitable for

shallow-water sampling or for determining the optical properties of near-surface waters. The C-OPS backplane was

designed from inception specifically to operate in shallow

coastal waters while maintaining an equal capability to

sample in the deep ocean (Hooker et al. 2010a).

In terms of the mechanics of operating the instrumentation and its behavior during descent, the most significant

improvement was to change the basic design for mounting

the light sensors from a rocket-shaped deployment system,

used in legacy profilers, to the kite-shaped backplane. This

change allowed the flotation to be distributed as a primary

hydrobaric buoyancy chamber along the top of the profiler

(Fig. 7l), plus an adjustable secondary set of one or more

movable floats (Fig. 7m) and weights below (Fig. 7p).

The primary flotation set provides the upward buoyant

thrust to keep the profiler vertically oriented. The secondary set, coupled with an adjustment mechanism perpendicular to the flotation adjustment axis (Fig. 7h) is used

to ensure the two optical apertures are level. The hydrobaric buoyancy chamber can contain one to three air-filled

bladders, which compress slowly and allow the profiler to

loiter close to the sea surface, thereby significantly improving the vertical sampling resolution in near-surface waters

to 1 cm or less.

For deep-ocean sampling, three compressible bladders

are typically used, because once the bladders have compressed, the maximum amount of differential ballast is

available to drive the profiler downwards at a high terminal velocity (usually 25–50 cm s−1). A higher rate of

descent is attractive because it minimizes how much cable is consumed by horizontal advective processes rather

then vertical descent. In a shallow river, either less positive buoyancy is used (i.e., some weight is removed) or

a smaller number of bladders and less weight are used to

establish a smaller ballast differential (thereby achieving a

typical descent rate of 10–25 cm s−1).

With respect to a legacy profiler, C-OPS records greater

than a factor of 10 more samples in the near-surface 5,

10, and 15 m of the water column because of its surface

loitering, slower descent rate, and higher acquisition rate

(12–15 Hz versus 6 Hz or less). This means C-OPS sampling captures the high-frequency perturbations associated

with wave-focusing effects (Fig. B1), thereby minimizing

the aliasing normally encountered with legacy devices for

this phenomenon that can significantly degrade the ability to establish the extrapolation interval in near-surface

waters, particularly if the water is very clear. The high vertical resolution also means the presence of thin intrusive

layers (perhaps of freshwater origin from rivers or melting ice) are properly sampled for the first time in a freely

falling package.

Fig. B1. Wave focusing effects on the primary

flotation of the C-OPS backplane deployed from the

R/V John Le Conte in Lake Tahoe.

From an electronics point of view, the biggest difference

between C-OPS and legacy instruments is the use of microradiometers (Booth et al. 2010) to build the optical instruments. The microradiometer approach established—for

the first time in oceanographic optical instrumentation—a

single-instrument design with inherent flexibility and dynamic range (10 decades) as to be scalable across all the

sampling requirements for both above- and in-water AOP

measurements (Morrow et al. 2010c).

A microradiometer has components so small they must

be machine assembled. The outer diameter of 1.1 cm is

set by the photodetector, and after the fore optics and

metal shielding are applied the overall length is 9.6 cm.

Automated production with conformal coating of the electronics removes almost all of the instrument-to-instrument

performance variability that had plagued handmade legacy

instruments.

FAQ 2. What are the quantitative electrocution effects

for a man exposed to 60 Hz AC current?

The sensitivity to electrocution effects for AC current

is more pronounced than for DC current, in terms of the

thresholds for which the same quantitative effects are experienced (Sect. 2.2). For a man exposed to 60 Hz AC current, the approximate quantitative effects are as follows:

0.5 mA A slight sensation (tingling) on the hand is felt;

1 mA The perception threshold, i.e., the accepted maximum harmless current, is reached;

5 mA A shock with no loss of muscular control occurs;

9 mA A painful shock with 50% loss of muscular control

is experienced;

15 mA The “let-go threshold” (i.e., the current value

above which a person is unable to release an electrically energized source because of involuntary

muscle contractions) is reached; and

80
S.B. Hooker

35 mA A painful and severe shock with difficulty breathing and more than 99% loss of muscular control

is experienced.

The quantitative effects of AC current thresholds for a

woman are about 70% of a man.

FAQ 3. Explain the truth and fallacy of the old adage,

“It is not the voltage that kills, it is the current.”

Electric current can burn tissue, create a loss

of muscular control (which can result in other

injuries, including broken bones), and cause cardiac arrest

or arrhythmias†.

Current can only enter the body, however, if the amount

of voltage applied between two points on the body is sufficient to allow electrons to flow between the two points

despite the resistance of body parts to oppose the flow of

electrons. In an electrical shock, the amount of electrical

current (in amps) that flows through a body of constant

resistance (in ohms) increases when the voltage (in volts)

increases. This is a restatement of Ohm’s law, I = V /R,

where I is current, V is voltage, and R is resistance.

Following Ohm’s Law, anything that lowers the resistance of the body (e.g, wet skin or an open wound) or

enhances current flow (e.g., metal jewelry) will increase

the current if the voltage remains constant. Similarly, the

higher the voltage available to cause electrons to flow, the

more readily they will flow through any given amount of

resistance and the more likely the current level will be high

enough to be harmful.

Consequently, the danger of high voltage is it

represents a potential for large amounts of current to pass through the body, which can injure or kill. A

worst-case scenario is a shock between the hands, because

the current path from one hand to the other is across the

heart and lungs.

A common practice to protect the heart when working around a live circuit is to use only one hand and to

place the other in a pocket. The right hand is preferred,

because most people are right handed and the heart is left

of center in the chest cavity. The best protection against

shock from a live circuit is resistance, and resistance can

be added through the use of insulated tools and clothing

(e.g., gloves and boots), but they must not provide a secondary conduction pathway (e.g., from water) to be fully

effective. Resistances are additive, so by Ohm’s law, an

increase in resistance will lower the current that can flow

for a particular voltage source.

† The heart has an internal electrical system controlling the

rate and rhythm of the heartbeat. An electric shock can create problems with this electrical system resulting in abnormal heart rhythms (arrhythmias) or the heart suddenly not

beating (cardiac arrest). There are many types of arrhythmias, wherein the heart can beat too fast, too slow, or irregularly. Some arrhythmias can cause the heart to stop pumping

blood. If the blood cannot carry oxygen to the brain, brain

death occurs in about 3–4 min. Normal heart rhythm is restored with another electric shock, from a defibrillator.

FAQ 4. How is it possible to tell which end of a mated

cable connection goes to the deck box?

The deck box provides power, so the cable end coming from the deck box will have a female connector so it

can safely supply power. When two cables are mated, one

side will have a female connector with female locking sleeve

(i.e., it will be FS/FG) and the other will have a male connector with male locking sleeve (i.e., it will be MP/MR).

The female half of the mated pair is identified by the larger

locking sleeve, as shown in Fig. 4 (bottom) and Fig. B2,

and this connector leads back to the deck box. Consequently, in Fig. B5, the cable leading back to the deck box

is the one with the small reveal of orange tape on the left

side of the figure.

Female Male

Fig. B2. Two mated connectors with the female

connector on the left and the male connector on the

right aboard the R/V Tethys II.

FAQ 5. What are the components and types of stainless

steel and why do they not rust?

The “stainless steel” designation is a misnomer, because the material is not made from steel—it is an ironbased metal that has at least 10.5% chromium. Other alloying elements, e.g., nickel, molybdenum, and manganese,

are added to achieve specific corrosion resistance and physical properties. The combinations of the different alloys

results in over 100 different kinds of stainless steel.

Only a few of the stainless steel grades are routinely

used, however, with 304 SS being the most popular grade.

The 300 series designation indicates the grade is composed

basically of 18% chromium and 8% nickel. Consequently,

304 SS is also referred to as 18-8 SS or 18/8 SS. It is sufficiently corrosion resistant for common applications, is not

magnetic, and cannot be hardened by heat treatment.

The next most popular grade of stainless steel is 316 SS,

which contains a lesser amount of chromium (16%), but a

greater amount of nickel (10%) and an additional amount

of molybdenum (2%). The added alloying with respect

to 304 SS increases the resistance to salt corrosion, which

makes 316 SS very suitable for marine applications. To ensure quality and protection for the consumer, all products

made with 316 SS must be marked “316” by the manufacturer.

The 400 series has less corrosion resistance than the

300 series. These stainless steels contain only one alloy,

chromium, and are magnetic. The chromium content of

81
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

the three principal types are 16% (430 SS), 11.5% (410 SS),

and 10.5% (409 SS).

Stainless steel does not rust, i.e., the red iron oxide

discoloration that is normally seen on carbon steel is not

present, because stainless steel contains chromium and has

a very low carbon content (compared to mild steel). The

chromium combines with airborne oxygen to form a very

adherent surface film that resists further oxidation. No

iron is oxidized, so no red rust is present.

FAQ 6. Can the cabling assignments for the two ports on

the deck box be switched (i.e., can the sea cable

be attached to port 2 and the solar reference to

port 1?

From the perspective of the deck box, cable assignments to the deck box ports can be reversed without harming any of the instrumentation and without compromising

the ability of the deck box to determine the correct operating voltage for the cable lengths associated with either

port.

Some acquisition software, however, may require the

port assignments to be correct as a way of determining incorrect configurations of the instrumentation, so it is advisable to connect the cabling to the labeled port assignments.

As shown in Fig. B3, it is helpful to use color coding on

the deck box and cabling to facilitate correct connections

to the deck box and this practice should be continued all

the way to the instrument bulkhead or Y-cable (as appropriate).

Fig. B3. Cable connections to the deck box with

port 1 (underwater) labeled blue and port 2 (surface) labeled orange aboard the R/V Hakuho Maru.

FAQ 7. How long can a C-OPS configured with three 19-

channel Ed, Lu, and Ed(0+) instruments, plus a

BioSHADE and BioGPS, operate on the deck box

battery?

Longevity of battery operations depends more exactly

on the total length of the cables and the number of times

the BioSHADE accessory is used (which consumes the most

power). For a 150 m sea cable and 25 m reference cable,

the deck box battery will power the optical subsystems for

approximately 5 hr at a 100% duty cycle.

FAQ 8. What can be used to protect the sea cable from

chaffing, when it is hauled in over the gunwale of

a ship?

Most vessels wherein this is likely to be a problem will

have a roller assembly that can be mounted on the gunwale.

The assembly provides perpendicular rollers that provides

curvature at the edge of the gunwale and motion to absorb

the strain of pulling on the cable (Fig. B4). If such a

device is not available, a suitable synthetic material that

allows the cable to move easily without binding on the

metal gunwale can help protect the cable.

Fig. B4. A roller assembly to protect line or cable

when hauled aboard the TR/V Oshoro Maru.

FAQ 9. What does wave focusing and ship shadow look

like in an optical profile, so the latter can be recognized during data acquisition and the cast repeated if so contaminated?

Wave focusing is represented in an optical profile as

high amplitude light-to-dark excursions in the data, for

which the amplitude of the phenomenon decreases with

depth. Although it might look like noise, wave focusing is

not noise, because the light and dark flashes are not the

result of a signal-to-noise problem, they are the correct

record of a real phenomenon. Ship shadow appears as a

typically large extent of anomalously darkened data that

ultimately brightens with depth and the profile resumes a

normal decay.

If the ship-shadow contamination begins at the surface,

the profile will steadily brighten until the profiler reaches a

depth wherein there is no ship shadow, and then a typical

decay will resume. The depth interval where ship shadow

is replaced by normal decay is characterized by a reversal

in the spectral Kd values from negative to positive values.

Figure B5 presents a portion of a PROSIT data processing display showing the upper 5 m of an Ed profile containing both wave focusing effects and ship shadow contamination. The wave focusing appears from 0–2 m, and

82
S.B. Hooker

the ship shadow starts a little before 3 m and extends a

little past 4 m. The black diagonal lines are the slopes of

the linear least-squares fit to the extrapolation intervals

established for red and blue-green wavelengths (left and

right, respectively). The ship shadow contamination cannot likely be explained by an unusual set of layers with

anomalous properties, because the temperature data (not

shown for clarity of the optical wavelengths) shows the upper 5 m was homogeneous.

Fig. B5. An example of wave focusing and ship

shadow contamination for the top 5 m of an Ed(λ)

profile obtained aboard the TR/V Oshoro Maru in

the Chukchi Sea. The temperature data are omitted and only a subset of wavelengths are shown for

clarity.

FAQ 10. How else have microradiometers been used to

create new instrument systems?

Since being field commissioned in 2009, microradiometers have been used in the following COTS instruments:

a) the above- and in-water BioSCAN and C-OPS, respectively (documented here); b) the in-water Impacts of Climate on Ecosystems Profiler (ICE-Pro); c) the above-water

and laboratory instruments for the Optical Sensors for

Planetary Radiant Energy (OSPREy) activity; and d) the

airborne Coastal Airborne In-situ Radiometer (C-AIR),

which was flight certified by NASA aboard the Center for

Interdisciplinary Remotely-Piloted Aircraft Studies (CIRPAS) Twin Otter aircraft.

The microradiometer architecture facilitates hybridization with another technology. For example, a principal

oboective of the OSPREy project was to integrate a microradiometer cluster of 19 or 18 wavebands (depending on

the radiance or irradiance model) with a spectrograph to

form the first so-called hybridspectral instrument, thereby

capitalizing on the best features of both technologies.

The microradiometer has also been used to expand

AOP systems to include a novel inherent optical properties (IOPs) hybridmetric instrument, the Transfluorometer Two-Emission Extension (TF2E). The TF2E uses a

small LED in a form factor and firmware configuration

compatible with a microradiometer to provide an excitation wavelength, and the emission of the water volume is

measured with two traditional microradiometers (in the

radiance configuration) .

The use of one or more compatible LED microradiometers has been proposed for bio-fouling mitigation in longerduration deployments of optical instruments as part of

the Passive and Active Radiometers for Advanced Light,

Ecosystem, and Littoral Studies (PARALELS) project. In

this application the LED operates on an appropriate duty

cycle to prevent bio-fouling.

A hybrid microradiometer technology is presently under development as part of the Ocean Color Underwater Low Light Advanced Radiometer (OCULLAR) Project

that pairs a silicon photodetector (SiP) microradiometer

with a photomultiplier tube (PMT) mirroradiometer, as

shown in Fig. B6. The resulting hybridnamic multitector

increases the paired sensitivity an estimated six additional

decades, with two decades overlapping, yielding 14 decades

of linear dynamic range in a form factor compatible with

standard microradiometers.

Fig. B6. A concept schematic of an OCULLAR hybridnamic multitector instrument with a cluster of

eight smaller SiP microradiometers in the interior,

seven of which are paired to the slightly larger PMT

microradiometers on the exterior circle. The small

round left-most (green) boards are the so-called aggregators that allow the cluster of paired SiP and

PMT microradiometers to be controlled as a solitary device.

Low-light measurements (Fig. A2) have the potential to

expand the temporal and geographic capabilities of NASA

missions to include historically undersampled regimes, e.g.,

large solar zenith angles or high latitudes late or early in

the year. The large-angle domain is also relevant to the

viewing geometry problems that will need to be addressed

for geostationary missions, such as GEO-CAPE, so the research associated with deriving high-quality data products

at large angles has a broader relevance.

Increasing the dynamic range of the in situ instruments

will overcome present limitations and allow the pursuit of

unprecedented new science. For example, diurnal processes

in the ocean and atmosphere can be studied optically using

moonlight as the light source. The ability to make low-light

83
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

measurements means high latitude processes can be investigated during the substantial time of the year when illumination is restricted to twilight, moonlight, or low solar

elevations. Other areas of new research using OCULLAR

sensors include the study of coral spawning, plankton vertical migration, bioluminescence, and light-dependent predation (e.g., by tuna and squid).

FAQ 11. What is a chinese finger, what does it look like,

and how does it function?

A chinese finger is a woven lacing strung securely over

a cable with crossings that increase in distance from one

another away from the cinch point. The cinch point usually

has a loop with a shackle, and when tension is applied to

the shackle, the lacings tighten on the cable, becoming

tighter as tension is increased.

For C-OPS, a chinese finger is used to prevent tensile

forces being applied to the connector and locking sleeve on

the Y-cable connected to the sea cable on the backplane.

This is accomplished by transferring the load from the sea

cable to the backplane harness which is connected to the

chinese finger using a shackle (Fig. B7).

Fig. B7. The chinese finger on a C-OPS sea cable

deployed from a small inflatable launched from the

R/V SRV-X into the Chesapeake Bay.

To ensure the sea cable below the chinese finger does

not come under tension, a range of motion for the slackened sea cable is required, which results in a catenary that

is visible in Fig. B7 as a drooping loop of red sea cable.

The details of the chinese finger are not readily discernible

in Fig. B7, but the mesh-like details of the chinese finger

material is visible in Fig. A6, which shows a close up of the

shackle connected to the two harness straps. The amount

of cable in the catenary must be appropriately minimized

so the weight of the shackle does not pull it into the FOV

of the radiance radiometer.

FAQ 12. What is a simple way to create a flexible spar

and add weight to it?

A large reusable cable tie, i.e., one wherein the head

has a releasable lock for the tape, can be used to create a

flexible spar. In this case, the tape end is pushed through

the spar fitting point (Fig. 4q) and the head end is blocked.

Large stainless steel nuts wrapped in black vinyl electrical

tape can be used as weights, which are secured to the flexible spar by two reusable cable tie heads (cut from two

other cable ties). Two cable tie heads are used for security. An example configuration of this approach is shown

in Fig. B8.

Fig. B8. The flexible spar on an early version of the

C-OPS backplane deployed from the ASB launched

from the USCGC Healy in the Chukchi Sea.

The stainless steel nuts are not in the FOV of the radiance sensor, but if they are not covered in black tape,

they can scatter light into the FOV, so it is important to

blacken them in some fashion. As described in Sect. 3.3,

an advantage of this approach is it increases the righting

response of the backplane, because the lower weights apply

a downward stabilizing force.

FAQ 13. What additional information regarding the atmosphere can be derived from BioSHADE measurements (depending on how the measurements

are made and their frequency of collection)?

The main purpose of the BioSHADE accessory is to

provide measurements of the optical properties of the atmosphere and, in particular, to allow the calculation of

the direct-horizontal and direct-normal spectral irradiance

(i.e., the irradiance on a horizontal plane from direct solar

illumination). Langley plots from irradiance data collected

with the BioSHADE accessory can also be used to determine the extraterrestrial direct-normal irradiance and the

aerosol optical depth.

FAQ 14. When cable is flaked onto the deck of a deployment platform, what does it look like and why

is it done?

84
S.B. Hooker

Cable is flaked onto the deck of a deployment platform

in anticipation of a deployment scenario requiring the immediate use of a long length of cable that must go over

the side quickly without entanglement. For example, if

the C-OPS instrument is pushed away from a ship using

turbulence from a thruster, the profiler will rapidly move

away from the ship once the thruster is activated, which

means a long length of cable is needed to ensure maximum

benefit from the thruster is obtained.

The flaking of cable is usually accomplished by laying

the needed length of cable in long lines formed into parallel loops (Fig. B9). Lines are used rather than coils, because the lines can be quickly confirmed to be tangle free,

whereas coils cannot. Also, the lines give notice to deck

personnel to stay clear of the area and, thus, the cable.

Fig. B9. The C-OPS instrument awaiting deployment (upper left) with the sea cable flaked onto the

deck of the TR/V Oshoro Maru in the Bering Sea.

In rough seas, flaked cable can move, pile up, and be

difficult to handle smoothly as the ship pitches and rolls.

This is not as limiting as it sounds, because at some point

operations are too rough for hand deployment of the profiler and deck operations will be suspended.

FAQ 15. What commands can be sent from a terminal

(or serial communications) interface to confirm

a fault is with the acquisition software and not

the instrumentation?

If there is concern that there might be a fault with

the system, all components should be powered down and

restarted, including the data acquisition computer. Each

component should be monitored during the power-up sequence to detect any anomalies. For the deck box, Sect.

7.2.1 should be consulted to confirm the messages on the

deck box display are as anticipated for the system.

If the fault condition persists, the ensuing steps can be

used to determine if the fault is not with the instrumentation and, thus, likely with the acquisition software.

1. Use a terminal emulation software program, wherein

an RS-232 serial connection is made from a computer

terminal (or console) to the deck box. The command

and control parameters should be set as follows for

the selected communications port on the computer:

115,200 bits per second (baud rate);

8 data bits;

No parity bit (i.e., none);

1 stop bit; and

No flow control (i.e., none).

2. Send >0E! to the deck box and the reply should be

<0E. If there is no reply, confirm that the terminal

is accepting key strokes. The terminal might not be

accepting key strokes because of one or more of the

following:

a) a difference in the required baud rate and the bits

per second value being used;

b) a bad console cable; or

c) the scroll lock option is enabled on the keyboard

(if present, make sure the scroll lock key is disabled on the keyboard).

3. Probe each instrument using the >I! command,

wherein the “” character is replaced with an instrument address number of 0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, or 8

corresponding to the following with the reply also

given for 19-channel radiometers (the typical case)

with pressure transducer, water temperature sensor,

BioGPS, and BioSHADE:

0 The deck box, reply <0I,6,123578;

1 The EdZ instrument (in-water downward irradiance), reply <1I,19,ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRS;

2 The LuZ instrument (in-water upwelling radiance),

reply <1I,19,ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRS;

3 The Ed0 instrument (above-water solar reference),

reply <3I,21,ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRS[], where [ is

pressure and ] is water temperature;

5 The CAPS instrument (in-water temperature and

conductivity accessory), reply >5I,3,CDS;

7 The GPS instrument (BioGPS), reply <7I,1,\@;

and

8 The Shad instrument (BioSHADE accessory), reply <8I,1,/.

If the anticipated reply is not received for any of the instrument components, there is a fault condition with that

component that must be resolved.

FAQ 16. Can the C-OPS backplane be used in extreme

environments?

The C-OPS backplane has been used successfully in

waters with very low salinity and temperatures (e.g., the

Arctic Mackenzie River estuary), as well as very high salinity and temperatures (e.g., the Great Salt Lake) with no

discernible degradation in data quality. For the latter, a

large amount of weight was added along the bottom of the

backplane to counter the extra buoyancy of the hypersaline

water mass (Fig. B10).

85
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

Fig. B10. A closeup of a portion of the C-OPS

backplane as configured for sampling in the Great

Salt Lake aboard R/V Recon 18 showing the large

amount of weight used: one large weight plus several smaller weights on the left and two large weights

on the right.

The requirement for negative (positive) buoyancy in

hypersaline (fresh) water masses need not be accomplished

solely by adding (removing) weight; it is equally effective

to remove (add) flotation. This duality allows for a fine

tuning of buoyancy, because of the different sizes provided

in the weight and flotation discs. If the addition or removal

of buoyancy unbalances the roll of the profiler, either flotation or weight discs can be moved along the roll axis (Fig.

22) to restore a balanced orientation during descent.

FAQ 17. What are sensible rules to follow for standard

and nonstandard cable configurations?

Nonstandard C-OPS and BioSCAN cabling configurations could have deleterious unintended consequences,

so caution is warranted whenever new cabling scenarios are

contemplated.

This overarching cautionary statement is true for all

nonstandard uses of Y-cables and especially true if the

BioSHADE instrument is involved (Exercise 6.3.2). The

latter extra caution is warranted, because the voltage regulator in the BioSHADE that supplies the outputs for the

other instruments (i.e., the BioGPS and solar reference)

must handle the excess voltage drop from the elevated

BioSHADE input voltage to the desired lower voltage for

all other aggregator types. The inclusion of any additional

load will result in additional power dissipation (heat) and

likely either damage the output regulator or force it into

thermal shutdown.

The use of a Y-cable at the deck box is ill-advised—

even without a BioSHADE—if the cable runs for

each branch have dramatically different lengths or loads.

For example, a 5 m run to a single irradiance instrument, and a 300 m run to three underwater instruments

is an unbalanced load. The deck box power adjustment

routine works by finding the lowest reported aggregator

voltage and setting its voltage. For the in-water above example, it is conceivable that the instrument at the end of

the 5 m run will either be exposed to excess voltage or at

least have its voltage regulators stressed as they attempt

to dissipate the undesired voltage overhead.

Consequently, sensible rules for all cable configurations

are as follows:

1. The cable run for the C-OPS profiler should be limited to 350 m and can support two or three instruments.

The BioSHADE cannot be connected to this

cable run.

2. The cable run for the BioSCAN is limited to 350 m

and can support two or three instruments.

The BioSHADE cannot be connected to this

cable run.

3. The cable run for the solar reference is limited to

125 m and can support the BioSHADE, BioGPS, and

an irradiance instrument.

4. A Y-cable is only to be used at the instrument end of

a cable run, and each branch of the Y-cable should

be less than 5 m in length.

5. If required to overcome an unanticipated cable failure, up to five instruments can be operated from a

single deck box port with a cable run of up to 200 m

by using multiple Y-cables at the instrument end of

the cable run, taking care to observe rule 4 above.

6. If necessary to overcome an unanticipated cable failure, the output of a deck box port may be connected

to a Y-cable with branch runs of greater than 5 m

only if the relative loads and cable lengths of each

branch are balanced.

No branch of the cable run should exceed

200 m, no more than five instruments total

can be connected, and the BioSHADE cannot be connected to this cable run.

Considering rule 6 in more detail, a single deck box port

could be connected to a Y-cable with a short adapter cable,

and then a 100 m sea cable with two instruments could be

run from one branch of the Y, and a 100 m deployment cable with a BioGPS and an irradiance instrument could be

run on the other branch (100 m times two instruments on

each branch is a balanced load). Alternatively, a 50 m sea

cable with two instruments could be run from one branch

of the Y, and a 100 m deployment cable with a single irradiance instrument could be run on the other branch (50 m

times two instruments equals 100 m times 1 instrument,

and is a balanced load).

Load and cable length products that are not balanced to within 10% must be avoided.

For example, a 200 m sea cable run with two instruments on one branch, and a 5 m interface cable with a

single irradiance instrument on the other branch is not balanced and must be avoided (200 m times 2 instruments is

greater than 5 m times 1 instrument, and is not balanced).

86
S.B. Hooker

FAQ 18. What are the advantages of C-PrOPS for deepand shallow-water sampling?

The recently commissioned C-PrOPS accessory (Fig.

A2) allows a C-OPS with state-of-the-art microradiometer

instruments to be steered from the deployment platform

(e.g., an anchored boat or shoreline) with two small digital

thrusters, thereby minimizing mixing. In deep waters, the

thrusters allow the C-OPS to be moved away from the large

ship without the need for time consuming ship maneuvers

or the negative consequences of propellor or thruster turbulence (Fig. A5). In shallow waters, the thrusters provide

the same advantages (Fig. 24) plus the ability to position

the profiler close to the shore without significantly stirring

up bottom sediment (Fig. B11).

High Visibility 

Cable for Turbid 

Waters has Video 

for Future Options 

C-OPS with C-PrOPS 

Accessory Steered 

Close to Shore in 

Pinto Lake 

Fig. B11. The steering of C-OPS close to the shore

in Pinto Lake (Watsonville, California) using the

C-PrOPS accessory from the anchored R/V Recon

18. The high-visibility cable has a video capability

for future imaging options.

A comparison of C-OPS with and without the C-PrOPS

accessory in the shallow waters of Elkhorn Slough (Monterey, California) verified the improved ability to collect

high-quality data using C-PrOPS in shallow waters. A direct and tangible expression of the improvement is how

long it took to collect the replicate casts at each station

and whether or not the extrapolation interval used to derive the water-leaving radiance had to be substantively

changed from one cast to the next at a particular station.

Before C-PrOPS, it took about about 17.6 min (on average) to collect 3–4 replicate casts, whereas with C-PrOPS,

5 replicate casts were obtained in 8.8 min (on average)—

a factor of 2 improvement. Equally importantly, either

no or minor adjustments to the extrapolation intervals for

each station of replicates were needed, because C-PrOPS

minimized the influence of heterogeneity on the sampling

across all wavelengths.

FAQ 19. Is there a mechanical system to keep a reference

level if the platform (or pipe mast) does not

maintain (or start with) a level trim?

There are a number of approaches to adjusting the level

of a surface reference, including the use of wedges, rubber

shims, hose clamps, and guy wires (Sect. 12.4). Another

common approach uses three threaded rods to orient two

surfaces relative to one another. In regards to the latter,

the Biospherical Field Leveling Accessory with Adjustable

Trim (BioFLAAT), shown in Fig. B12, allows a mast to

be installed close to plumb and then have the reference

system leveled or a system that was originally plumbed to

be adjusted to being level.

Fig. B12. The prototype BioFLAAT device built

from two 11/2 in 316 SS pipe flanges. Black passivated components were used for simplicity and to

improve clarity (courtesy J. Morrow).

In the BioFLAAT design, the three threaded rods are

actually 316 SS bolts. The bolts are fitted through two pipe

flanges and act as legs to establish the reference plane for

leveling. The device uses 12 self-leveling flange nuts with

cupped washers (also known as spherical collar nuts) to

accommodate angle adjustments easily made using commonly available tools (e.g., a small- or medium-sized adjustable wrench). The convex nut swivels against the concave surface of the washer to align with the threaded bolts

at angles of up to ±4◦ without distortion. The use of only

three legs mechanically constrains the design, so it does

not wobble when the nuts are tightened, and makes adjustment less time consuming.

Differing pipe sizes are accommodated using reducers

(e.g., 11/2 to 1 in NPT in Fig. B12). The flanges in Fig. B12

are also drilled with four holes, so they can be mounted on

a field tripod for deployments wherein the reference is to

be used on a platform that is not moving (e.g., on land or

an offshore structure).

87
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

FAQ 20. What does changing a locking sleeve look like

graphically?

Changing a locking sleeve (Sect. 2.5) is presented graphically in Fig. B13. A miniature flat-bladed screwdriver or

metal pick is needed to facilitate working with the steel

ring part of the locking sleeve (Fig. 4). The steel ring prevents the locking sleeve from sliding past the connector,

but only if it is securely positioned in the retaining groove

at the end of the locking sleeve shell. The steel ring is a

helix “spring” with three layers (similar to a ring used to

hold keys), as shown in Fig. B13a.

Fig. B13. Changing a locking sleeve in nine graphical steps with the focus of each step shown in a cyan

circle: a) a metal pick reveals the split layers of the

steel ring; b) each end of the ring has an indent;

c) working a metal pick into the indent allows the

ring to be released from the retaining groove; d) the

ring completely released from the retaining groove;

e) initially releasing the ring from a locking sleeve

on a cable; f) the female locking sleeve removed

from the connector with the new male lacking sleeve

ready to be pushed over the connector body; g) the

steel ring pushed into the back of the male locking sleeve at an angle; h) the steel ring fitted into

the retaining groove; and i) the replacement male

locking sleeve ready for use (courtesy J. Morrow).

A steel ring retained inside a groove within the end

of a locking sleeve shell is shown in Fig. B13b, wherein

the ring is not entirely seated in the retaining groove of

a male ridge (MR) locking sleeve to emphasize that the

ring can be pried out of the ring at one end and it will

remain accessible for additional work. Figure B13b also

emphasizes that the end of the ring has a small indent to

allow a tool (miniature screw driver or metal pick) to catch

the end of the ring and pull it out of the groove.

Once the ring is initially pulled out of the retaining

groove, it can be incrementally pried from the rest of the

groove by working from the starting edge to the other end.

Figure B13c shows this being done for a female groove

(FG) locking sleeve.

Once the entire ring has been worked out of the retaining groove, the ring is usually still captured in the locking

sleeve shell (Fig. B13d), because it is larger than the inner

diameter of the shell. The ring can be worked out of the

shell with the tool being used or grasping it by hand (or

with a pair of needle-nose pliers) and pulling it out.

When replacing a locking sleeve on a cable, the presence

of the cable complicates the task somewhat, but it remains

straightforward if small tools are used. Again, the process

begins by working one end of the ring out of the retaining

groove for the steel ring, as shown in Fig. B13e for a female

locking sleeve. Note that a female locking sleeve is easier

to work with, because the retaining groove is closer to the

end of the locking sleeve shell than for a male locking sleeve

(Fig. B13b).

Once the steel ring is released from the retaining groove,

the original locking sleeve shell can be slid over the molded

connector and replaced with a new locking sleeve. In Fig.

B13f, the new male locking sleeve is shown next to the connector with the steel ring still coiled around the connector

body. Note that the steel ring is “sprung” outward and is

no longer collapsed as in Fig. B13a, but this is not a source

of impediment for any future steps.

A reliable way to insert the split ring into the replacement locking sleeve is to push the steel ring into the back

of the locking sleeve shell at an angle by hand (Fig. B13g).

Because the inner diameter of the shell is less than the

steel ring, the steel ring will tend to mostly collapse from

its sprung state during this process.

Starting on one edge of the steel ring, the remaining

part of the ring is then rotated into the retaining groove

until an audible “click” is heard. In some cases, it is helpful to push the ring into place incrementally around the

circumference of the ring. The pry tool can then be used

to confirm all of the split ring is fitted into the retaining

groove (Fig. B13h). This is done by going around the circumference of the steel ring and pushing the ring into the

groove to make sure no sprung part of the ring is sticking

out of the retaining groove.

It is critical to confirm the entire steel ring is correctly fitted into the retaining groove, because this

prevents the locking sleeve from sliding past the connector

and unintentionally allowing the connector to be disconnected if either cable is pulled on.

Once a proper fitting of the steel ring inside the retaining groove has been confirmed, the replacement locking

sleeve is now ready for use (Fig. B13i).

When the new locking sleeve is mated, it is advisable to confirm it holds securely against the connector body by pushing and pulling on the locking sleeve

assembly.

88
S.B. Hooker

Appendix C

Nautical Terms (http://en.wikipedia.org/)

01 Level The first deck that is above the main deck

(pronounced “oh-one level”); although called

a deck, it is referred to as a level, because it is

usually an incomplete deck that does not span

from bow to stern and from side to side.

02 Level The deck above the 01 level (pronounced “ohtwo level”).

03 Level The deck above the 02 level (pronounced “ohthree level”).

Abaft In, on, or toward the stern, usually relative to

some part of the ship (“abaft the stack”).

Adrift Afloat and unattached in any way to the shore

or seabed, and not under way.

Afore In, on, or toward the bow, usually relative to

some object (“afore the bridge”).

Afterdeck The deck behind (to the stern of) the bridge.

Aground Resting on or touching the seabed (usually involuntarily).

Amidships In the middle of a ship, in terms of its length.

Anchor A metal, hook-like or plough-like object attached to the ship by a line or chain and designed to grip the seabed to prevent or slow

the drift of a ship, or to deploy an anchor (“the

ship anchored offshore”).

Aport To port, as in, “turn hard aport” (to avoid an

obstacle).

Astarboard To starboard, as in, “turn astarboard” (to

avoid a head-on collision).

Athwartship Being across the ship from side to side.

Beam The width of a ship at the widest point as

measured at the nominal waterline.

Bight A loop in a line.

Bilge The bottom of a ship just over and around

the keel (being the lowest part of the ship,

water and other fluids collect here and must

be pumped out).

Bosun The (petty) officer who controls the work of

other seamen (also boatswain).

Bow The front end of the ship, i.e., the end in the

direction of forward motion.

Bowsprit A spar projecting from the bow that is used

as an anchor for rigging.

Bridge The space from which the ship is controlled.

Bridge Wing A deck on the side of the bridge.

Bulbous Bow A rounded protrusion at the bow just below

the waterline that modifies the flow of water

around the hull to reduce drag and increase

speed, range, fuel efficiency, and stability.

Bulkhead A watertight vertical panel, except for the hull

itself, which increases the structural rigidity

of the vessel, divides areas into spaces, creates watertight compartments that can contain water in the event of flooding, and creates

firebreaks to contain fires.

Bulwark The extension of the ship’s side along the gunwale of the main weather deck.

Bumpkin A spar, similar to a bowsprit, but projecting

from the stern and used as an anchor for rigging.

Captain The person in command of a ship (also called

the master).

Chafe To cause wear on a line by repetitive rubbing

against another surface.

Clear Having freedom of motion without opportunity for interference by collision or entanglement.

Cleat A T-shaped (usually metal) fixture used to

secure a line aboard a vessel or dock.

Compartment A room (or “space”) formed by decks and

bulkheads to contain everything needed to operate the ship (generally speaking, compartments are not called rooms, however, some

compartments are called rooms, e.g., stateroom, fan room, engine room, etc.).

Complete Deck A deck that extends from bow to stern and

athwartship.

Crow’s Nest The highest platform on the main mast that

will support a person.

Deck A horizontal structure dividing a ship into separate levels (analogous to a floor in a building), which also strengthens the hull and protects internal spaces. When using“deck,” to

mean the floor, it means just the upper surface of the deck, not the entire structure of

the deck. “Deck” may also refer to an entire

level, such as, “the radio room is on the second

deck.”

Draft The vertical distance from the bottom of the

keel to the waterline on the hull.

Dog A lever or clamp around all edges of a hatch,

which when tightened, makes the hatch watertight.

Door A usually swinging barrier by which an entry is opened (closed) to access (seal) a space.

The door may be freestanding or incorporated

with a hatch; the hatch is normally kept open

and only closed when necessary.

Fair Lead A straight unobstructed course of a line between two points.

Fairlead A ring, hook, or other device used to keep a

line or chain running in the correct direction

or to prevent it rubbing or fouling.

Fairway A navigable part of a river, bay, or harbor.

Fall Off The opposite of pointing up or heading up

wherein the heading of the ship is changed

in a direction that is more down wind, which

brings the bow leeward (also bear away, bear

off, or head down).

Fantail The stern area of the main deck for a ship

without a poop deck (also called the main deck

aft).

Fast Fastened or held firmly (e.g., “fast aground”

means stuck on the seabed and “made fast”

means tied securely).

Fathom A unit of length used especially for measuring

the depth of water wherein 2 yd (6 ft) equals

1 ftm (exactly 1.8288 m). When burying the

dead, it is customary to inter the corpse at a

depth of 1 ftm, or six feet under. For a burial

at sea, wherein the corpse must be weighted to

remain at depth under the column of water, a

minimum of six fathoms of water is required,

89
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

which established the origin of the phrase “to

deep six” something, as in to discard or dispose of something.

First Mate The officer who is second in command to the

captain on a commercial ship and also called

the executive officer or XO (pronounced “exoh”).

Following Sea A sea where waves are directly in the same

motion of the ship (which increases the speed

and produces a smoother ride).

Forecastle The deck above the main deck and located

at the bow, where anchor machinery is positioned (pronounced “fohk’sel”).

Foul Having freedom of motion interfered with by

collision or entanglement, and, thus, the opposite of clear (a line is foul when it does not

run straight or smoothly, and an anchor is foul

when it is caught on an obstruction).

Freeboard The distance from the waterline to the upper

edge of the hull.

Funnel A smokestack (or stack) on the superstructure

to expel steam, smoke, or exhaust (especially

from an engine).

Gangplank A movable bridge used in boarding or leaving

a ship at a pier (also known as a “brow”).

Gangway An opening in the bulwark of the ship to allow passengers and crew to board or leave the

ship.

Gunwale The top edge of the hull (pronounced “gunnel”

to rhyme with “tunnel”).

Guy A line (chain, rod, or wire) attached to something as a brace or guide (also guyline).

Hatch A horizontal or vertical door through a water tight deck or bulkhead containing dogs

(levers) around all edges, so it may be tightened to make it watertight.

Hawse A shaft or hole in the side of a ship (usually at the bow and stern) through which a

hawser (or an anchor chain) passes (also called

a hawsehole or hawsepipe).

Hawser Large diameter line used for mooring or towing a ship.

Hawsehole A hawse (or hawsepipe).

Hawsepipe A hawse (or hawsehole).

Head Sea A sea where waves are directly opposing the

motion of the ship (which slows the speed and

produces a rougher ride).

Heave The transient up-and-down (vertical) motion

of a ship, or to haul or pull on a line.

Heaving To Turning into the seas (i.e., the direction the

wind waves are coming from) and applying

only enough power to maintain position (used

to protect the ship in heavy seas).

Heel The angle of a tilt caused by the force of the

wind on a ship.

Hold A large open compartment below the weather

deck used mostly for storage or cargo or items

needed for ship operation.

Hove To In a stationary position and headed into the

wind.

Hull The main outer body of a ship with interior

strengthening members designed to prevent

structural collapse, plus decks, bulkheads, and

partitions that form individual compartments.

Icing A serious hazard wherein cold temperatures

(below about −10◦C) plus high wind (typically force 8 or above on the Beaufort scale)

result in spray blown off the sea freezing immediately on contact with the ship.

Jacob’s Ladder A rope ladder having wooden rungs that is

used to board (or disembark) a ship up (down)

the side.

Keel The central structural basis of the hull, to

which all other members used in constructing

the hull are attached either directly or indirectly.

Knot A unit of speed equal to 1 nmi (1.8520 km or

1.1508 mi) per hour (originally speed was measured by paying out a line from the stern of a

moving boat; the line had a knot every 47 ft

3 in (14.40 m), and the number of knots passed

out in 30 s gave the speed through the water

in nautical miles per hour).

Ladder Stairs, which may also be actual vertical ladders, that lead between decks.

Ladder Well The space containing a ladder that leads from

one deck to another.

Lay To come and go, used in giving orders to the

crew (e.g., “lay forward”), to direct the course

of the ship (e.g., “lay to starboard”), and to

twist the strands of a rope together.

Lead The course of a line from end to end (pronounced “leed”).

Lee Side The side of a ship sheltered from the wind.

Level A general term used to designate decks above

the main deck (the first level above the main

deck is the 01 level, the second level is the 02

level, etc.).

Line Any of the majority of cordage (“ropes”) used

on a ship (the specificity of intended use is

part of the specific name of a line, such as

mizzen topsail halyard).

List The angle of a stable tilt caused by improperly

loaded or shifted cargo or ballast (can also be

caused by flooding).

Main Deck The uppermost complete deck (except on an

aircraft carrier, wherein the hangar deck is the

main deck).

Mainmast The tallest mast on a ship (also called the

main).

Mast A vertical spar that extends above the superstructure to support a yardarm used for hoisting flags and supporting a variety of equipment (e.g., antennas, radar, lights, etc.).

Master The person in command of a ship (also called

the captain).

Mate One a large ship, any one of a number of officers, but on a small ship, the first mate.

Memory A tendency of cable (or tape) to attempt to

return to the original shape (length) after being uncoiled (elongated).

Nautical Mile A unit of length (denoted here as nmi) used

in navigation that is about one minute of arc

of latitude along any meridian or one minute

of arc of longitude at the equator, and set

by international agreement at exactly 1,852 m

(6,076.12 ft.)

90
S.B. Hooker

Overhead The underside of a deck, i.e., the “ceiling” of

a space.

Partial Deck Any deck that is not a complete deck.

Passageway A hallway that connects compartments.

Pitch The fore-aft motion of a ship from a rotation about the beam (transverse) axis, thereby

causing the bow and stern to rise and fall.

Poop Deck A partial deck above the main deck located all

the way aft.

Port The left side of a ship, when facing the bow

(denoted with a red light at night).

Porthole A small window through the hull of a ship

to provide light and viewing, for which the

glass section may swing open to provide air,

usually consisting of a circular glass disk encased in a metal frame that is attached into

the side of the hull. A porthole has a metal

cover that may be closed and dogged to secure

it for heavy seas, prevent light from escaping,

and to provide protection.

Propeller The screw at the end of the shaft that turns

to propel the ship.

Quarterdeck Not an actual deck, but an area designated

by the commanding officer for the conduct of

official functions, and it serves as the station

of the officer of the deck (its location in port

depends on how the ship is moored).

Roll The side-to-side motion of a ship from a rotation about the fore-aft axis, causing the port

and starboard sides to rise and fall.

Rudder A vertical device near the stern of a ship used

to steer the ship as it moves through the water

by redirecting the water moving past the hull

to impart a turning or yawing motion to the

ship.

Scuppers Drains and ports, frequently installed in a continuous trough, along the bulwarks that allow

water to flow out and over the side of the ship

during heavy weather.

Sea Anchor A stabilizer, in the form of a large bag or

drogue made of heavy canvas, deployed in the

water for heaving to in heavy weather (it acts

as a brake and keeps the hull in line with the

wind and perpendicular to waves).

Second Deck The first complete deck below the main deck.

Shackle A usually u-shaped fastening device secured

by a bolt or pin through holes in the end

of the two arms; or a unit of measure for

the lengths of nautical cables and chains, especially anchor chain, having a standardized

value of 15 ftm (27.432 m).

Shipshape In good order (or squared away); trim and

neat.

Slack The part of a line not held taut; the loose or

unused part.

Smokestack A funnel (or stack).

Space A compartment, or a section of a compartment, can also be referred to as a space.

Sponson A projection from the side of a ship for protection, stability, or the mounting of equipment.

Squared Away To figuratively have everything in order and

readiness, or shipshape (derived from the practice of having yards held rigidly perpendicular

to their masts and parallel to the deck, which

was rarely the best trim of the yards for efficiency, but it made a pretty sight for inspections and in harbor).

Stack A funnel (or smokestack).

Standoff A fixture used for holding something at a distance from a surface.

Starboard The right side of a ship, when facing the bow

(denoted with a green light at night).

Stateroom A private compartment (or cabin) with sleeping accommodations on a ship.

Stern The rear end of the ship, i.e., the end in the

opposite direction of forward motion.

Stow To store, or to put away (e.g., personal effects,

equipment, or cargo).

Superstructure The structure that rises above the main deck

of a ship.

Tack A zig-zag course change wherein the heading

is into and through the wind so as to sail directly towards the wind.

Third Deck The first complete deck below the second deck.

Transom A more or less flat surface across the stern of

a ship.

Under Way A vessel that is moving under control (neither

at anchor, made fast to the shore, aground,

nor adrift).

Void An empty space that is not used for anything

and is sealed.

Wake The turbulence behind a vessel (not to be confused with wash).

Walkway A demarcated area (sometimes as a platform)

with stanchions and chains that extend around

the perimeter of a hazardous area to permit

safe passage.

Wash The waves created by a vessel (not to be confused with wake).

Waterline The line on the hull of a ship to which the

surface of the water rises (the portion of the

ship above the line is afloat, and the portion

below is submerged).

Way Speed, progress, or momentum (to make way

is to move and to lose way is to slow down).

Weather Deck A deck or part of a deck that is exposed to the

weather.

Weather Side The side of a ship exposed to the wind.

Wheel The steering device on a ship; usually a wheel

with a horizontal axis, connected by cables to

the rudder (also called the ship’s wheel).

Wheelhouse The location where the wheel is located (also

called pilothouse or bridge).

Whitecaps Foam or spray on wave tops caused by stronger

winds (usually above Force 4).

Windlass A winch mechanism, usually with a horizontal

axis.

Windward In the direction that the wind is coming from.

Yard A horizontal spar (also a dockyard or shipyard).

Yardarm The very end of a yard (often mistaken for a

“yard,” which refers to the entire spar).

Yaw A ship’s rotational motion about the vertical

axis, causing the fore and aft ends to swing

from side to side.

91
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

Appendix D

Radiotelephone Terms

(http://en.wikipedia.org/)

5×5 Five By five.

Acknowledge I understand the contents of the received message.

Affirmative Yes, confirm, permission granted, or correct.

With a poor quality connection, the words

“Affirmative” and “Negative” can be mistaken

for one another, so “Yes” and “Confirm” are

also used. Sometimes a double click sent over

the radio by keying the mic twice to produce

an audible “- -” sequence (like Morse code) is

used when the addressee is unable to talk due

to heavy workload or stress.

Break Signals a requested pause to open the channel

for other transmissions, especially for allowing

higher priority traffic to get through.

Break-Break Signals to all listeners on the frequency, the

message to follow is priority.

Call Sign The combination of characters or words assigned to an operator for use in communication.

Come In Permission given to begin speaking.

Confirm Affirmative.

Copy Transmission heard; okay or all right.

Disregard Cancel transmission in progress or last transmission.

Do You Read? How do you hear my transmission (e.g., loud

and clear)?

Five By Five Loud and Clear†.

Go Send your message; also Go Ahead or Send

Your Traffic.

I Spell I will spell the following phonetically (e.g.,

“GMT, I spell, Golf Mike Tango.”).

Loud And Clear I understand; also, Five By Five.

Mayday A distress call, which is repeated three times

at the beginning of every following transmission relating to the current distress situation

(has priority over urgency and safety calls).

Negative With a poor quality connection, the words

“Affirmative” and “Negative” can be mistaken

for one another, so “No” is also used.

No Negative.

Out Transmission ended and no answer is required

or expected.

Over Transmission ended and a response is both required and expected, so go ahead and transmit

(short for “Over To You”). “Over” and “Out”

† In voice procedure, a transmitting station may request a report on the quality and strength of their signal, which is

reported by the receiving station on two scales wherein the

first is for signal strength (loudness) and the second for signal

clarity (Table 1). Both scales range from one to five, with

one as the worst and five as the best. The receiving station reports these numbers separated with the word “by,” so

“five by five” means a signal that has excellent strength and

perfect clarity (the most understandable signal possible).

are never used at the same time, because their

meanings are mutually exclusive. Historically,

“Over and Out” was used to mean “Over to

you, and when you are done, I am out.” The

same meaning can be communicated with just

“Out,” as in “Lab, Deck; station in Two minutes; Out.”

Pan-Pan An urgency call, which is repeated three times

at the beginning of every following transmission relating to the urgent situation (has priority over safety calls).

Radio Check How do you Read me, i.e., what is my signal

strength and clarity (Table 1)?

Read Hear, as in “I Read you Loud and Clear.”

Read Back Repeat last transmission.

Read You I hear you, with signal strength by clarity (as

in “I read you five by five”).

Repeat An artillery proword not be used as an R/T

proword, although it can be used in the middle of an R/T transmission to emphasize information, as in, “Lab, Deck, the profiler is

under the boat; Repeat, the profiler is under

the boat; Over.”

Roger Transmission received (even without understanding it), also “Roger That”; a “Roger” response to a “Radio Check” means “Loud and

Clear” (Roger was the U.S. military designation for the letter “R,” as in received, from

1927 to 1957). It is important to not say

“Roger” when actually meaning “Affirmative”

or “Negative.”

Roger That Roger.

Say Again Please repeat last transmission (the word “repeat” should not be used, because it is associated with artillery requests).

S ́ecurit ́e A safety call, which is repeated three times at

the beginning of every following transmission

relating to the safety situation (has priority

over routine calls).

Send Initial call received; send me your message.

Speak Slower You are talking too fast.

Standby Pause for a few seconds (also, Wait One), otherwise “I Will Call You Back” must be used.

This Is Identifies the addresser (the person speaking).

Voice Procedure The variety of techniques used to clarify, simplify, and standardize spoken communications

over two-way radios.

Wait The answer or requested information is not

immediately available, but will be available

shortly; until then, no transmission will be

sent, so do not expect a reply (can be suffixed with a number to indicated estimated

number of minutes until a reply can be expected, e.g., “Wait Two” indicates a reply in

approximately two minutes).

Wait One Standby for a short time (approximately one

minute or less).

Wilco I understand the received message and will

comply with the contents (thus, “Roger” and

“Wilco” used together is redundant, because

“Wilco” includes the acknowledgement function of “Roger,” so “Roger Wilco” should not

be used).

Yes Affirmative.

92
S.B. Hooker

Appendix E

Description of Tools and Parts

An adjustable wrench has one fixed jaw and one

movable jaw wherein turning a knurled gear sets the

variable width of opening at one end of the handle and the

maximum opening is sized to match the specific dimensions of

a common range of fasteners, e.g., nuts and bolts.

A ball-point driver is a specific kind of hex (or

Allen) key or wrench wherein on one end the hexagonal cross-section used to drive bolts and screws that

have a hexagonal socket in the head is on a tip that

is ball shaped. The ball-shaped end permits angled

entry of the driver of up to 25◦ to engage and drive

the bolt or screw thereby allowing the fastener to be

tightened or loosened in space-limited situations.

A bowline (rhymes with “toe pin”) is

a knot used to form a secure loop in a

line that will not jam while remaining

easy to untie as follows: a) form a loop

in a line by passing the free end over

itself; b) pass the free end under and through the loop to take

a turn behind the standing line before the loop; c) pass the free

end of the line over and through the loop; and d) tighten the

knot by pulling on the free end while holding the standing line.

A (usually nylon) cable tie binds several electronic

cables or wires together to secure or organize them

(also called a tie-wrap, zip tie, or Ty-Rap per the Thomas &

Betts brand name). The cable tie is put around the item(s) to

be bound, with the loose tape end pulled through the space in

the head. When the loose end with integrated rack is pulled

past the head ratchet, it is prevented from being pulled back

and the resulting loop may only be pulled tighter.

A cable tie gun is a tensioning device or tool used

to apply a cable tie with a specific tension. The tool

may cut off the tape flush with the head to avoid a

sharp edge which might cause injury (e.g., the Paladin model

1828.1).

A chinese finger is a woven lacing secured over a

cable with crossings or webbing that increase in distance from one another away from the cinch point.

The cinch point usually has a loop with a shackle, and when

tension is applied to the shackle, the lacings tighten on the

cable, becoming tighter as tension is increased.

A cleat is a T-shaped (usually metal) fixture with

two horns above a protruding base wherein the horns

extend parallel to a flat surface, especially on a boat or dock.

A cleat resembles an anvil and is used for securing a line and

usually used to hold something fast (e.g., a boat to a dock).

A cleat hitch is a knot used to hold something fast to a cleat (e.g., a boat to a dock)

as follows: a) a line is turned around the

base of the far side of the cleat making a full

round turn that is looped under the opposite horn and over the top of the cleat; b) a figure eight is made

by passing the line around and under the opposing horn with

the free coming over the top of the cleat; and c) a half hitch

is mated parallel to the first hitch, wherein the line is passed

around and under the opposite horn with the free end pulled

tight under the line forming the figure eight.

A diagonal cutter is a pliers with beveled cutting

jaws at an angle to the handles to permit cutting off

wires close to terminals. Because the jaws are sharpened, they can be used for cutting a wide variety of materials.

A (worm gear) hose clamp consist of a stainless steel

band with a screw thread pattern and a captive screw

at one end that is turned with a screwdriver or nut

driver to tighten or loosen the band.

The Bosch PS40 cordless impact driver has a voltage rating of 10.8 DCV (12 VDC maximum), a noload speed of 0–1,800 min−1 with an impact rate of

0–3,000 min−1, a maximum torque of 800 in lb, and a 1/4 in hex-shank chuck with locking sleeve.

A needle-nose pliers has long slender jaws used for

grasping small or thin objects, which when held perpendicular to the jaws, can be bent or turned. Cutting blades are usually formed at the vertex of the

jaws, which can be used for cutting (e.g., the free end of a cable

tie).

A nut driver is a tool for tightening hexagonal nuts

and bolt heads, wherein a socket is attached to a shaft

with cylindrical handle (similar in appearance to a

screw driver). The shaft is usually hollow to accommodate

varying lengths of exposed shank onto which a nut is threaded.

An open end wrench has jaws with a fixed width of

opening at one or both ends of the handle, wherein the

fixed width is sized to match the specific dimensions

of common fasteners, e.g., nuts and bolts.

A pipe coupler is a short piece of pipe that is usually threaded on both ends with female grooves. If

the coupler has different sized threads, it is called a

reducing coupler or reducer.

A pipe nipple is a short piece of pipe that is usually

threaded on both ends with male ridges. If there is

no exposed pipe between the threads (shown left), the

nipple is called a close.

A scaffolding clamp, as presented here, has two

clamping surfaces joined at a swivel connection. The

clamping surfaces are shaped to securely clamp to a

range of pipe sizes, and the swivel permits two pieces

of pipe to be secured at arbitrary angles to one another, but usually perpendicular to one another.

A shackle is a metal link, typically U-shaped and

noncorrosive, closed by a bolt, and used to secure a

chain or line to another fixture. The bolt, even if it

is captive, is usually secured using wire or a cable tie

to prevent loosening.

A slip-joint pliers has the joint adjustable to two

or more positions so as to obtain a wide to narrow

opening for the jaws.

A (worm gear) smooth band hose clamp wherein

the band is solid and the worm gear cannot penetrate

to mar the surface underneath the band. Like a standard hose clamp, the clamp is put around the item(s)

to be joined, with the loose end fed into the space

between the band and the captive screw. When the

screw is turned CW, it acts as a worm drive pulling the threads

of the band, causing the band to tighten (or when turned CCW

to loosen). Because of their strong holding power, they can be

used to affix an instrument to a mount without damaging the

painted or anodized surface of the instrument.

93
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

Add to cart

images (2)

Price (Excl VAT): € 12

Hook or Loop

Quantity

ho bought this product also boug

Velcro is commonly used to mean any type of hookand-loop fastener, but it is a registered trademark by

the Velcro company (Amsterdam, Netherlands) for

their brand of fasteners. A hook-and-loop fastener

consist of two fabric strips attached to opposing surfaces to be

fastened. The first component has small hooks and the second has smaller loops. When the two different materials are

pressed together, the hooks catch in the loops and the mated

surfaces are temporarily bound together. The two components

are separated by pulling or peeling them apart, which results

in a distinctive “ripping” sound.

Appendix F

Deployment Checklists

For first-time or novice practitioners, it is convenient

to have deployment checklists for C-OPS and BioSCAN to

ensure all important steps are executed for each instrument

system. This philosophy is an extension of the effort to

list and organize the components needed to mobilize the

instrumentation and execute the data acquisition protocols

documented here.

To keep the checklists brief, so they are not overly burdensome, a streamlined approach is used wherein it is assumed that certain time consuming activities have been

completed or will not occur. For example, it is assumed

the solar reference has been properly installed (Sects. 3.1,

4.3, 5.2, and 7.3), b) atmospheric conditions are sufficiently

stable that extra procedures to deal with unstable illumination are not required, c) ship maneuvers during data

collection have been confirmed, and d) all personnel understand how to start and end an acquisition event.

Other details that might be useful to a particular acquisition event are not always presented in detail, but are

mentioned as reminders. For example, the direction of the

surface swell and the true wind speed are noted in the

BioSCAN checklist, plus recording of the GPS location is

mentioned in both checklists. Other types of metadata

that should be recorded include overall sky conditions,

cloud cover in tenths or octals, and personal observations

that impact data quality (e.g., surface debris on the surface

of the water).

Also presented for handy reference are diagrams for the

following cable assemblies:

1. A six-conductor extension cable for all systems (Fig.

F3);

2. A full-duplex (six-conductor) interconnect cable for

all systems (Fig. F4);

3. A half-duplex (four-conductor) interconnect cable for

all half-duplex systems (Fig. F5);

4. A C-OPS backplane (six-conductor) Y-cable, which

is also compatible with the SuBOPS instrument system (Fig. F6); and

5. A BioSCAN Y-cable, which is also compatible with

the BioSORS instrument system (Fig. F7).

Acknowledgments

The success of the data acquisition and data processing capabilities presented here would not have been possible without support from a variety of NASA programs. The microradiometer, aggregator, and resulting instruments were developed as a joint activity between BSI and NASA GSFC under

a Small Business Innovation Research (SBIR) program entitled

“In Situ Radiometers: Smaller, Faster, and Scalable to Hyperspectral.” The “smaller” refers to the optical instrument that

is built with microradiometers being significantly smaller than

legacy devices (i.e., more than 25% smaller), the “faster” refers

to the sampling rate being significantly faster (i.e., 50–100% or

more), and the “scalable to hyperspectral” refers to a significant increase in the number of channels within the same form

factor (i.e., a 50–100% increase).

The SBIR Phase I contract NNG05CA40C (2005) resulted

in a fully functional microradiometer prototype (not required),

which served to illustrate the potential for success of the project.

The SBIR Phase II contract NNG06CA03C (20052007) moved

the prototype instrument through a complete development cycle, which concluded with the release of a field-tested device.

Since then, microradiometers have been used in the following

commercial applications: a) the above- and in-water BioSCAN

and C-OPS, respectively; b) the ICE-Pro; c) OSPREy abovewater and laboratory instruments; and d) the flight certified

airborne C-AIR sensor suite.

Much of the perspective presented here was developed as

part of the calibration and validation activities of the SeaWiFS,

SIMBIOS, MODIS, GEO-CAPE, and ACE projects. The high

level of success achieved in the fieldwork for those activities

established a foundation of understanding that was the direct

consequence of contributions from many individuals who contributed unselfishly to the work involved (e.g., calibration, acquisition, processing, and sampling). The scientists include (alphabetically) D. Antoine, J. Brown, C. Dempsey, K. Hayashi,

R. Lind, S. Maritorena, J. Morrow, K. Suzuki, and G. Zibordi;

their dedicated contributions are gratefully acknowledged.

The opportunities to establish and refine the mobilization

protocols presented here were the result of deployments on a

number of exemplary vessels. The officers and crew of these

vessels patiently endured a continuing series of requests for assistance and advice when it came time to collect optical data.

The professional seamanship and good cheer of the following

vessels provided the highest caliber of research opportunities:

CCGS Amundsen (Qu ́ebec City, Canada), with a particular acknowledgment to the officers and crew of the barge;

R/V Gulf Challenger (Portsmouth, New Hampshire);

R/V Hakuho Maru (Tokyo, Japan);

USCGC Healy (Seattle, Washington), with a particular

acknowledgment to the officers and crew of the ASB;

R/V John Le Conte (Tahoe City, California);

TR/V Oshoro Maru (Hakodate, Japan);

R/V Pelican (Cocodrie, Louisiana);

R/V Shearwater (Santa Barbara, California);

R/V SRV-X (Norfolk, Virginia), with a particular acknowledgment to the crew who deployed a small inflatable

into the Blackwater National Wildlife Refuge; and

R/V Tethys II (Nice, France).

94
S.B. Hooker

Fig. F1. An abbreviated checklist for deploying the C-OPS instrumentation.

95
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

Fig. F2. An abbreviated checklist for deploying the BioSCAN instrumentation.

96
S.B. Hooker

Fig. F3. A HySEAS extension cable.

97
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

Fig. F4. A HySEAS (full-duplex) interconnect cable.

98
S.B. Hooker

Fig. F5. A HySEAS half-duplex interconnect cable.

99
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

Fig. F6. A C-OPS backplane Y-cable.

100
S.B. Hooker

Fig. F7. A BioSCAN frame Y-cable.

101
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

Glossary

AC Alternating Current

ADC Analog-to-Digital Converter

AFFF Aqueous Film-Forming Foam

AGM Absorbent Glass Mat

AIS Automatic Identification System

AOPs Apparent Optical Properties

ASB Arctic Survey Boat

AWG American Wire Gauge

BAR Boating Accident Report

BioFLAAT Biospherical Field Leveling Accessory with

Adjustable Trim

BioGPS Biospherical Global Positioning System

BioMAST Biospherical Mast for Advanced Solar Technologies

BioSCAN Biospherical Surface and Celestial Acquisition

Network

BioSHADE Biospherical Shadowband Accessory for Diffuse Irradiance

BioSORS Biospherical Surface Ocean Reflectance System

BSI Biospherical Instruments Inc.

C-AIR Coastal Airborne In-situ Radiometer

CB Citizens’ Band

C-BEAMMS Compact-Buoyant Environmental AOP Measurements of the Moon and Sun

C-CAPS Compact-Conductivity Accessory for Profiling

Systems

CCW Counterclockwise

CCGS Canadian Coast Guard Ship

CDR Climate-quality Data Records

CIRPAS Center for Interdisciplinary Remotely-Piloted

Aircraft Studies

CLP Cleaner Lubricant Preservative

C-OPS Compact Optical Profiling System

COTS Commercial-Off-The-Shelf

CPR Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation

C-PrOPS Compact-Propulsion Option for Profiling Systems

CTD Conductivity, Temperature, and Depth

CUT Coordinated Universal Time

CW Clockwise

DC Direct Current

DCM Depth of the Chlorophyll Maximum

EPF Eye Protection Factor

EPIRB Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacon

FAQ Frequently Asked Question

FCC Federal Communications Commission

FFT Fast Fourier Transform

FG Female Grooves

FS Female Sockets

FVA Full View Angle

GEO-CAPE Geostationary Coastal and Air Pollution

Events

GMT Greenwich Mean Time

GPO Government Printing Office

GPS Global Positioning System

GSFC Goddard Space Flight Center

HySEAS Hybrid Sensors for Environmental AOP Sampling (HySEAS)

IAU International Astronomical Union

ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization

IOPs Inherent Optical Properties

ITU International Telecommunication Union

LJCO Lucinda Jetty Coastal Observatory

MERIS Medium Resolution Imaging Spectrometer

MOBY Marine Optical Buoy

MODIS Moderate Resolution Imaging Spectroradiometer

MP Male Pins

MR Male Ridges

N/A Not Applicable

NASA National Aeronautics and Space Administration

NATO North Atlantic Treaty Organization

NEC National Electrical Code

NFPA National Fire Protection Association

NIR Near-Infrared

NMMA National Marine Manufacturers Association

NPT National Pipe Thread

NRC National Research Council

OCULLAR Ocean Color Underwater Low Light Advanced

Radiometer

OCTS Ocean Color and Temperature Scanner

PARALELS Passive and Active Radiometers for Advanced

Light, Ecosystem, and Littoral Studies

PC Personal Computer

PCA Printed Circuit Assembly

PFD Personal Flotation Device

PMT Photomultiplier Tube

PROSIT Processing of Radiometric Observations of

Seawater using Information Technologies

PSD Power Spectral Density

PTT Push-To-Talk or Press-To-Transmit.

QA Quality Assurance

QC Quality Control

RMA Return Merchandise Authorization

RS Recommended Standard

R/T Radiotelephone

R/V Research Vessel

SBIR Small Business Innovation Research

SeaBASS SeaWiFS Bio-Optical Archive and Storage

System

SeaWiFS Sea-viewing Wide Field-of-View Sensor

102
S.B. Hooker

SIMBIOS Sensor Intercalibration and Merger for Biological and Interdisciplinary Oceanic Studies

SiP Silicon Photodetector

SPF Sun Protection Factor

SuBOPS Submersible Biospherical Optical Profiling

System

SUV Sports Utility Vehicle

T-MAST Telescoping Mount for Advanced Solar Technologies

TF2E Transfluorometer Two-Emission Extension

TR/V Training Research Vessel

TUC Temps Universel Coordonn ́e

UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply

USB Universal Serial Bus

USCG United States Coast Guard

USCGC United States Coast Guard Cutter

USDA United States Department of Agriculture

UPF Ultraviolet Protection Factor

USB Universal Serial Bus

USV Unmanned Surface Vessel

UTC Coordinated Universal Time

UUV Unmanned Underwater Vehicle

UV Ultraviolet

VDS Visual Distress Signal

VHF Very High Frequency

VIIRS Visible and Infrared Imaging Radiometer

Suite

VIS Visible

XTRA Expandable Technologies for Radiometric Applications

Symbols

E Irradiance.

Ed(z, λ) The in-water vertical profile of downward irradiance.

Ed(0+, λ) The downward irradiance above the water surface (the global solar irradiance).

Eu(z, λ) The in-water vertical profile of upward irradiance.

I Current.

L Radiance.

Li(0+, λ) The indirect sky radiance.

LT (0+, λ) The total radiance at the sea surface.

Lu(z, λ) The in-water vertical profile of upwelled radiance.

LW (λ) The water-leaving radiance.

Q The bidirectional function for the radiance field,

which is expressed as an irradiance-to-radiance

ratio.

Qn The Q-function for nadir-viewing observations.

R Resistance.

t Time.

V Voltage.

x The generalized horizontal direction.

y The generalized meridional direction.

z The vertical (depth) coordinate.

z = 0- A depth immediately below the sea surface (the

null depth).

z = 0+ A height immediately above the sea surface.

θ The viewing angle with respect to the vertical.

λ Wavelength.

φ The solar azimuth angle.

φ- An angle 90◦ CCW (from above) away from the

Sun plane, i.e., φ − π/2.

φ+ An angle 90◦ CW (from above) away from the

Sun plane, i.e., φ + π/2.

References

Antoine, D., F. d’Ortenzio, S.B. Hooker, G. B ́ecu, B. Gentili,

D. Tailliez, and A.J. Scott, 2008: Assessment of uncertainty in the ocean reflectance determined by three satellite ocean color sensors (MERIS, SeaWiFS and MODIS-A)

at an offshore site in the Mediterranean Sea (BOUSSOLE

project). J. Geophys. Res., 113, C07013, doi:10.1029/2007

JC004472, 2008.

Antoine, D., S.B. Hooker, S. B ́elanger, A. Matsuoka, and M.

Babin, 2013: Apparent optical properties of the Canadian

Beaufort Sea, part I: Observational overview and water

column relationships. Biogeosci., 10, 4,493–4,509.

Bailey, S.W., S.B. Hooker, D. Antoine, B.A. Franz, P.J. Werdell, 2008: Sources and assumptions for the vicarious calibration of ocean color satellite observations. Appl. Opt.,

47, 2,035–2,045.

Booth, C.R., J.H. Morrow, R.N. Lind, and S.B. Hooker, 2010:

“Development of the Microradiometer.” In: Morrow, J.H.,

S.B. Hooker, C.R. Booth, G. Bernhard, R.N. Lind, and

J.W. Brown, 2010: Advances in Measuring the Apparent

Optical Properties (AOPs) of Optically Complex Waters.

NASA Tech. Memo. 2010–215856, NASA Goddard Space

Flight Center, Greenbelt, Maryland, 27–41 pp.

Clark, D., H.R. Gordon, K.J. Voss, Y. Ge, W. Broenkow, and

C. Trees, 1997: Validation of atmospheric correction over

the oceans. J. Geophys. Res., 102, 17,209–17,217.

Doxaran D., J. Ehn, S. B ́elanger, A. Matsuoka, S. Hooker,

and M. Babin, 2012: Remote sensing the dynamics of suspended particles in the Mackenzie River plume (Canadian

Arctic Ocean). Biogeosci., 9, 3,213–3,229.

Fichot, C.G., K. Kaiser, S.B. Hooker, R.M.W. Amon, M. Babin,

S. B ́elanger, S.A. Walker, and R. Benner, 2013: Pan-Arctic

views of continental runoff in the Arctic Ocean. Sci. Rep.,

3, 1053, doi:10.1038 /srep01053.

Ferris, C.D., W.F. Hammett, J.C. Whitaker, and W.E. DeWitt, 2005: “Safety.” In: The Electronics Handbook, Second Edition, J.C. Whitaker, Ed., CRC Press, Boca Raton,

2,317–2,324.

103
Mobilization Protocols for HySEAS Observations

Hooker, S.B., 2010: “The Telescoping Mount for Advanced

Solar Technologies (T-MAST).” In: Morrow, J.H., S.B.

Hooker, C.R. Booth, G. Bernhard, R.N. Lind, and J.W.

Brown, Advances in Measuring the Apparent Optical Properties (AOPs) of Optically Complex Waters. NASA Tech.

Memo. 2010–215856, NASA Goddard Space Flight Center,

Greenbelt, Maryland, 66–71.

, and W.E. Esaias, 1993: An overview of the SeaWiFS

project. Eos, Trans., Amer. Geophys. Union, 74, 241–

246.

, C.R. McClain, J.K. Firestone, T.L. Westphal, E-n. Yeh,

and Y. Ge, 1994: The SeaWiFS Bio-Optical Archive and

Storage System (SeaBASS), Part 1. NASA Tech. Memo.

104566, Vol. 20, S.B. Hooker and E.R. Firestone, Eds.,

NASA Goddard Space Flight Center, Greenbelt, Maryland, 40 pp.

, G. Zibordi, G. Lazin, and S. McLean, 1999: The SeaBOARR-98 Field Campaign. NASA Tech. Memo. 1999–

206892, Vol. 3, S.B. Hooker and E.R. Firestone, Eds.,

NASA Goddard Space Flight Center, Greenbelt, Maryland, 40 pp.

, and S. Maritorena, 2000: An evaluation of oceanographic

radiometers and deployment methodologies. J. Atmos.

Ocean. Technol., 17, 811–830.

, G. Lazin, G. Zibordi, and S. McLean. 2002. An evaluation of above- and in-water methods for determining waterleaving radiances. J. Atmos. Oceanic Technol., 19, 486–

515.

, and A. Morel, 2003: Platform and environmental effects

on above- and in-water determinations of water-leaving radiances. J. Atmos. Ocean. Technol., 20, 187–205.

, G. Zibordi, J-F. Berthon, D. D’Alimonte, D. van der

Linde, and J.W. Brown, 2003: Tower-Perturbation Measurements in Above-Water Radiometry. NASA Tech.

Memo. 2003–206892, Vol. 23, S.B. Hooker and E.R. Firestone, Eds., NASA Goddard Space Flight Center, Greenbelt, Maryland, 35 pp.

, , , and J.W. Brown, 2004: Above-water radiometry in shallow, coastal waters. Appl. Opt., 43, 4,254–

4,268.

, and , 2005: Platform perturbations in above-water

radiometry. Appl. Opt., 44, 553–567.

, C.R. McClain, and A. Mannino, 2007: NASA Strategic Planning Document: A Comprehensive Plan for the

Long-Term Calibration and Validation of Oceanic Biogeochemical Satellite Data. NASA Special Pub. 2007–214152,

NASA Goddard Space Flight Center, Greenbelt, Maryland, 31 pp.

, R.N. Lind, J.H. Morrow, and J.W. Brown, 2010a: “The

Submersible Biospherical Optical Profiling System (SuBOPS).” In: Morrow, J.H., S.B. Hooker, C.R. Booth, G.

Bernhard, R.N. Lind, and J.W. Brown, Advances in Measuring the Apparent Optical Properties (AOPs) of Optically Complex Waters. NASA Tech. Memo. 2010–215856,

NASA Goddard Space Flight Center, Greenbelt, Maryland, 17–26.

, J.H. Morrow, and J.W. Brown, 2010b: “The Biospherical

Surface Ocean Reflectance System (BioSORS).” In: Morrow, J.H., S.B. Hooker, C.R. Booth, G. Bernhard, R.N.

Lind, and J.W. Brown, Advances in Measuring the Apparent Optical Properties (AOPs) of Optically Complex Waters. NASA Tech. Memo. 2010–215856, NASA Goddard

Space Flight Center, Greenbelt, Maryland, 8–16.

, G. Bernhard, J.H. Morrow, C.R. Booth, T. Comer, R.N.

Lind, and V. Quang, 2012: Optical Sensors for Planetary

Radiant Energy (OSPREy): Calibration and Validation

of Current and Next-Generation NASA Missions. NASA

Tech. Memo. 2012–215872, NASA Goddard Space Flight

Center, Greenbelt, Maryland, 117 pp.

, J.H. Morrow, and A. Matsuoka, 2013: Apparent optical

properties of the Canadian Beaufort Sea, part II: The 1%

and 1 cm perspective in deriving and validating AOP data

products. Biogeosci., 10, 4,511–4,527.

, and J.W. Brown, 2014: Processing of Radiometric Observations of Seawater using Information Technologies

(PROSIT): In-Water User Manual. NASA Tech. Memo.,

NASA Goddard Space Flight Center, Greenbelt, Maryland, (in prep.).

Matsuoka, A., S.B. Hooker, A. Bricaud, B. Gentili, and M.

Babin, 2012: Estimating absorption coefficients of colored

dissolved organic matter (CDOM) using a semianalytical

algorithm for southern Beaufort Sea (Canadian Arctic) waters: application to deriving concentrations of dissolved organic carbon from space. Biogeosci., 10, 917–927.

Morrow, J.H., S.B. Hooker, C.R. Booth, G. Bernhard, R.N.

Lind, and J.W. Brown, 2010a: Advances in Measuring the

Apparent Optical Properties (AOPs) of Optically Complex

Waters, NASA Tech. Memo. 2010–215856, NASA Goddard Space Flight Center, Greenbelt, Maryland, 80 pp.

, C.R. Booth, R.N. Lind, and S.B. Hooker, 2010b: “The

Compact-Optical Profiling System (C-OPS).” In: Morrow, J.H., S.B. Hooker, C.R. Booth, G. Bernhard, R.N.

Lind, and J.W. Brown, Advances in Measuring the Apparent Optical Properties (AOPs) of Optically Complex Waters. NASA Tech. Memo. 2010–215856, NASA Goddard

Space Flight Center, Greenbelt, Maryland, 42–50.

, S.B. Hooker, G. Bernhard, and R.N. Lind, 2010c: “Scalable Hydro-optical Applications for Light-Limited Oceanography (SHALLO).” In: Morrow, J.H., S.B. Hooker, C.R.

Booth, G. Bernhard, R.N. Lind, and J.W. Brown,

Advances in Measuring the Apparent Optical Properties

(AOPs) of Optically Complex Waters. NASA Tech. Memo.

2010–215856, NASA Goddard Space Flight Center, Greenbelt, Maryland, 60–65.

Mueller, J.L., 2000: “Overview of Measurement and Data

Analysis Protocols.” In: Fargion, G.S., and J.L. Mueller,

Ocean Optics Protocols for Satellite Ocean Color Sensor

Validation, Revision 2. NASA Tech. Memo. 2000–209966,

NASA Goddard Space Flight Center, Greenbelt, Maryland, 87–97.

104
S.B. Hooker

, 2002: “Overview of Measurement and Data Analysis

Protocols.” In: Mueller, J.L., and G.S. Fargion, Ocean

Optics Protocols for Satellite Ocean Color Sensor Validation, Revision 3, Volume 1. NASA Tech. Memo. 2002–

210004/Rev3–Vol1, NASA Goddard Space Flight Center,

Greenbelt, Maryland, 123–137.

, 2003: “Overview of Measurement and Data Analysis

Methods.” In: Mueller, J.L., and 17 Coauthors, Ocean

Optics Protocols for Satellite Ocean Color Sensor Validation, Revision 4, Volume III: Radiometric Measurements

and Data Analysis Protocols. NASA Tech. Memo. 2003–

211621/Rev4–Vol.III, NASA Goddard Space Flight Center, Greenbelt, Maryland, 1–20.

, and R.W. Austin, 1992: Ocean Optics Protocols for SeaWiFS Validation. NASA Tech. Memo. 104566, Vol. 5, S.B.

Hooker and E.R. Firestone, Eds., NASA Goddard Space

Flight Center, Greenbelt, Maryland, 43 pp.

, and , 1995: Ocean Optics Protocols for SeaWiFS

Validation, Revision 1. NASA Tech. Memo. 104566, Vol.

25, S.B. Hooker, E.R. Firestone, and J.G. Acker, Eds.,

NASA Goddard Space Flight Center, Greenbelt, Maryland, 66 pp.

National Aeronautics and Space Administration, 2010: Responding to the Challenge of Climate and Environmental

Change: NASA’s Plan for a Climate-Centric Architecture

for Earth Observations and Applications from Space. National Aeronautics and Space Administration, Washington,

DC, 48 pp.

NEC, 2011: National Electrical Code Handbook, Twelfth Edition. M.W. Earley and J.S. Sargent, Eds., and C.D. Coache

and R.J. Roux, Contribs., National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, 1,497 pp.

NRC, 2007: Earth Science and Applications from Space: National Imperatives for the Next Decade and Beyond. The

National Academies, Washington, DC, 456 pp.

Parker, C.D., 2009: In: Encyclopedia of Electrochemical Power

Sources, Garche, J., C. Dyer, P. Moseley, Z. Ogumi, D.

Rand, and B. Scrosati ,Eds., Elsevier, Amsterdam, 225–

232 pp.

105